Rules of Play

1
 GAME PIECE KEY
Light Infantry Weapon (Light Machine Gun) Personnel Unit (squad) Heavy Crew Served Weapon (AT Gun)
Unit ID Rate of Fire (if >1) Number of 21 Unit ID Carrying Class
figures used for (H = Heavy)
Carrying Class Stacking Value
Gunfire Factors (L = Light) (e.g., value = 3) Weapon Type
Unit ID# (AT = AT Gun)
Weapon Type Gun Size Range Limit (only
Range (MG = Machine Morale Level
Gunfire Factors one number listed
Gun) Range Gun Class = maximum range)
Medium Crew Served Weapon (Medium Mortar) Personnel Unit (Officer) Rate of Fire (if >1)
Unit ID Number of 9 Armored Fighting Vehicle (AFV)
Carrying Class figures used for
(M = Medium) Unit ID Cross Country
Range Limit Stacking Value Movement |
(minimum- Weapon Type (e.g., value = 1) Unit ID# Assault
Gun Size
maximum) (MTR = Mortar) Movement
Morale Level Turret DRM (dashed
Gun Size Gun Class Gunfire Factors circle = +2 for first BMG
Range hexspine facing
Light Anti-Tank Weapon (Panzerfaust) Personnel Unit (crew) change) CMG
Number of 4
Unit ID Carrying Class figures used for Transport Vehicle
(L = Light) Stacking Value Unit ID Cross Country
Range Limit (e.g., value = 2)
(year of scenario: Unit ID# Movement |
Weapon Type Assault
maximum) (AT = Anti-Tank) Cover State of
Morale Level Movement
Gunfire Factors passengers
Gun Size * = Special Gun Class (listed on (S = Stationary)
Range
Ammo Table as Panzerfaust)
BAR Gunner
Passenger Capacity
Light Infantry Weapon (Flamethrower) Range (in Stacking Points)
Unit ID Carrying Class Number of 9 Watercraft (WC) Water
(L = Light) figures used for Unit ID Movement
Range Limit Stacking Value
(maximum) Weapon Type (e.g., value = 1) Morale Level
(FT = Flamethrower) Cover State of Carrying Class
passengers (M = Medium)
Casualty Table GF 1 = Flamethrower Range Rate of Fire (S = Stationary)
Gunfire Factors
Equivalent = 30
Passenger Capacity
Heavy Crew Served Weapon (AA Gun) Armored Fighting Vehicle (AFV) (in Stacking Points)
Unit ID Carrying Class Unit ID Cross Country
(H = Heavy) Movement | Aircraft (Stuka)
Fast Traverse Assault Unit ID
Weapon Type (cut to indicate Movement
(AA = AA Gun) no TCA to rear
Gun Size allowed)
Anti-Aircraft
360 gun traverse Fire value (= 8) 30 FT in
circle (solid = Gun Class turret AAMG Bomb value
CMG
FAST) BMG
Rate of Fire (= 3) Range =
2 for FT (5 = ROF/number of
Small bombs ALL bombs; thus 1 x
500 + 4 x 50)

THE AFV CARDS

Machine Guns available: Ammunition types available:
Turret
modifiers for Bow (BMG)
Name Coaxial (CMG)
changing High Explosive Values
turret facing: Antiaircraft (AAMG) (HE Penetration vs. vehicles) | HE Fragmentation
1st hexspine Factors (vs. personnel)
| 2nd and
subsequent Rate of Fire of Main Armament (50C)
Turret Information (Close Top | Turreted)
Movement
Factors: Main Armament Type (50C gun; circle denotes turreted)
Cross Morale Level of vehicle crew
Country |
Assault Target Size Modifier for Hit Probability Table
Movement Classification
Armor
Factors at Penetration Numbers at Ranges 0-2 through
different 60 hexes for each Armor Piercing ammunition
facings and type available to that AFV
aspects

2

1.0 INTRODUCTION
The ADVANCED TOBRUK SYSTEM (ATS)
recreates tactical-level combat in a detailed
and realistic manner. The ATS game sys-
tem was launched in 2002 with the release
of “Advanced Tobruk”, a remake of the ear-
lier AH classic board wargame. These rules
a r e i n t e n d e d f o r u s e w i t h ADVANCED
TOBRUK and ALL subsequent ATS system
games.
A copy of this rulebook is provided with each
complete ATS game. This edition of the ATS
rulebook is version 3.0 and replaces all pre-
vious versions. An online document has been
prepared to focus on important changes
found in this edition. Check in at
www.Criticalhit.com to obtain a copy.
ATS scenarios recreate historical small-unit
actions that depict two or more combatants
conducting combat operations until time
runs out or one side meets specified vic-
tory conditions.
Basic Game Rules—To assist you in get-
ting into the game quickly, a separate BA-
SIC GAME rulebook and training mapsheet
are provided in all boxed ATS games. New
players should begin with the Basic Game
before delving into the main rulebook. Ba-
sic Game concepts work directly with the
main game; there is nothing to ‘un-learn’
between the two. The Basic Game is espe-
cially useful for understanding Line-of-Sight
principles.
2.0 GAME SCALE AND TERMS
2.1 PERSONNEL, VEHICLES, TIME AND
DISTANCE
Each weapon or vehicle counter represents
one weapon or vehicle. Personnel units vary,
representing squads, crews, artillery for -
ward observers, BAR gunners, noncommis-
sioned officers and officers. NCOs and of-
ficers are referred to as LEADERS in the
game. Each game turn represents about
ninety seconds of real time. Each hex rep-
resents 50 yards of terrain.
2.2 GAME TERMS AND ACRONYMS
These rules use a number of acronyms. The
full word is spelled out at the first use of an
acronym, followed with the acronym in pa-
rentheses. Refer to Appendix B for a com-
plete list of acronyms.
3.0 COMPONENTS
3.1 MAPS
The game maps depict historical battlefields.
Labels for street and building names are
occasionally affixed to add historical flavor.
Each map hex has a unique coordinate iden-
tifier, and a center (or sighting) dot used for
tracing Line-of-Sight (LOS). Half hexes are
in play. Some scenarios use only a portion
of the map. Others use more than one map.
When laying out maps for play, orient them
in keeping with the ‘Map Layout’ for that
scenario, and note any limitations on the
playing area listed in the ‘Map Configura-
tion’ section.
3.1.1 Topography
ATS maps use colored topography LEVELS
to represent 3D land-forms on a 2D map
surface.
3.1.11 Levels—Unless marked otherwise,
all hexes on desert maps have a ‘height’ value able for the combatants. Instructions for set
of Level ‘0’. Terrain and Levels rise in rela- up are also provided, including the order of
tive heights to Levels +5, +10, +20, etc. set up. When more than one of a particular
and fall, to Levels -5, -10, -20, and so on. counter is provided, the number printed
Non-desert maps have topographic height under the counter indicates the quantity.
notations printed on them. All terrain of the See 6.7.5 for Dummy units.
same color is treated as on the same level Example: An EIGHT under a 7|6|8 squad
in game terms. means that side receives 8 x 7|6|8 squads.
3.1.12 Terrain types—Most hexes depict a When the Fog of War (FOW) side of a counter
single, particular type of terrain, for example, is shown in an OOB, that combatant sets up
Woods. Some hexes combine two or more the indicated quantity of dummies of the
types of terrain, for instance, a Road through specified type (vehicle or gun).
Woods. The terrain rules outline the effects 3.4.11 Units and Markers not pictured—
of each type of terrain. Before beginning play, add the following
3.1.13 Hex Locations—Most hexes show a units to the printed OOB:
single ‘Location’—units in that hex are all in a) One 2|3|8 Crew counter for each Me-
the same physical place. Some hexes have dium and Heavy weapon;
more than one location. A building may have b) ONLY if NO weapons pits are provided in
a ‘ground level’ at Level 0, and ‘upstairs’ any portion of that side’s OOB, players may,
levels at Levels +10 and +20. Each of these at their option, add one Weapons Pit for each
levels are separate locations, although they Heavy weapon that begins a non-desert sce-
are all in the same hex. Units in them may nario on map.
have different Lines-of-Sight (LOS) and c) Also note that other weapons may be used
stacking limits, and may be targeted sepa- that are not depicted on a scenario card
rately by enemy fire. In the case of Linear such as Smoke Grenades (6.4.72), and
Depressions (LD) and Emplacements, dif- Flares (only during night Spotting Condi-
ferent positions, like ‘Up’ and ‘Down’, or tions, see 6.9.6) during a scenario although
‘Under’ and ‘On top’, are NOT considered not pictured in a side’s OOB.
separate locations but separate positions 3.4.2 Set Up Order
within the same location). Players set up in the order listed for their
Example: A Personnel unit in a building may OOB, with the side setting up first com-
be on the ground level, at Level 0, or one level pleting all set up before the side setting up
‘upstairs’ at Level +10. Each represents a second places any units on the map. In any
separate location within one hex. scenario that has all units of one side en-
3.2 OVERLAYS tering play from off-map, the non-entering
Overlays are cards with printed terrain pro- player sets up first. In any scenario lacking
vided in ADVANCED TOBRUK. Scenario the set up order for units of one or both
Special Rules (SSRs) specify overlay place- sides setting up on map, make a pre-game
ment on maps. Initiative die roll. The lowest roll wins, and
3.2.1 Placement the winner may set up first OR second.
Each overlay is identified by a letter -num- 3.4.3 Set Up Area
ber ID. Simply match the X and Y coordi- Units may set up anywhere in their desig-
nates found on the specified overlay with nated area(s), including in half-hexes.
the matching hexes on the map. 3.4.4 Map Entry and Exit
3.2.2 Overlays do not contain their own Some units enter the game from off-map.
coordinates. Use the hex
coordinate found on the
map hexes beneath the
TABLE OF CONTENTS
overlay. 1.0 INTRODUCTION...........................................................3
3.3 CHARTS AND TABLES
2.0 GAME SCALE AND TERMS.........................................3
Tables on Play Aid Cards 1-
8 have a unique ID, usually 3.0 COMPONENTS............................................................3
found in the upper right- 4.0 SEQUENCE OF PLAY........................................5
hand or left-hand corners.
5.0 STACKING............................................................7
See Appendix A for an over-
view of all system charts
6.0 LINES OF SIGHT AND FIRE.........................................7
and tables. 7.0 GENERAL TERRAIN RULES.....................................10
Example: ‘F2’ is the Casu- 8.0 TERRAIN TYPES..................................................12
alty Table.
9.0 EMPLACEMENTS................................................21
3.4 SCENARIO CARDS
Each ATS game or expan- 10.0 MORALE.......................................................24
sion contains several cards 11.0 MOVEMENT.................................................26
providing a collection of his-
12.0 COMBAT.....................................................29
torical scenarios. Each sce-
nario contains an historical
13.0 SPECIAL TROOP TYPES.................................46
s u m m a r y , a n O r der - O f - 14.0 SPECIAL WEAPON AND CREW RULES...............47
Battle (OOB) for the com- 15.0 SPECIAL VEHICLE RULES...............................50
batants, a turn record
DETAILED LOS EXAMPLES..................................53
track, any special rules
unique to that scenario, per- APPENDIX A: CHARTS AND TABLES.................54
tinent map information, and APPENDIX B: ACRONYMS..............................54
victory conditions.
APPENDIX C: OPTIONAL RULES................................55
3.4.1 Order of Battle
The OOB provides the type
INDEX................................................................................56
and number of units avail-
3
All units enter within the listed instructions 3.5 COUNTERS 3.5.34 Commissar —Repre-
provided in the scenario. Units listed as The die-cut playing pieces, variously called sents one man, a political advi-

entering during a certain turn must enter units, markers, or counters, show individual sor to tactical commanders; has

on that turn but may otherwise enter freely vehicles, weapons, or small groups of Per - a Wounded side like a leader

using any listed entry hexes (i.e., they need sonnel. Counters consist of purely combat counter. A Commissar may never

not set up off map prior to actually using a units (Personnel; vehicles; weapons) and lead attacks or be part of a Firegroup, but

movement impulse to enter). Entering units markers (emplacements; smoke; FFE; etc.) is otherwise treated as a Leader. The mo-

follow all rules of movement. Once exited, Printed on each counter is information per- rale value of a Commissar is shown as an

units may not return. tinent to the play of the game. Armored Fight- ‘*’, indicating specials rules apply (see

3.4.41 Platoon and Convoy Entry—If us- ing Vehicles (AFV) and some other vehicles 10.3.3). Note: Japanese officers also have

ing Platoon Movement or Convoy Movement also use cards to present information. Ad- an ‘*’ morale value but are NOT considered

to enter, treat the map hexgrid as if it con- ditional information relating to units is found Commissars. Commissars receive a move-

tinues off-map in continuous open ground on various Play Aids. The ammunition types ment bonus in the same manner as leaders

(Exception: Roads and waterways are con- available to gun counters are found on the (see 13.1.41).

sidered to extend straight off the map in Gun & Ammo Table for each nationality (Play 3.5.35 Forward Observer
their current hexrows). These units then Aid 5 for each). (FO) —Represents one officer
move through these ‘imaginary’ hexes to 3.5.1 Counter Size from an artillery unit; has a

enter play but may not be fired on until they Counters come in three sizes: Wo u n d e d s i d e l i k e a l e a d e r

reach a hex that is in play. a) Personnel—5/8"; counter; all FO counters have a

3.4.5 Victory Conditions b) Weapons and vehicles—both 5/8" and black triangle on their counters. FOs re-

Victory usually involves seizing terrain or 3/4" sizes; ceive a movement bonus in the same man-

causing enemy casualties. To win, a side c) Markers—both 1/2" and 3/4" sizes. ner as leaders (see 13.1.41). An FO may

must COMPLETELY fulfill the stated Vic- 3.5.2 Nationalities never lead a Firegroup or provide a leader-

tory Conditions. If only one side has victory Personnel, weapons, and vehicles are pre- ship shift/DRM.

conditions, failure to fulfill these conditions sented in a different color for each nation- 3.5.36 BAR Gunner —Repre-
results in victory for the other side. Draws ality: Blue-Gray for Germans; Bright Green sents one man armed with a

are sometimes possible. for Italians; Olive Drab for Americans; Khaki Browning Automatic Rifle and

3.4.51 Victory Points—Some scenarios call for British; Brown for Russians; and so on. has a wounded side like a leader

for one side or the other to earn Victory Emplacements use a 3/4” counter in a dusty counter. Each BAR Gunner has

Points (VP). Players tally VP using the val- yellow, as do all truck counters (colored a 2 Rate-of-Fire (ROF) for its 2 Gunfire Fac-

ues provided on the Victory Point Table. yellow to denote these counter types may tors. BAR Gunners receive a movement

Victory Points are awarded, or ‘earned’, be used freely by any side). bonus in the same manner as leaders (see

immediately when the listed action is ac- 3.5.3 Personnel —There are six types of 13.1.41). A BAR Gunner may never lead a

complished. Personnel counters in the game. All use 5/ Firegroup or provide a leadership shift/

3.4.52 Exit Victory Points—Units exited 8" counters and have three values repre- DRM.

to meet scenario Victory Conditions are senting: Gunfire Factors | Range | Morale. 3.5.4 Weapons
worth the same value to the exiting side as 3.5.31 Squad—Rep- There are three types of weapon counters.

if they were destroyed by the other side. resents 7-12 men Place weapon counters on top of the Per -

Move these units off the map from the exit and have three fig- sonnel unit that is crewing or carrying it

hexes listed in a scenario, paying one move- ures on their front (referred to as ‘manning’ in both cases).

ment point to move off the map from any side; the back of the 3.5.41 Light (L) Weapons— Represent one
map-edge hex. Exit is only available as an counter, bearing two figures, represents a Light weapon that Personnel counters can

option for earning VP if so-stated by SSR or Reduced squad, with lower values for Gun- carry and fire. These weapons are usually

Victory Conditions. fire Factors and Morale. among the standard armament of an infan-

3.4.53 Control—Some Victory Conditions 3.5.32 Crew—Represents 2-4 try company, such as anti-tank rifles

call for a side to control terrain. A side con- men trained to fire Medium and (L|ATR), Light machine-guns (L|MG), light

trols a hex LOCATION if ANY of the follow- Heavy weapons, like mortars mortars (L|MTR), Flamethrowers (FT) and

ing applies: and anti-tank guns, and have Shaped Charge Weapons (L|AT). Light in-

a) The hex is in its original set up area and two figures on the front AND fantry weapons use 5/8” counters.

no enemy unit has ever entered it; back of the counter (one figure is always 3.5.42 Medium (M) weapons —Includes
b) It was the last to enter the location with peering through field glasses); the back of medium mortars (M|MTR), medium ma-

non-Broken/Surrendered Personnel units the counter represents a reduced Crew with chine-guns (M|MG), medium anti-tank guns

totaling at least two Stacking Points (applies lower Gunfire and Morale values. (M|AT) and medium anti-tank rifles

to ANY terrain hex); 3.5.33 Leader—Rep- (M|ATR). Add one crew per M weapon pro-

c) It was the last to enter the location with a resents one man, ei- vided in the OOB listed for each side on a

non-M/F-KILLed AFV/APC (applies to non- ther a noncommis- scenario card (see 3.4.11). All Medium weap-

Building terrain hexes). sioned officer (re- ons must set up with this manning crew.

A side can only control a HEX if it controls ferred to as an NCO Medium weapons use 5/8” counters.

ALL locations in the hex. in game terms) or a commissioned officer 3.5.43 Heavy (H) weapons—Includes anti-
3.4.6 Game Turn Record Track—A group (referred to as an Officer in game terms); tank guns (H|AT), anti-aircraft guns (H|AA),

of rectangular boxes on each scenario card the back of the counter has a reduced Mo- heavy anti-aircraft machine-guns (H|AA),

shows how many turns the scenario lasts. rale value and a ‘red cross’, denoting howitzers (H|HOW), and field artillery

Place the Turn marker in the correct box Wounded status. In all cases an OFFICER (H|GUN). Add one crew per H weapon pro-

for each turn. is represented by the leader counter with vided in the OOB listed for each side on a

3.4.7 Friendly Map Edge—Some rules re- the HIGHEST printed morale value (Excep- scenario card (see 3.4.11). All Heavy weap-

fer to the ‘Friendly Map Edge’ (FME). If this tion: Japanese officers show an ‘*’ instead ons must set up with their manning crew.

information is not listed by SSR, any edge a of a morale value; see 10.3.3 for details) for These heavier -caliber guns are the only

side entered from or the closest edge to that each nationality. An NCO is represented by weapon units that use 3/4” counters.

side’s set up area is considered a FME. the leader counters with morale values that 3.5.5 Vehicle Types and Armor Factors
3.4.8 Scenario Special Rules—The Scenario are lower. There are three types of 3/4" vehicle

Special Rules (SSR) detail unique rules for Example: German Personnel represent an counters. The color of the movement class

each scenario. SSR normally add restric- Officers as 1|1|8s and NCOs with 1|1|7s. icon (printed behind a vehicle’s movement

tions or abilities to a side just for that sce- See 13.1.41 for leader movement bonuses. point rating on the counter’s upper right

nario and sometimes override rules. hand corner) indicates the type of vehicle.

4
3.5.51 Gray —Ar mored Fighting Vehicles
(AFV), a vehicle type that includes Tanks,
self-propelled guns (SPGs), and armored
cars (wheeled vehicles with gray movement
icons). All AFVs have their own AFV Cards
(note that most ATS games include bonus
AFV counters included for future expan-
sions, without their own AFV Cards).
3.5.52 Yellow —Armored Personnel Carri-
ers (APC), a vehicle type that includes half-
tracks and Carriers. ALL APCs have an Ar-
mor Factor (AF) of ‘0’ (zero).
3.5.53 White—Soft-skinned transport such
as trucks, Jeeps and staff cars. This ve-
hicle type is referred to as truck type ve-
hicles, and ‘armed trucks’ if armed. All Truck
type vehicles have an AF of ‘-1’ (negative
one) for game purposes (although they are
not technically ‘armored’ vehicles).
3.5.54 Open-Topped Vehicles—Some AFVs
and APCs lack a fully enclosed compartment
for the crew. These are ‘Open-Topped’ (OT)
vehicles, and have a white outline surround-
ing the vehicle art on the counter (e.g., Ger-
man Sd 250-1 half-track). Truck type ve-
hicles are never classified as OT for game
purposes.
3.5.6 Movement Class
There are three movement classes for ve-
hicles, indicated by the SHAPE of the gray,
yellow or white movement icon.
a) Tracked Vehicle—Oval movement icon.
b) Half-Tracked —Oval plus small circle
movement icon.
c) Wheeled—Movement icon consists of two
large circles.
3.5.7 Target Size HPT DRM
Some vehicles and Heavy weapons receive
a Target Size modifier on the Hit Probability
Table (HPT), including tables A2 and A3.
Target size modifiers are NEVER used as
column shifts on the Casualty Table. A color
circle behind the unit ID letter/# on a ve-
hicle/H weapon counter indicates the size
modifier as follows:
a) Black ID—Large target: -1 HPT DRM;
b) White ID—Small target: +1 HPT DRM;
c) Red ID—Very Small target: +2 HPT DRM.
3.5.8 Turrets and 360 traverse guns
Some vehicles have turrets, while some guns
are capable of firing in all directions (360-
degrees). A circle around the Gun Size indi-
cates that a weapon can fire 360-degrees.
A solid circle denotes a ‘fast’ turret or gun
traverse. A dashed-line circle denotes a ‘slow’
turret or gun traverse.
3.5.9 Ammunition Limitations
A colored square or circle behind the Gun
size reminds players that these units face
some limitations in the ammunition types
they may fire. Always refer to the Gun &
Mortar Ammo Table (Play Aid 5 for each
nationality) and the AFV Card for each unit
for all of the types of ammunition each gun
may fire (use of different types of ammuni-
tion is described later).
a) Gray—High Explosive (HE) only;
b) Gold—HE and Smoke only;
c) White—Armor Piercing (AP) only;
d) Yellow—Armor Piercing Composite Rigid
(APCR) only;
e) Red—Flamethrower;
f) Purple—Smoke ONLY.
3.5.10 Artillery markers
Artillery markers depict off-map actions as
well as rounds exploding on the battlefield
(see 12.12 and 12.13).
3.5.101 CFF—Call For Fire marker is placed 4.0 SEQUENCE OF PLAY
in the target hex on the map when the own- 4.1 OVERVIEW
ing player calls for off-map artillery. ATS is played in turns. Each turn repre-
3.5.102 FFE —Fire For Effect, represents sents about 90 seconds of elapsed time and
the delivery of an artillery payload on the follows a strict order of play, consisting of
battlefield; attacks units IN and adjacent to four Segments that are further divided into
the FFE counter (with a wider or longer at- Phases and/or Actions. It is possible that
tack radius possible in some instances, e.g., nothing happens in a segment or phase. In
Barrage; Line Barrage). that case simply skip it. For instance: if
3.5.103 Barrage Limit —These show the there is no off-map artillery in a scenario,
extent of an artillery barrage. players skip the Indirect Fire Segment.
3.5.104 Counter Battery and Neutralized— 4.1.1 Impulses
These markers are not placed on the map; During the Indirect Fire Segment, Fire &
they are used to keep track of off-map bat- Movement Segment, and Close Assault Seg-
teries on Play Aid 2. ment, players ALTERNATE committing their
3.5.11 Markers units to action. Each act of firing and/or
Markers use mostly 1/2" counters, and moving is called an ‘impulse’, and usually
record game functions and unit status. consists of firing or moving one unit at a
These include: Suppressed markers, Fire time. In some cases, players may move or
For Effect (FFE), Collateral Fire, Movement, fire more than one unit while using ONE
Wrecks, Burning Wrecks, Wire, Turret, impulse (e.g., Firegroups; Platoons). Addi-
Winded, and Courage (shown by various tionally, certain rules (e.g., Assault fire) also
medals, e.g., Iron Cross; Silver Star). offer the possibility of firing AND moving in
3.5.12 Emplacement ONE impulse.
Emplacements use both 3/4" and 1/2" 4.1.2 Pass
counters, and include Mines, Weapons Pits, A player may CHOOSE to Pass instead of
Bunkers, AT Trenches, Sangars, Cave Dug- using an impulse; play then passes from
outs and Hedgehogs. that player to the opponent. After the oppo-
3.6 AFV CARDS nent executes an impulse or passes, play
Each AFV used in a scenario in a particular comes back to the previous player who may
game receives its own card that provides now either execute another impulse with a
Armor Factors and other pertinent informa- unit or pass again. There is no limit to the
tion. Trucks and APCs are all considered to number of times a player may pass, but if
have ‘armor factors’ of ‘-1’ and ‘0’ (respec- both players pass two times in a row the
tively) for game purposes and do not re- Phase or Segment ends immediately. A
quire cards. player MUST pass if there are no more units
3.7 FATE that can perform any impulse activities.
Ten-sided ‘percentile’ dice are used to rep- 4.1.3 Turn End
resent fate. When one die is used, a ‘1’ is Once play reaches the End of Turn Seg-
the lowest roll and a roll of ‘0’ is read as ment, one complete turn is over.
ten. When two dice are rolled together to 4.1.4 Game End
obtain a value ranging from 1-100, the dark A game ends as soon as one side or the
colored die is used as the tens die and the other achieves its Victory Conditions OR at
lighter die as the ones die. A black ‘7’ and a the end of the last turn of a scenario (as
white ‘2’ is read as ‘72’. Read a roll of ‘00’ as printed on the Scenario Card).
‘100’.
3.7.1 Rounding
Unless stated otherwise, round
ALL fractions DOWN. Round
down the TOTAL of a Firegroup,
not each individual unit.
Example, 3.45 rounds down to 3
and 4.8 rounds down to 4. A
Firegroup consisting of three
squads using Assault Movement,
each with 7 GF, rounds down to
TEN.
3.7.2 Die Roll Modifiers
(DRM)/Column Shifts Typically, the first action taken when a player announces
Attacks are usually modified by he'll be using an impulse to fire at the enemy is a check of
DRM or column shifts, depend- the Line-of-Sight to the target hex. A straight edge is simu-
ing on their resolution, in the lated by the dashed line above and it should be noted the
form of: [modifier +#/#L or -#/ LOS touches Crops in hex QQ6 and RR5 before arriving
#R]. DRM modify attacks using in hex SS6. A check of the Play Aid 7, the TERRAIN
the HPT by adding the DRM to CHART, indicates Crops are 'Obscuring' terrain, but no
the die roll; the modified roll cover benefit is obtained for stationary units IN a Crops
must be less than or equal to the hex. However, EACH Crops hex ALONG an LOS (i.e., we
Hit Probability Number (HPN) to do not count the target hex when considering hexes along
obtain a hit. Column shifts an LOS, only the hexes BETWEEN target and firing unit)
modify attacks using the Casu- creates a ONE column shift LEFT on the Casualty Table.
alty Table by shifting the speci- A 1L shift provides a +1 HPT DRM if a gun is being fired,
fied number of columns to the but NEVER a shift AND a DRM.
Left or Right.
5
4.1.5 Speed of Play and Tactical Advan-
tage
ATS games should be played ‘hard and fast’,
with tactics determining more of the out-
come than luck. When moving a unit(s), al-
low your opponent a moment to decide if he
wants to use Opportunity Fire against your
unit(s) in its current hex (or location within
a hex). Once attacks are resolved and play
proceeds, the result stands—even if play-
ers subsequently decide they inadvertently
made a mistake in a previous attack. Play
cannot be ‘backed up’ or ‘reversed’ if an error
is discovered to have occurred in an earlier
part of the game. C’est la guerre… d) Running movement (11.3.13);
4.2 INITIATIVE
To determine which side has the Initiative,
each player rolls a die at the beginning of
each of the following phases and Segments:
Indirect Fire Segment; Fire & Movement
Segment; and Close Assault Segment.
4.2.1 Initiative Choices
The player rolling lowest receives the ‘Ini-
tiative’. Re-roll any ties. The player with the
Initiative chooses to go first or second. Play-
ers then alternate using impulses (firing,
moving, etc.) until the end of the Segment
or phase.
4.3 ELIGIBILITY
To participate in a certain activity in a game
turn, a unit must be ELIGIBLE for that ac-
tivity by meeting all criteria outlined in the
rules. Unless stated otherwise, Broken and
Surrendered units are never considered ‘eli-
gible’.
4.3.1 During any Segment or Phase both
players may perform actions with all, some,
or none of their eligible units. Players are
never required to commit all their units.
4.4 THE FULL TURN
This section summarizes the sequence of
play of a full ATS game turn. More detailed
descriptions of the various activities and
terminology can be found in the sections
listed. One full game turn consists of four
Segments, to be resolved in the following
game turn order:
1. Indirect Fire Segment;
2. Fire & Movement Segment;
3. Close Assault Segment;
4. End of Turn Segment.
Each of the Segments consists of one or
more Phases and/or actions, as listed in
the following sections.
4.4.1 INDIRECT FIRE SEGMENT
A. Roll for Initiative (4.2).
B. Players alternately use impulses (4.1.1)
in the following order:
1. On-board guns fire Smoke (6.4.3); Mor-
tars and Personnel place Flares (6.9.5). Note
that Personnel may NOT place smoke gre-
nades (this is part of the Fire & Movement
Segment).
2. Aircraft Attacks (12.16.3);
3. Off-map Indirect Fire (12.12);
4. Counter -Battery Fire (12.13).
Finish all fire of each step before beginning
the next one. Place an ‘F’ marker on units
that fire, unless hidden (6.8) or off-map.
4.4.11 One Unit at a time—The use of an
Indirect Fire impulse ALWAYS represents
the fire of ONE unit at a time. There are no
Platoon firing or Firegroup opportunities
when using Indirect Fire.
4.4.2 FIRE & MOVEMENT SEGMENT
A. Roll for Initiative (4.2)
B. FIRE & MOVEMENT PHASE—Players
alternately use impulses (4.1.1) to fire and/
or move some, none, or all of their eligible
Personnel, guns and vehicles, in any order.
The following actions are possible, to be
performed in any desired order:
a) Direct Fire (12.5) and on-map Indirect
Fire (12.11);
b) Assault movement (11.3.12) and Assault
Fire (12.8);
c) Cross-Country Movement (vehicles,
11.4.1);
e) Crawling Movement (11.3.11) and Assault
Fire (12.8).
C: Remove all ‘C’ Collateral Fire Markers
(12.5.10).
4.4.21 Eligible units—Only eligible units
may fire and/or move. Eligible units include
those that have not already moved (marked
with a movement ‘arrow’ marker) or fired
their entire Rate of Fire (ROF, 12.6.2)
(marked with an ‘F’ marker). Units using
Continued Movement (still marked with a
movement marker from a previous turn, see
11.4.5) may move, but may not use Direct
or Opportunity Fire (they may use Assault
Fire if using Assault movement).
4.4.22 Marking used units—To keep track
of units that have already fired and/or
moved, place an ‘F’ marker on top of units
that fire and a movement marker on or be-
hind those that move.
4.4.23 Multiple unit actions—The use of
a direct fire and/or movement impulse can
involve MORE THAN ONE unit at the same
time, by using Firegroups (12.5.4) or Pla-
toon Movement (11.3.2).
4.4.24 Multiple Firing Units—Multiple ROF
weapons may ‘save’ remaining ROF for use
later in the same Fire & Movement Segment
(using Direct Fire, Opportunity Fire or Gun
Duels).
4.4.25 Smoke Grenades —Squads may
place Smoke Grenades (6.4.7) while in the
act of moving.
4.4.26 Enemy activity—Enemy units may
(under defined circumstances) use Oppor -
tunity Fire (see 4.5 and 12.7) and initiate
Gun Duels (4.6 and 12.9). Opportunity Fire
and Gun Duels do NOT require the use of
an impulse.
4.4.3 CLOSE ASSAULT SEGMENT
A. Initiative Roll (4.2)
B. INFILTRATION PHASE— Players alter -
nately use impulses (4.1.1) to perform the
following actions:
a) Grenade Attacks (12.15.2) OR
b) Infiltration (12.15.1)
Infiltration refers to the act of entering an
adjacent hex or location, including those
occupied by enemy Personnel units. All non-
Broken Personnel units, even those marked
with movement arrows and ‘F’ markers, may
use Infiltration. Personnel may also exit Full
Cover positions (e.g. under a Hedgehog, see
12.5.66) using Infiltration. Vehicles never
use Infiltration, although Passengers can
use a limited form of it (11.5.5). If units
from both sides are in the same location,
‘Melee’ takes place in the next phase of this
Segment.
6
C. MELEE PHASE — Players resolve Melee
in all hex locations containing units from
both sides (see 12.15.3 for Melee versus
Personnel, 12.15.4 for Melee versus Ve-
hicles).
4.4.31 One action per unit—Both players
are free to choose which of their units act
in the Infiltration Phase, and in what order.
Each acting unit is, however, restricted to
only ONE action, EITHER a Grenade Attack
OR Infiltration.
4.4.4 END OF TURN SEGMENT
A. Both players perform the following ac-
tions:
1. Remove Melee, Overrun (12.14), and
Cease Fire markers (12.16.83); Remove
movement arrows, Flares, ‘2’ Smoke and ‘F’
markers;
2. Check for Intimidation (10.2.3);
3. Decide whether to remove movement
arrows from vehicles (4.4.41);
4. Flip ‘1’ Smoke markers to ‘2’ side (6.4.6);
Spread Flame one building level UP (8.8);
5. Flip FFE markers to their CFF side
(12.12.2);
6. Flip eligible counters to the Fog of War
(FOW) side (6.7).
Any face-up unit with a yellow Fog of War
side on the back, such as an L|MG, may
be flipped back to its FOW side if it is in
terrain providing cover of at least ONE LEFT
SHIFT and out of LOS to all enemy units.
7. All other markers remain.
B. Both players perform the following Rally
actions:
1. Attempt to Rally Broken and Surrendered
Personnel units in the same location as a
leader (10.8);
2. Attempt to restore Surrendered units to
Broken status for all Surrendered units in
the Morale Support Range (10.2) of a friendly
non Broken/Surrendered Personnel unit (no
leader needs to be present) or a friendly
non K-, F- or M-KILLed AFV, APC, or armed
truck;
3. Roll to remove Suppressed markers
(12.5.176).
C. Move the Game Turn marker to the next
box on the scenario card’s Turn Record
Track.
4.4.41 Continued Movement—Players may
choose to keep movement arrows on VE-
HICLES in step A3. Such vehicles will con-
tinue to be marked as moving at the start of
the next Fire & Movement Segment, which
makes the vehicle harder to hit. A non-mov-
ing vehicle may NOT BEGIN moving during
the End of Turn Segment, i.e., only already
moving vehicles may use continued move-
ment.
4.5 OPPORTUNITY FIRE—During the Fire
& Movement Segment, the non-moving
player may fire upon the opposing player’s
moving units using ‘Opportunity Fire’. Op-
portunity Fire does not require the use of
an impulse; once the non-moving player
completes all desired Opportunity Fire at-
tacks, the moving player continues the
movement impulse with any surviving units.
The non-moving player receives use of the
next impulse as usual.
4.5.1 Mark all units that use Opportunity
Fire with an ‘F’ marker. Units not otherwise
eligible to fire, may not use Opportunity Fire.
4.5.2 The outcome of an Opportunity Fire hex; two vehicles or two Heavy weapons
attack is applied immediately to the target. does. The presence of vehicular units and 6.0 LINE OF SIGHT AND FIRE

The firing player may then choose to use Heavy weapons does not affect Personnel 6.1 TERRAIN/TOPOGRAPHY

additional Opportunity Fire attacks against unit stacking in any manner or vice-versa. 6.1.1 Visualization —Landforms and the

the same target (during that same moment Wrecks and F-KILLed H weapons count as terrain forms that sit upon them are repre-

of ‘suspended play’ when the target unit ONE of each type for the purposes of stack- sented like a stack of pancakes. The battle-

moved or conducted the activity [e.g., turned ing-based entry costs ONLY. field has a ‘sea level’, or floor, known as

a turret] that ‘triggered’ the Opportunity 5.3 PERSONNEL UNITS ‘Level 0’ in game terms. Stacked on this are

Fire). Example: A squad carrying a L|MG 5.3.1 The stacking limit is TWELVE Stack- found levels, easily visualized as one, two

could use only the machine-gun, wait for ing Points (SP) of Personnel in a location or more pancakes stacked on the floor. A

the outcome, and then choose to make a (Exception: A handful of terrain types specify person standing on a stack of two pancakes

separate additional shot with its own printed lower limits for specific hex locations [e.g., can see over a one pancake-high obstacle

Gunfire Factors or save its own GF (OR Steeples] and stacking vs. OBA is dealt with to his Line-of-Sight (LOS). A person stand-

combine both in one shot). as per 5.3.11 and 12.11.24). The number ing on one pancake cannot see past a stack

4.5.3 Each individual opportunity firing unit of figures depicted on a counter determines of two or more pancakes along his LOS.

may fire only ONE Opportunity Fire shot its Stacking Points value. Some of these ‘pancakes’ may have Wadis,

per MP spent by the targeted unit in the a) A full size squad numbers 3 figures—3 Ravines, Creeks, Rivers and Sunken Roads

targeted location (MP spent in previous lo- SP; that cut into them.

cations in this impulse are not counted). b) Reduced squad—2 SP; 6.2 TOPOGRAPHY AND LINE-OF-SIGHT

However, there is NO limit to the number of c) Crews—2 SP (exception: crews manning 6.2.1 Line-of-Sight—A straight line drawn

separate units that can use Opportunity Fire H weapons do not count toward stacking); between the center -dot of the firing unit’s

against the same target following the expen- d) Leaders, BAR gunners, Commissars and hex and that of the target hex represents a

diture of a specific Opportunity Fire ‘trig- Forward Observers—1 SP. Line-of-Sight (LOS). Use a thread or a

ger’ like movement. This includes the use 5.3.11 Versus OBA—In any location exceed- straight-edge touching the center -dot of both

of Firegroups. ing SIX Stacking Points of Personnel, the hexes to trace LOS. Depending on the ter-

4.6 GUN DUELS —Under special circum- target location is penalized in the form of an rain and other ‘obstacles’ along this line, LOS

stances (see 12.9.1) the non-active player additional roll on the Casualty Table in any may be BLOCKED or OBSCURED. When

may also return fire with gun-armed vehicles hex attacked by an FFE (see 12.11.24). Spotting Range rules are in play, it IS pos-

and H weapons using a ‘Gun Duel’. Return- 5.3.2 Exceptions sible for a unit to have a LOS to another but

ing fire via a Gun Duel does not require the 5.3.21 The following units never count when be unable to fire at it due to the desired

use of an impulse. Once it is completed, computing stacking limits: Passengers, target being beyond Spotting Range.

the non-firing player receives use of the next crews manning H weapons (i.e., crews are 6.2.11 With a few exceptions, terrain in the

impulse as usual. A Gun Duel may also be counted if not manning a weapon or if their firing and target hexes does not block LOS—

used by a firing player to assert his ‘right’ weapon is eliminated [not F-KILLed]); L and only terrain in intervening hexes, along the

to fire prior to any Opportunity Fire taking M weapons; aircraft; towed weapons (and LOS. If the LOS to a hex is blocked, no

place. Full rules for Gun Duels can be found towed vehicles); and markers. direct or Indirect Fire may be fired into it

in 12.9. 5.3.22 Emplacement counters do not affect (with the exception of spotted fire, a unit

4.7 OPTIONAL RULES stacking. However, units stacked under and spotting for another unit, such as an FO

Players may wish to experience additional on top of emplacement counters and in Lin- spotting for Indirect Fire).

uncertainty and excitement during play by ear Depression hexes are totaled for stack- 6.2.12 Obscuring Terrain—Some interven-

using optional rules. The Optional Rules ing purposes in a location, noting that some ing terrain types (e.g., Orchards; noting this

Appendix (Appendix C) provides rules for Emplacement types have their own stack- terrain type creates Blind hexes), as well as

Variable Impulses, optional sequence of play ing limits (e.g., Blockhouse). Smoke and Dust, do not completely hide

and more. 5.4 OVERSTACKING PENALTIES the target from view, but obscure visibility.

5.4.11 In any location that is overstacked Although firing at an obscured target is al-

(by any quantity) double the usual entry cost lowed, penalties do apply (see 6.4.5 for
5.0 STACKING
for all units of the overstacked unit type. A Smoke and Dust; and 7.1 for Obscuring
5.1 Overview—Stacking refers to the maxi-
location is considered overstacked the mo- terrain; 6.2.64 for LOS blocked by Obscur-
mum number of Personnel units and/or the
ment a unit in excess of stacking enters, ing terrain). In some circumstances obscur-
maximum number of vehicles and heavy
e.g., upon entry of a second vehicle into a ing may be so severe, that the LOS is ob-
weapons allowed in any one LOCATION
hex containing one already or when any other structed (see 6.2.64) and no firing at the
within a hex (as defined in 3.1.13; e.g., the
Personnel unit enters a hex already con- target is allowed. Note that LOS is also ob-
top floor of a multi-story building) before
taining 12 SP of Personnel. scured by Smoke and Dust in the firing and/
OVERSTACKING occurs.
5.4.12 Spotting and OBA: Overstacked lo- or target hex (not just the intervening hexes).
5.1.1 Having more than the maximum num-
cations are easier to spot as defined in the When firing along a hexside with Obscur -
ber of units in a location is called
Spotting Range rules (see 6.3.4). See ing terrain on BOTH sides, only ONE +1/
Overstacking. Overstacking is not forbid-
12.11.24 for OBA attacks. 1L is applied.
den, but results in penalties (see 5.4). A
5.4.13 Vehicle/H Weapon Specific Penal- 6.2.2 Reciprocity—LOS is reciprocal even
unit may enter a hex location in excess of
ties—In overstacked locations apply a HPT if the unit being spotted is ‘only’ a leader or
stacking limits but penalties for overstacking
DRM of –1 PER vehicle or H weapon IN
apply if units in the location are fired upon
EXCESS OF ONE per type against
or a spotting attempt is made against units
overstacked vehicles and/or H weapons.
in the location.
Wrecks/F-KILLed H weapons NEVER
5.1.2 Limits—Stacking always applies to
cause overstacking for TARGET purposes
each location separately. Stacking limits
(i.e., they only provide movement penalties
refer to each side, not the total of the two
for overstacking).
sides (e.g., during infiltration and melee).
5.4.14 Personnel Specific Penalties—For
5.2 VEHICLES AND HEAVY WEAPONS
all attacks that utilize the Casualty Table,
5.2.1 The stacking limit for vehicular units
apply a -1R shift (only, no HPT DRM is
and Heavy weapons is ONE of each type
applied) per additional 3 SP of overstacked This example illustrates the difference be-
per location—two or more of one type vio-
Personnel (or fraction thereof) in a location. tween a “hexside” and a “hexspine”. Most
lates this limit except for a vehicle towing
references in the rules refer to hexsides,
another vehicle. One vehicle plus one Heavy
the name for the six sides that are found
weapon does not create overstacking in a
around each hexagon.

7
 The CHI HA tank may move in
REVERSE into either of the rear The M18 AFV may move FOR-
two hexes in its rear VCA. Using WARD into either of the front two
reverse movement costs hexes in its VCA. It must pivot
DOUBLE the normal MP cost to to enter other hexes outside its
enter a hex. If this was a TRUCK VCA.
type vehicle, the cost would be 1.5
x the normal MP.

FO. If a firing unit can see a target, then
the target can also trace a Line of Sight to
the firing unit, including units spotting for
artillery (e.g., FO). Unlike LOS, reciprocity
does not apply to spotting range.
6.2.3 Exact LOS—A hex containing block-
ing or obscuring terrain only affects LOS if
the thread or straight edge touches any part
of the terrain depiction or contour artwork.
AFVs, APCs, and wrecks (further described
in 6.2.7) as well as smoke (6.4) and Dust
(6.5.2) affect any LOS drawn into or through
their hex, including a LOS that runs exactly
along one of its hexsides.
6.2.4 Adding Heights—Some hexes contain
a combination of land and terrain forms,
such as Buildings, Hillocks, and Woods. The
height of any terrain form is added to the
hex’s terrain level. Height is always mea-
sured in levels.
Example: A building that is +10 levels high,
sitting on a Level 0 hex, produces an overall
obstacle to LOS drawn through its hex of +10
levels if a LOS thread hits the building art.
Otherwise, the terrain is only Level 0 for LOS
purposes.
6.2.5 Unit Location—Treat a unit in a hex
containing more than one NON BUILDING
level as at the level of the center dot in the
hex. Units in BUILDINGS may be at the
‘ground level’ (same level as the hex the
building sits ON), or in higher levels, de-
pending on the existence of additional lev-
els (or ‘stories’ a.k.a. ‘floors’) in a building.
6.2.6 Higher Level Obstacle Along LOS—
In situations where the firing unit and its
target are on the SAME level, any BLOCK-
ING terrain at least +5 levels higher along
the LOS blocks it.
6.2.61 Blind Hexes—Blocking terrain (e.g.,
Woods) and land forms (e.g., Hills) higher
than the target location and along an LOS
may create ‘blind hexes’, one or more hexes
directly beyond the obstacle. They lie in the
‘shadow’ of a terrain form (e.g., building;
woods). LOS to a unit in a blind hex is
blocked. Only terrain and/or land forms (or
a combination of them) that rise +10 levels
or higher than the target unit (compared to
the height of the firing unit) create blind
hexes. Level +5 terrain (e.g., Rubble; Wall;
Hedge) and land forms NEVER create blind
hexes.
6.2.62 LOS Blind Hex Creation Table—
Consult the LOS Blind Hex Creation Table
to determine the number of Blind Hexes
created. The axis on the left, labeled
‘HEIGHT DIFF’ represents the elevation dif-
ference between the higher unit and the
intervening blocking terrain. This difference
must be at least +10 in levels in order for a
line of sight to exist over intervening terrain
or land forms that are +10 levels in height
or greater (Exception: See 6.2.621 for the
effects of +5 Level Hillock terrain). The hori-
zontal axis represents the range in hexes
from the firing unit to the intervening ter-
rain. Cross indexing these two values re-
sults in a number that represents the num-
ber of blind hexes behind the intervening
terrain. LOS is blocked if the lower unit is
within this range of hexes.
6.2.621 Level +5 Terrain—Being in the UP
location of a FULL or PAR TIAL Hillock pro-
vides an LOS over +5 level terrain (e.g.,
Walls; Hedges; Crops). Level +5 Blocking
and Obscuring terrain NEVER create blind
hexes to units at a higher level (Exception:
8+ shifts/HPT DRM along a Continuous
Slope). They only block LOS along the SAME
level.
6.2.63 Tracing LOS—Blind hexes are cre-
ated along the LOS, starting in the hex di-
rectly behind the terrain form, and continu-
ing toward the lower unit UNLESS the Blind
Hex is created by a HILL contour of the
‘same hill’, which reduces blind hexes by
one (see 8.13.21).
6.2.64 Obstructed LOS Due to Obscuring
Terrain —If HPT DRM/LEFT shifts are
EIGHT or greater (including the firing and
target hex for smoke/Dust but Obscuring
terrain BETWEEN only), no unit may fire
into the hex, including placing (flipping CFF
to) an FFE.
6.2.7 Vehicles and Wrecks
6.2.71 Treat AFVs and APCs (ONLY) and
NON BURNING WRECKS in the same man-
ner for LOS and for the purpose of entering
a hex containing a wreck/vehicle. These rise
+5 levels in height and affect any same-level
LOS (or LOS along a continuous downward
or upward slope) traced into or through their
hex (including directly along their hexside),
whether they have moved or not. They af-
fect LOS by adding a +1/1L per vehicle/
wreck through which an LOS passes OR
enters. Wreck/vehicle cover is not cumula-
tive with terrain in a hex. Vehicles and
wrecks never create blind hexes (see 6.4.5)
and do not incur additional entry costs un-
less Overstacking occurs. Burning wrecks
produce smoke and cost 1 + (2 x CoT) to
enter.
6.3 SPOTTING
6.3.1 Spotting determines whether a unit
can actually ‘see’ another unit in its Line of
Sight. Use Spotting for all scenarios in Ad-
vanced Tobruk and its expansion modules
set in desert terrain. While Spotting Condi-
tions are provided in non-desert ATS sce-
narios, this rule is Optional for all non-
desert scenarios unless Night or Fog Spot-
ting Conditions are used. When not using
this rule, the ability to fire is determined by
the ability to ‘see’ a target unit, based only
on whether a LOS exists. Any scenario that
does not state Spotting Conditions by SSR
is assumed to have ‘Optimal’ Spotting Con-
ditions.
6.3.2 A Spotting Ranges Table (Play Aid 6)
is included with the game. It indicates how
many hexes one unit may be from another
and still see or ‘spot’ that unit, depending
on the actual battlefield conditions.
6.3.3 Observation Limits—No unit may be
fired on unless it is within LOS and Spot-
ting Range. Units marked as Fired may be
spotted to an unlimited range if within LOS.
A target marked with a BOT marker may
also be spotted to an unlimited range by
the firing unit that placed the BOT marker.
Spotting Ranges are never automatically
reciprocal.
6.3.31 Aircraft Limits—An LOS (and the
ability to spot) always exists to and from
aircraft noting the Line-of-Sight exceptions
listed in the rules for Aircraft Attacks.
6.3.4 Using the Spotting Ranges Table
1) Match the condition in the left column:
Optimal; Average; Hazy;
Night|Khamsin|Fog—with that listed in that
scenario’s SSR. Use Optimal for any sce-
nario that does not list Spotting conditions
by SSR; all fire at buildings as targets, us-
ing smoke and ALL Indirect Fire uses the
B|SM|I column (as does any unit spotting
for Indirect Fire/mortars);
2) Find the Status column—use the ‘SUP |
FOW’ row for firing units that are Sup-
pressed or for VEHICLE and H E AVY
WEAPON (ONLY; NOT L OR M) TARGET
units that are Fog of War side up;
3) Check the cover state of the Target Unit
using only Moved status and Terrain related
cover states: Moved|Running|Assault; Sta-
tionary (includes Crawling units); Good;
Improved; and Full. If more than one state
of a target applies, use the highest (easiest
to spot) Spotting Range available. A unit is
only considered Moved if marked with a
Moved marker;
4) Find the column under that cover state
for the target’s unit type;
5) Cross-reference to find the maximum
Spotting Range for that unit. No unit may
be spotted beyond the listed range;
Example: A Stationary squad in the open
being spotted by a Suppressed tank in Hazy
conditions would have to be 4 or fewer hexes
away from the tank to be Spotted. If the
squad had fired (and thus was marked with
an ‘F’ marker), the Spotting Range is unlim-
ited.
6.3.41 Exceptions— Apply the following:
Unlimited Spotting Range to any target units
marked as Fired or marked with a BOT
marker (except for smoke). Treat an
OVERSTACKED location as if all units are

8
moving. Add any applicable Height Advan-
tage the firing unit has over the target unit(s).
When firing at buildings as targets instead
of the units inside, firing Smoke, or using
Indirect Fire, use the “B-SM-I’ column for
the current Spotting Conditions indicated
(see 6.3.5).
6.3.5 Height Advantage—A unit at a higher
level than Level ‘0’ adds any level differ -
ence between the spotter and target to its
Spotting Range unless the Spotting Condi-
tions are NIGHT/KHAMSIN/FOG. A unit
that adds to its Spotting Range with height
advantage may also be spotted at the in-
creased range. Also note that for spotting
purposes levels are relative.
Example, a unit in a +20 hex has a +10 height
advantage over a unit on a +10 hex.
6.4 SMOKE
Smoke is produced by burning wrecks, ter-
rain, smoke shells fired indirectly by on-
map guns and mortars or off-map artillery,
and from Smoke Grenades.
6.4.1 Spotting—When firing smoke use the
‘B-SM-I’ column on the Spotting Range Table
to find the maximum range. Ignore the cover
state of the target unit(s) in this case.
6.4.2 Target hexes—Smoke shells, unlike
HE Indirect Fire, may be fired into hexes
occupied by friendly units. Smoke may also
be fired into empty hexes.
6.4.3 On-map units —Fire Smoke shells
indirectly during the Indirect Fire Segment
using the HPT in exactly the same manner
as HE rounds, except they are fired at hexes
instead of individual target units and receive
a -2 HPT DRM. LOS may be traced to the
highest terrain height of a hex and still al-
low smoke to be fired into it, noting any
smoke ‘hits’ are considered to land at the
ground level of the hex. A miss does not
place a smoke counter. A BOT is not placed
when firing smoke ammunition, but any
existing BOT DRM is used for the firing unit
attempting to land a smoke round in a hex.
On-map units may fire smoke into ONE hex
per phase, but may use their full ROF at-
tempting to place one or more smoke
counter(s) in one hex.
6.4.4 Off-map Ammunition—All Off-Board
Artillery (OBA) batteries may fire smoke
ammunition unless restricted from doing so
by SSR. Each off-map battery may place
smoke into as many hexes as its FFE would
affect (e.g., a Concentration may place smoke
in its FFE hex and six adjacent hexes; Bar-
rages may place smoke in every FFE hex of
a Barrage).
6.4.5 Smoke Effects— Smoke and Dust rise
to Level +30 above the ground level of their
hex (or the highest level a building rises to
above ground level when burning). Smoke
markers (including smoke created by Burn-
ing wreck and Flame counters) create a +4/
4L modifier. Each smoke-producing counter
along an LOS is counted, including the fir-
ing and target hex. Smoke and dust effects
are added to any terrain found in their hex
as an additional HPT DRM.
6.4.51 Entry—Note any amount of smoke
adds ‘1’ to the normal cost of terrain for
units entering it.
6.4.6 Smoke Duration
6.4.61 Smoke fired from off-map batteries
lasts for TWO turns. When fired by these,
a smoke counter is placed face-up in the
target hex displaying its ‘1’ side. Smoke fired
from on-map units lasts for ONE turn. When
fired by these, place a smoke counter in
the target hex with the ‘2,’ side up.
6.4.62 Removal—During the End of Turn
Segment, remove all smoke counters dis-
playing a ‘2’ from the map. All smoke
counters on the map displaying their ‘1’ side
are flipped to display the ‘2’ on the reverse
side.
6.4.7 Smoke Grenades
6.4.71 Usage—Any SQUAD (including re-
duced) may place ONE Smoke Grenade in
its own or an adjacent hex during a move-
ment impulse at the cost of ONE additional
Movement Point (or while in the act of crawl-
ing). When placement is announced before
a unit moves from its current hex/location,
it is still considered an Opportunity Fire trig-
ger. The smoke counter may be placed be-
fore a unit moves or while in the act of mov-
ing and Opportunity Fire takes place AF-
TER the unit places a smoke grenade once
the owning player announces a MP expen-
diture for this purpose.
6.4.72 Availability— American and Brit-
ish (and Engineers) OOBs receive ONE
Smoke grenade per 3 Stacking Point unit in
their OOB (including reinforcements). Ger -
man, French, and Italian OOBs receive one
grenade for every TWO 3 SP units. Other
OOBs receive Smoke grenades only by SSR.
Smoke grenades do not have to be assigned
to specific units, they may be used freely.
6.4.73 Placement —Smoke grenades are
placed in the ground level of the target hex.
6.4.8 White Phosphorus (WP) Smoke
Shells and Grenades
6.4.81 Scenario SSR may provide a certain
number of ‘White Phosphorus’ grenades
and/or WP Smoke ammunition. WP ammu-
nition is ONLY available for weapons speci-
fied on the GUN & MORTAR AMMO TABLE
(GM) for each nationality. WP grenades may
be used ONLY by SSR. WP Grenades func-
tion in the same manner as normal Smoke
Grenades with the following exceptions.
6.4.82 Check Morale—Any unit in a hex
location where White Phosphorus smoke is
placed in must immediately perform a mo-
rale check.
6.4.83 Flame —When White Phosphorous
smoke is placed, make a separate die roll
in any terrain eligible for the placement of a
Flame marker. On a die roll of ‘1’, place a
Flame marker in the ground level of the hex.
6.4.9 AFV and Armed APC Smoke Candles
6.4.91 AFVs and APCs carry smoke candles
for self-defense.
6.4.92 AFVs and APCs may place one smoke
counter in its hex upon the expenditure of
a Movement Point, even if F-KILLed. Smoke
Candles may only be used once during a
scenario (they are considered to be auto-
matically replenished between campaign
game scenarios). Place a smoke counter with
its ‘2’ side up in the vehicle’s hex.
6.5 WEATHER AND AEROSOLS
6.5.1 Overview
Aerosols are airborne factors such as haze,
dust and heat shimmer that affect the abil-
ity of men to observe on the battlefield. These
are used in addition to the use of the Spot-
ting Table to depict weather such as intense
9
dust storms, or ‘Khamsin’, that occasion-
ally take place.
6.5.2 Dust
6.5.21 Vehicles moving across the dry and
dusty battlefields of North Africa and the
Russian Steppe raised plumes of dust be-
hind them that caused severe visibility prob-
lems. Dust is only used in a scenario when
provided by SSR.
6.5.22 Vehicles create Dust ONLY when
using cross-country movement to enter
Open Ground and Scrub hexes. Place a
Moved arrow behind the vehicle in the hex
it just exited to represent Dust and ‘follow’
the vehicle with the marker, always keep-
ing it directly behind.
6.5.23 Road and Track—Vehicles moving
along a road do not raise dust. Dust IS
raised in track hexes.
6.5.24 Removal —Dust markers are re-
moved during the End of Turn Segment
unless a vehicle Continued Movement be-
tween turns.
6.5.25 Dust obscures LOS in the same
manner as Smoke.
6.5.26 FFE/Aircraft Bombs Hindrance and
Dust—All hexes of an FFE are treated as
+1/1L Obscuring terrain. If Dust is speci-
fied by SSR, Dust is created in every hex
affected by an FFE AND/OR aircraft bomb.
Place a Smoke counter in such hexes with
its ‘2’ side facing up. The dust created by
an FFE is ignored for the purposes of main-
taining an LOS to the already-placed FFE
that created the dust.
6.5.3 Sun Glare
6.5.31 The difficulty of looking east, i.e.,
into the rising sun during the morning, or
west, into the setting sun, is represented
by a fire modifier to re-create this effect.
Sun Glare is only used in a scenario by SSR.
6.5.32 When sun glare is in effect, any Line-
of-Sight that leaves the firing unit’s hex
through the two (or three, depending on the
map orientation for that scenario) hexsides
facing directly east or west receives a +2/
2L for fire using the Casualty Table only.
Whether sun glare is created by LOS facing
east or west will be stated by SSR. A +2
HPT DRM applies for all fire no matter the
range.
6.5.33 Sun glare creates no effect on OBA
FFE or aircraft fire.
6.5.4 Heat Shimmer or Haze
6.5.41 Heat shimmer is a form of aerosol
that hinders LOS dependent on range. Heat
shimmer is only used in a scenario by SSR
and may also be used to depict haze or fall-
ing rain effects.
6.5.42 When Heat Shimmer is in effect ap-
ply a +1/1L for each FRACTION of ten hexes
(fractions rounded UP) in range between fir-
ing unit and target.
Example, an LOS of 12 hexes would receive
a +2/2L for fire not using the HPT. At a range
of 21, a +3/3L applies; and so on.
6.5.5 Khamsins
6.5.51 Khamsins (desert dust storms) could,
and did, sweep across battlefields with blind-
ing suddenness. Khamsins are only used
in a scenario by SSR. When in use, the SSR
will specify when and what die roll is needed
for their implementation. A Khamsin has the
effect of reducing Spotting Conditions to
‘Khamsin’ for the remainder of the scenario.
6.6 LIMITED INTELLIGENCE
6.6.1 The following rules reflect the lack of
accurate detailed information a field com-
mander would have concerning enemy units
and defensive positions.
6.6.2 Full/Under—The opposing player may
never examine Personnel units UNDER an
emplacement (or marked with an FC marker)
unless it moves out of a Full cover position
or an opposing unit enters their hex loca-
tion.
6.6.3 The opposing player may also not look
at:
a) Any units under the top unit in a stack
unless those units are within Spotting Range
AND LOS and move or fire;
b) The other side of any counters currently
showing their FOW side UP.
6.7 FOG OF WAR
6.7.1 Vehicles and weapons have a yellow
blank or generic tank or gun icon known as
their ‘Fog of War’ (FOW) side that conceals
their identity. Players may set up all such
units with their FOW side up. Units that
enter from off-map also enter with their FOW
side up.
6.7.2 Removal–A unit flips from its FOW
side when it FIRES or MOVES within the
LOS (and Spotting Range if in use) of a non-
Suppressed/Broken/Surrendered enemy
unit. A unit does not lose FOW simply for
being within Spotting Range. Enemy aircraft
never benefit from their FOW side; this side
is simply provided if players wish to ran-
domly choose among different aircraft
counters during solitaire play.
6.7.21 Vehicle and H Weapon FOW DRM—
Any VEHICLE or HEAVY weapon (including
the crew of such a weapon) with its FOW
side up receives a +2 HPT DRM. There is
NO Casualty Table column shift for such
targets (e.g., when firing to attempt to Sup-
press a vehicle [presumably an AFV] show-
ing its FOW side up).
6.7.22 Night, Khamsin and Fog FOW Shift/
DRM—When Night|Khamsin|Fog Spotting
Conditions are in effect, ALL units receive
a +2/2L FOW modifier for ALL attacks (Ex-
ception: Units in/adjacent to Flare hexes
during Night Spotting Conditions).
6.7.3 Flip to FOW—During the End of Turn
Segment, face-up units may be flipped back
to their FOW side if the unit is (all three):
a) In any terrain that provides at least one
column shift LEFT for LOS traced into or
through it AND;
b) Not Surrendered or Broken; AND;
c) Out of LOS or Spotting Range of all non-
Suppressed/Broken/Surrendered enemy
units.
6.7.4 Light and Medium weapons—Light
and Medium weapon counters are flipped
to their FOW side only if their carrying Per-
sonnel units meet the above conditions. The
ONLY purpose of FOW side L and M weap-
ons is to conceal from the opponent the
exact weapon carried/set up.
6.7.5 Dummies—Some scenarios provide
dummy Heavy weapon and vehicle counters
that set up or enter from off-map. Vehicle
dummies ONLY may be moved as if they
are any vehicle–there is no limitation on their
Movement Points. A moving dummy vehicle
will be removed the moment it enters the
Spotting Range and LOS—or just LOS if not
using Spotting—of an enemy unit. Use any
extra 5/8” counter to provide a dummy crew
for Heavy weapons if they are placed on
map with their FOW side up. If a dummy
counter is forced to flip to its non-FOW side
(see 6.8.3) it is removed from play (along
with any dummy crew).
6.8 OPTIONAL HIDDEN SET UP
Hidden set up is OPTIONAL with the ex-
ception of units allowed to set up hidden by
SSR. See 6.8.5 for solitaire play when SSRs
specify units as setting up hidden. See the
‘Hide’ column of Table TC for terrain that
allows units within to set up hidden.
6.8.1 Heavy Weapons and FOs— Heavy
weapons and their manning crews and FOs
may set up hidden. Other units may only
set up hidden if allowed to do so by SSR.
Hidden set up may only be used in terrain
that allows such set up. Hidden units are
not set up on the map, (nor are the man-
ning crews/Personnel carrying hidden
weapons [and any leaders in the same stack
at the owning player’s option] OR any em-
placements the hidden unit(s) is set up in).
6.8.11 Terrain—ONLY non-hexside terrain
that provides at least a 1L shift for any LOS
traced into or through it, such as Brush,
may be used for Hidden set up. Exception:
Units that set up with a Bocage hexside
between them and ALL enemy units may
set up Hidden.
6.8.2 Set Up
Make a side note of hidden units, including
covered arc for any crew-served weapons
and vehicles (include turret-covered arc if
it differs from the vehicle-covered arc) and
any other unique parameters (e.g., FO in-
side a particular vehicle).
6.8.3 Revealing Hidden and Dummy H
weapons and Vehicles
Place Hidden units on map and remove
dummy weapons and vehicles for the fol-
lowing reasons:
a) Conducting any fire or movement action,
including changing vehicle or turret covered
arc if the hidden unit’s location is otherwise
within LOS and Spotting Range (if the latter
is in use);
b) An enemy unit attempts to enter their
location;
c) A ‘C1’ or better result is obtained on the
Casualty Table against an ‘empty’ hex in any
manner. When firing at an EMPTY hex loca-
tion treat it as if a FOW unit is therein (i.e.,
apply +2 HPT DRM to any fire) AND HALVE
the GF (or FRAG Factors from any HPT hit).
When firing directly on the Casualty Table
all GF are halved.
6.8.4 Revealing Hidden Emplacements
Emplacements containing hidden units are
not placed on map until the units under or
on them are revealed. An emplacement may
set up hidden if only units eligible to be
hidden are set up stacked on or under it
(ON only applies for emplacements that pro-
vide cover of +1/1L or better for units on
top).
6.8.5 Suggestions for Solitaire Play
6.8.51 For solitaire play, place all units on
map but do not allow enemy units to fire
upon friendly units that would be Hidden
until they fire or move.
10
6.8.52 Random Placement—Players may
also wish to place weapons for the ‘enemy’
in a cup and place them randomly during
set up with the FOW side up in order to
conceal their identity. A dummy or two can
be added when using this approach to add
flavor during solitaire gaming.
6.9 NIGHT RULES
6.9.1 Spotting—Spotting at night is slightly
different. Fired units are still spotted at any
range.
6.9.2 Firing—Apply the +2/2L FOW DRM
to all Night fire unless the target is in/adja-
cent to a Flare hex.
6.9.3 Morale Support Range—The Morale
Support Range is 0—only units in the same
location affect morale.
6.9.4 Platoons and Fire Groups—Only same
hex firegroups are allowed. Personnel Pla-
toon movement is only allowed for units start-
ing in the same hex (although they are al-
lowed to move into separate hexes once they
begin moving). Multiple locations within a
hex are permitted for both platoons and
firegroups. Vehicle convoys and platoons
operate normally.
6.9.5 Flares—Flares may be used during
all scenarios with NIGHT Spotting Condi-
tions (whether Spotting is in use or not).
During the Indirect Fire Segment, an un-
broken unit with Flares may place an ‘F’
(Fired) marker in the ground level location
of any hex within its LOS AND within
THREE hexes. On board mortars may place
a Flare marker anywhere within its mini-
mum and maximum range limits. After ANY
eligible unit places a Flare marker, roll on
the Accuracy Diagram (IA) (applying a -20
Accuracy DRM for flares placed by Person-
nel units ONLY). Place an ‘F’ marker in the
resulting hex. Flares are removed during
the End of Turn Segment of the turn they
were placed.
6.9.6 Flare Allotment —Unless another
quantity is provided by SSR, ONE Flare is
provided for every LEADER, BAR Gunner,
and Commissar in the OOB for each side.
They may be used by ALL friendly Person-
nel units (i.e., they are not restricted to lead-
ers; count leaders among any reinforce-
ments; all flares are immediately available).
6.9.7 Flare Effects—Ignore the night FOW
+2 DRM for all units in or adjacent to a
Flare hex. All units in/adjacent to a Flare
hex may be Spotted as if they fired.
6.9.71 OBA Illumination Rounds—If ‘Illu-
mination Rounds’ ammunition is made avail-
able to an off-board battery by SSR all seven
hexes normally attacked by an FFE and ALL
adjacent hexes are affected as per 6.9.7 ( a
total of 19 hexes). All other OBA rules are
applied normally for illumination rounds.
7.0 GENERAL TERRAIN RULES
7.1 Terrain Chart-This play aid provides
the following data about each terrain type:
Terrain—The name of the terrain type.
Type-A terrain type may be Clear, Obscur -
ing or Blocking. Terrain may affect LOS when
touching the terrain art, known as PAR TIAL
and considered the default type, or it may
affect the ENTIRE hex at ground level, in-
cluding hexsides, noted on the Terrain Chart
with a superscript ‘e’ to the ‘B’ or ‘O’ label.
a) Clear (C)—No effect on LOS;
b) Obscuring (O)—LOS can go through but
fire will be less effective. Apply a +1/1L
shift for every hex with obscuring terrain
art touched along an LOS (noting the LOS
must actually TOUCH the terrain art in some
cases, each noted in the rules for that ter-
rain type and on the Terrain Chart as ‘e’ for
Obscuring terrain that affects the entire hex
at ground level [or higher in the case of
Smoke]);
c) Blocking (B)—The terrain blocks LOS com-
pletely if touched; all Blocking terrain is
considered ‘partial’ (i.e., the LOS must touch
the terrain art) with the exception of
RUBBLE, noted with an ‘e’ superscript on
the chart);
d) Special (S)—Some unique terrain rules
apply to this kind of terrain.
Height—The ‘obstacle’ height of the terrain,
expressed in LEVELS.
Cover—Indicates the cover provided by the
terrain, whether it is none, Good, Improved,
Masonry and Full. Multiple cover states may
apply in some terrain as per the rules for
each.
Entry cost—These four columns list the
entry cost for each type of unit (Personnel;
Fully Tracked; Half-Tracked; or Wheeled).
An entry cost of ‘1+CoT’ means that the unit
must pay 1 MP AND add the entry cost of
the terrain in the hex. An entry of ‘2 x CoT’
means DOUBLE the Cost of Terrain. A dia-
mond indicates the need to check for Im-
mobilization when entering the terrain or
crossing the hexside. Sometimes, there are
two entry costs, such as 1+CoT|Road,
meaning the unit must pay 1 MP plus the
cost of the other terrain in the hex if it
doesn’t follow a road. In this case the term
‘Road’ may also apply to a Track, Path, or
Railroad for Sunken Roads and Embank-
ments that contain these terrain types.
Im—Indicates if a roll on the Immobilization
Table is required Before (B) or After (A) en-
tering the hex or crossing the hexside. Any
resulting M-KILL leaves the vehicle in ex-
actly the SAME facing it was in at the time
it entered AND requires a roll on the Bail
Out Table (Table E). Note: M-KILLed vehicles
are NOT considered ‘moving’ for the pur -
poses of HPT DRM (i.e., do NOT apply a +2
DRM).
Cu—Indicates this terrain creates ‘Cushion’
effects, representing the absorption of HE
explosions. Any Personnel unit in Cushion
terrain has its Cover shifted 1L for all Di-
rect or Indirect HE Fire. This Cover modi-
fier applies ONLY on the Casualty Table,
even if the fire used the HPT. Cushion does
not provide a 1L against Personnel units in
Full Cover in APCs (marked with ‘F’ on their
counter), Bunkers or Blockhouses (Build-
ings also negate cushion effects for units
within).
Flam-Indicates if the terrain is flammable.
It can burn for two reasons: By SSR or by a
FT|HE attack (including White Phosphorus,
see 6.4.83). Such an attack must obtain a
C6+ on the Casualty Table to create a Flame
in an applicable terrain hex (see Table FR).
AirB-Indicates the terrain creates Airbursts.
Certain terrain represented additional dan-
ger due to fragments being thrown about
by exploding HE rounds (see 12.5.654).
H-D —Indicates if the terrain or terrain
hexside allows for automatic Hull Defilade
or a die roll may provide H-D status.
Hide—Indicates terrain where a unit may
set up Hidden. Units may set up Hidden in
SCRUB and any terrain providing at least a
1L shift INTO them and/or obscuring for
fire THROUGH them.
Notes—Some brief notes to remind players
of rules that apply to the terrain.
7.2 In Hex and Hexside terrain—Terrain
located in a hex is referred to as ‘In-hex’
terrain. Some terrain is ‘Hexside’ terrain,
and appears along hexsides. Even if that
hexside terrain blocks LOS, same-level LOS
can still be traced to the hex bordered by
that hexside terrain, but not beyond it (Ex-
ception: Level +10 hexside terrain creates
an in-hex blind hex for LOS from a higher
unit). If the LOS runs exactly along a hexside
containing hexside terrain, it can still be
traced to the hex just behind that hexside
terrain, and units behind it receive the ap-
plicable cover for the hexside terrain (Ex-
ception: Level +10 hexside terrain, e.g., High
Walls).
7.21 Level +10 Hexside Blind Hex—If the
Hexside terrain is at least Level +10 high
(e.g., High Wall; Bocage), consider the hex
sharing the hexside terrain that shares the
+10 hexside and on the ‘other side’ of an
LOS to be a Blind hex from HIGHER LEV-
ELS if the target unit(s) in the hex are sta-
tionary and have not fired. Blind hexes are
created beyond a +10 hexside normally (us-
ing the hex sharing the +10 hexside as the
‘first’ blind hex). LOS is blocked directly
ALONG a Level +10 hexside.
7.22 Cover Denied—There is no cover (i.e.,
column shifts on the Casualty Table pro-
vided by hexside terrain against OBA or air-
craft attacks that do NOT include the hexside
terrain along their flight path. Nor is cover
provided by hexside terrain against Direct
Fire from an adjacent unit at least +20 lev-
els higher than the height of the hex shar-
ing the hexside terrain. HPT DRM apply for
on-board Indirect Fire if the LOS crosses
hexside terrain
Example: A ‘0’ level unit behind a Hedge
hexside gets no cover from the Hedge against
a unit at Level +20 in a building in the adja-
cent hex.
7.23 Entire Hex and Partial Terrain—Most
terrain of the Blocking AND Obscuring type
is considered to be ‘partial’. When tracing
LOS, the ‘thread’ must actually TOUCH the
terrain art to be affected. Hexside terrain is
ALWAYS partial. Some Obscuring (e.g., Or -
chard hexes containing four or more or -
chard symbols) and ONE Blocking terrain
type (rubble) are considered to affect LOS
in the ground level of the ENTIRE hex; they
affect LOS tracing through and alongside
any part of the hex containing the terrain.
Flame and Smoke (including when created
by Burning Wrecks and Smoke Grenades)
is ALWAYS considered to affect the entire
hex (up to the maximum height of Smoke).
7.24 Continuous Slope—An LOS that rises
or falls in even increments of +10 or +5
levels PER HEX along an LOS in continu-
ous downward or upward slope is consid-
11
ered a ‘Continuous Slope’ and is treated in
the same manner as an LOS along the SAME
level for the purposes of applying Blocking
and Obscuring terrain (including blind hexes
created by Blocking terrain).
7.3 Linear Depressions (LD)—Some terrain
types represent narrow valleys, and are
termed ‘Linear Depressions ’ (e.g., Ravine;
Wadi; Sunken Road) for game purposes.
Units in LD hexes may be in one of two
positions:
a) UP (at Ground level, indicated by placing
the unit on a LOS +10 marker with the ar-
row pointing toward two hexsides NOT
crossed by LD or CLIFF art [if possible; oth-
erwise at least ONE must be available or
there is no UP position]); and;
b) DOWN (inside the Depression, consid-
ered at -10 levels lower than the ground
level of the hex).
When a unit enters an LD hex it is consid-
ered to be in the DOWN position (i.e., an
UP position in an LD hex may ONLY be
entered from that hex’s DOWN position; a
unit may EXIT an UP position as per 7.3.42).
Both positions count as ONE hex location
for stacking and entry but are targeted as
separate locations for non-OBA attacks.
7.3.1 Entry—It costs 2 MP to enter a Lin-
ear Depression hex, even if moving along a
continuous LD, noting the following excep-
tions:
i) When entering the END of a Wadi (see
8.29.41-2);
ii) Moving along a road in an LD;
iii) If there is any other terrain depicted in
the LD hex (e.g., Woods; Brush), in which
case entry costs 2 MP + CoT.
7.3.2 Exit to a Non LD Hex—Exiting from
an LD costs 1 + CoT.
7.3.3 Immobilization Check— Entering
AND exiting an LD hex requires a roll on
the Immobilization Table for Wheeled vehicles
unless moving along a road (or railroad/path)
with the following exceptions. Sunken Road
terrain calls for a roll for ALL vehicle types
unless using a road. Wadi end hexes do not
require a roll for ANY vehicle type. If exiting
one LD hex to enter another a roll is ONLY
made in the hex ENTERED (i.e., two rolls
are not made if moving along a continuous
LD) unless exiting one Level -10 location to
enter another -10 location between two NON-
continuous LD hexes. All other vehicles may
enter and exit without rolling on the table.
7.3.4 UP Cover—Units in UP positions re-
ceive Good cover (including for H Weapons
[or H-D status] for Wadis, since these allow
vehicles and H Weapons to be in UP posi-
tion) for DIRECT Fire across the two
hexsides pointed to by the Level +10 marker
(Exception: No cover benefit [or H-D] is pro-
vided if the LOS also crosses Depression
art). Unless eligible for GOOD cover against
DIRECT fire by being UP, no cover benefits
are created by Linear Depressions unless
there is other terrain (e.g., Woods) also in
the hex (i.e., UP units derive NO cover ben-
efits against indirect fire, OBA, etc.
7.3.41 Entering/Exiting UP/DOWN Posi-
tions—A Personnel unit may enter an UP
position via crawling, Infiltration or at the
cost of 4 MP via movement impulse. It costs
ONE MP to enter a Down position from an
UP position of the same hex. See 8.29.41-2
for vehicles and H Weapons in Wadi LD.
7.3.42 Exiting an UP Position—A unit in
an UP position may ONLY enter the DOWN
location of its hex OR move across either of
the two GOOD cover hexsides. Moving from
an UP position across a GOOD cover hexside
costs 1 + CoT and is otherwise treated as
normal movement.
7.3.5 LOS and Hidden Set Up—A Linear
Depression doesn’t block or obscure LOS
through its hex. An LOS exists to units in a
DOWN location ONLY in the following cases:
a) An adjacent, continuous LD hex;
b) An adjacent unit in a NON LD hex;
c) Along a continuous LD if the LOS does
NOT leave the LD art, including from a higher
level hex adjacent to the LD.
If otherwise allowed, a unit may set up hid-
den in the DOWN location of an LD if out of
the LOS of all enemy units.
7.4 Multiple Terrain Effects—All terrain
that provides a cover benefit for units oc-
cupying a hex (or behind hexside terrain)
may provide a shift/HPT DRM. In the case
of multiple IN HEX shifts/HPT DRM, the
targeted player may choose which to apply.
Unless moving along a road/railroad/path/
track entry of a location containing more
than one type of terrain requires the expen-
diture of MP for ALL accessible terrain. Only
one +1/1L DRM applies for any OBSCUR-
ING terrain hex (Exception: Smoke; see
7.4.1).
Example: If a hex has a hexside terrain and
in-hex terrain, a Building behind a wall
hexside, the targeted player must choose ei-
ther the hexside or the in-hex terrain when
fired on. If entering a building + woods hex
along a non-road hexside a Personnel unit
must expend 4 MP. If fired on in a building +
woods hex, the targeted player may apply
cover benefits (and detriments, e.g., Airbursts
for woods) of one of the two terrain-types, at
his choice.
7.4.1 Along LOS—Any terrain along an LOS
that is NOT a hexside of the firing or target
hex affects LOS normally. For each HEX
containing at least one occurrence of Ob-
scuring terrain BETWEEN firing and target
unit add a cumulative +1/1L. The excep-
tion to this is Smoke: If an LOS enters/
passes through/exits (i.e., the firing unit’s
hex contains smoke) an OBSCURING hex
(or hexside) containing Smoke, apply ONLY
the Smoke modifier; if the target occupies a
hex containing a terrain providing a cover
modifier AND a Smoke, apply both.
Example: A unit fires on the HPT along an
LOS that has a Brush hex with a Smoke
marker in it applies a +4/4L.
7.5 Overlays—Overlays are added to some
maps to change the terrain used in a sce-
nario. They provide landforms—Hillocks,
and depressions—Deirs and Wadis, as well
as Rock-Strewn terrain, villages, desert
tracks, etc. Trim individual overlays from
the sheets they are provided on—being sure
to cut right along the ‘colored’ edge—leav-
ing no white space around the edge of each
overlay. Overlays don’t have any hex num-
bering, so use the map numbering. Over -
lays have two adjacent hexes named X and
Y. SSRs give overlay placement by saying
which two adjacent hexes the X and Y hexes
should cover.
7.6 Floorpan Armor Hits—An AFV cross-
ing some hexsides (e.g. Walls) or exiting
certain emplacements (e.g., Sangars) is sub-
ject to a Floorpan Armor Hit for Direct Fire
when in the act of crossing/exiting.
7.6.1 Floorpan Hits—If an AFV receives a
Lower Hull (LH) hit when fired on by Op-
portunity Fire as it crosses a hexside creat-
ing the possibility of a Floorpan hit, roll a
subsequent die. If this roll is 1-5, treat the
Armor Factor for that hit as ‘1’ (i.e., ignore
the AF provided on the vehicle’s AFV Card).
7.7 Hull-Defilade (H-D)—Some terrain may
AUTOMATICALLY (i.e., as compared to H-
D provided via a die roll) provide vehicles a
‘Hull-Defilade’ advantage. In other terrain,
vehicles need to roll equal to or lower than
a given number to obtain H-D status. Place
a Hull-Defilade marker to indicate this sta-
tus unless the vehicle is in terrain that al-
ways provides H-D (e.g., behind a Wall), in
which case marker placement is unneces-
sary. If the roll fails to gain H-D, a vehicle
must exit the hex and re-enter before it may
roll to attempt H-D again. HPT fire against
turreted vehicles in Hull-Defilade must roll
a turret hit (a die roll of 1-3 on the Hit Loca-
tion Table) in order to hit the vehicle. Non-
turreted vehicles must roll an UH on the
table to be hit. Any other aspect rolled is
considered a ‘miss’, even if the HPN was
successfully rolled for on the HPT.
7.71 Turreted Truck Type and APC—Tur -
reted APCs and Trucks may also use H-D
positions. When in Hull Defilade, a roll IS
made on the Hit Location Table. Non-TUR-
RET hits are ignored when using DIRECT
fire.
7.72 H-D Sponson Vehicles—When in H-D
positions, Sponson vehicles are hit on tur-
ret AND UH hits on the Hit Location Table.
7.73 Terrain DRM—When in Hull Defilade,
HPT DRM for terrain (including hexside ter-
rain) are applied normally.
8.0 TERRAIN TYPES
8.1 BOCAGE
8.1.1 Description —Bocage
terrain is depicted by an ir -
regular brown hexside ‘bank’
with green foliage on top.
8.1.2 LOS —Bocage is Level
+10 Blocking HEXSIDE terrain.
8.1.3 Cover—Bocage provides IMPROVED
cover to any LOS crossing its hexside. LOS
traced directly down a Bocage hexside be-
tween same-level units is BLOCKED (or
Blind hexes are created for LOS from higher
levels). Ignore ALL column shifts RIGHT for
Personnel units using Assault or Running
movement for fire that crosses a Bocage
hexside. Bocage hexsides create Hull-Defi-
lade for all vehicles (i.e., roll for Hit Loca-
tion for all if using the HPT). See 7.2 for the
ability of higher level ADJACENT units to
negate cover. Units may set up Hidden (if
otherwise allowed or by SSR) if behind a
Bocage hexside to ALL enemy units after
both sides have set up (reveal any units if
an LOS can be traced after the opponent
has set up his units). They may always set
up marked with an FC marker if behind a
12
Bocage hexside to ALL enemy units after
both sides have set up (remove any FC
markers if an LOS can be traced).
8.1.4 Movement —It costs 2 MP for Per -
sonnel units to cross a Bocage hexside (in
addition to the CoT of the hex entered), and
4 MP + CoT for Fully Tracked vehicles. Ve-
hicles must check for Immobilization BE-
FORE crossing the Bocage hexside unless
using a gate. Other vehicles may not cross.
If a tracked vehicle successfully crosses, a
Lane marker (same as minefield lane) is
placed across the hexside. All vehicles that
enter later may cross THAT hexside with-
out Immobilization checks ONLY if using As-
sault movement.
8.1.41 Floorpan Hits—Floorpan hits may
occur when AFV crosses a Bocage hexside
(even if across a Lane but not when moving
through a gate).
8.2 BRUSH
8.2.1 Description—Brush is
depicted as small, irregular
green foliage pieces.
8.2.2 LOS—Brush is Level +5
Obscuring terrain that affects
the entire hex at ground level.
8.2.3 Cover—Brush provides no cover for
units within but allows Hidden set up.
8.2.4 Movement—It costs 2 MP for all types
of units to enter a Brush hex.
8.3 BUILDINGS
8.3.1 Description—Buildings
are found on maps and over -
lays, the latter bearing a ‘V’
(for ‘village’) in their ID. Build-
ings are either depicted as
brown or gray structures, and
it is this coloring that determines the kind
of COVER the building (or its Rubble) pro-
vides. Treat all buildings on overlays as Ma-
sonry unless stated otherwise by SSR.
8.3.11 Building Colors and Cover—Brown
buildings (and their Rubble) are considered
somewhat less substantial and provide IM-
PROVED cover (i.e., 2L or +2 HPT DRM).
They are referred to as ‘Wooden’ buildings.
Gray buildings (and their Rubble) are con-
sidered more substantial, and provide MA-
SONRY cover (i.e., 3L or +3 HPT DRM).
8.3.12 Levels—A Building always contains
a ground level and may have higher ‘floors’
representing additional locations that rise
+10 or more levels above the ground level
of the hex. A wide variety of other types of
Buildings are depicted on historical maps
and overlays, ranging from small cottages,
to churches, large factories and urban ca-
thedrals. Buildings vary by height and other
features noted below. STAIRWELLS exist
in all multi-hex Buildings (and all building
hexes containing a larger than normal cen-
ter -dot, or in some cases center square [e.g.,
Stalingrad map]).
8.3.12.1 HOUSE—A House is a Single hex
Building that has a small white center dot.
It is Level +10 Blocking terrain and only
contains a ground level. Note: If specified
as a flat-roofed building it has an inherent
Stairwell that leads to its ROOF level.
8.3.12.11 Flimsy Huts—In Pacific Theater
games small brown building depictions may
be specified to represent ‘Flimsy Huts’.
These are treated as Wooden HOUSE type
 8.3.6 Movement—All eligible units pay 2 level) between the location of the building
buildings with no roof level. Flimsy Huts
MP to enter any level of a Building hex or 1 that IS in the LOS of the firing unit and the
provide GOOD cover. Tracked vehicles have
MP to move up or down to the next existing attacked location.
the option of entering Flimsy Hut hexes with-
level through a Stairwell. A unit may only 8.3.83 BOT Placement—For the purposes
out making a roll on the Immobilization Table
exit a Building from a Ground level loca- of BOT placement, a BOT marker may be
at DOUBLE the usual entry MP cost or in
tion. From a level other than the Ground placed in ANY level of the building that has
the same manner as a wooden building.
level, it can only move Up or Down to the enemy units within the firing unit’s LOS. If
8.3.12.2 TOWER—A Tower is a SINGLE hex
next connected level of the same hex none are in LOS, no BOT marker may be
Building with a large yellow or white center
through a Stairwell or enter a connected, placed. All other BOT rules apply normally.
dot or square. It has a Ground level and an
adjacent hex of the same level of the same 8.3.9 Building Destruction —Any hit ob-
additional Level +10 location (or story) if a
Building (or may move across adjacent con- tained by direct or indirect fired HE, OBA,
DOT; two additional levels if a SQUARE,
nected rooftop hex locations). Aircraft Bomb or Satchel Charge may de-
and is Level +20 (dot) or +30 (square) Block-
8.3.61 Movement Restrictions —Only stroy a building location (Exception: Direct
ing terrain. It contains a Stairwell.
Close Topped TRACKED AFVs and APCs (in- fire against a rooftop location). When a ‘C5’
8.3.12.3 LARGE BUILDING—A multi-hex
cludes half- and fully-tracked) AND Heavy or greater is rolled on the Casualty Table in
Building with normal center dots in EACH
weapons may enter or set up only in the a building location (including un-occupied
hex. It has a Ground level AND an addi-
Ground level of a Building (and only in the locations attacked by Indirect fire; make a
tional level (+10) AND Stairwells in EACH
ground level). Any eligible vehicle that EN- die roll for EACH location to randomly se-
hex leading ‘upstairs’. It is Level +20 Block-
TERS a Building location during play must lect the rubbled location when multiple build-
ing terrain.
roll on the Immobilization Table AFTER en- ing locations are attacked by OBA; highest
8.3.12.4 STAIRWELL BUILDING—A Stair-
tering. Vehicles that SET UP in Buildings roll is rubbled; multiple levels in the case of
well Building is also a multi-hex Building,
do not risk Immobilization. ties), the Building location is marked with a
but at least ONE hex contains a large RED
8.3 .7 FLAT-ROOFED BUILDINGS —All rubble marker. When using Direct fire at a
center dot/any colored square. It has a
Buildings in desert scenarios, unless stated unit on a specific level, all units in that lo-
Ground level and two additional levels (+10
otherwise by SSR, are Flat-Roofed and thus cation and ABOVE (including any roof loca-
and +20), and is level +30 Blocking terrain.
have a top level called a Rooftop. Buildings tion) are eliminated and no other levels are
It has a Stairwell ONLY in hexes with a large
in other theaters are Flat-Roofed only by rolled for. Rubble at the Ground level also
red center dot/ square.
SSR or as specified in the Battlefield eliminates any Cellar location, the building
8.3.2 LOS—All Buildings are Blocking ter -
Walkaround booklet for a specific game. The is now considered Ground level rubble with
rain of varying height. Units in an upper
level of the Rooftop is the same as the ob- no other locations. Rubble is Level +5 Block-
level (or floor) or rooftop location trace their
stacle level of the Building. ing terrain. Place a Rubble marker in the
LOS from that level. A LOS exists between
8.3.71 Rooftop Spotting —Use the Im- HEX if all levels are rubble, otherwise place
one level and the NEXT up or down in the
proved/Full column on the Spotting Range it on top of a Level +10 or +20 marker as
same hex only if a Stairwell connects the
Table to spot units in Buildings unless oc- appropriate.
locations. Thus, there is no LOS between
cupying a Rooftop, which is considered 8.3.10 Flame—Make a subsequent die roll
the Ground level and Level +20 of the same
GOOD cover from same and lower level on a ‘C6’ or greater result on the Casualty
hex, or between Ground level and Level +10
units and Stationary to higher firing units. Table from an attack that is eligible to cause
if there is no Stairwell connecting the hexes.
8.3.72 Rooftop Cover—Rooftop positions rubble (and in non Building flammable ter-
There is also no LOS between different lev-
provide GOOD Cover, fr om lower/same rain). On a die roll of 1-3, place a Flame
els of adjacent locations of the same build-
level fire ONLY and do not block LOS from marker in the location(s), along with the
ing or the same level of non-adjacent loca-
along the same-level (e.g., roof to roof LOS). rubble marker if in a building. On a C6+ a
tions of the same building unless the LOS
8.3.73 Rooftop Firing Restrictions—Only Flamethrower may also place a Flame
leaves the building (and re-enters in the tar -
Personnel and their Light and Medium weap- marker in a building or flammable terrain
get hex).
ons may fire from Rooftop level. Mortars location attacked. Table FR is provided as a
8.3.3 Level Markers—3/4”-sized ‘Level +10’
and SCW may fire without restrictions. reminder.
and ‘Level +20’ markers are provided. Place
8.3.74 Rooftop Movement Restrictions— 8.3.11b Interior Walls—Some
Personnel inside Buildings on top of a Level
Units may move from one Rooftop location Buildings have a black bar
marker according to its current level.
to an adjacent one of the same Building (un- Running along the interior
8.3.4 Cover—Buildings provide Improved
less roofless) at a cost of 1 MP. Units may hexsides of some hexes. No
or Masonry cover (Exception: Flimsy Huts).
move from a Rooftop location to the next movement (including Infiltra-
Personnel units may set up marked with
lower level of the same hex and vice-versa tion) or fire is permitted across or ALONG
FC markers in a multi-hex Building hex.
via a stairwell. these hexsides and they block same-level
8.3.41 Indirect Fire Effects—Any unit in a
8.3.8 Buildings as Targets—A player may LOS. Units are not considered ‘adjacent’
Building attacked by INDIRECT FIRE re-
opt to use the HPT to fire at a Building IN- across black bar hexsides for the purposes
ceives an ADDITIONAL 1L on the Casualty
STEAD of any units within. When firing at of Morale Table modifiers, Platoon Movement
Table for each ‘floor’ (i.e., +10 in levels) of
the Building (including forts) itself, use the or Firegroups. Note: The moniker ‘b’ has
non rooftop locations ABOVE its location.
Spotting Range found in the “B SM I” col- been appended to this rule to differentiate
Example: A unit on the Ground level of a Large
umn on the Spotting Table and the appro- it from 8.3.11, Building Colors.
Building adds one additional column shift
priate HPT row/column for the firing gun. 8.3.12b CELLARS—If stated by SSR, some
LEFT to its cover because of the +10 non roof-
Do NOT apply any HPT DRM for the build- Buildings have a building location level be-
top levels above it.
ing itself (but do use any obscuring terrain/ low their Ground level known as a Cellar.
8.3.5 Fire Restrictions—Mortars, Bazoo-
smoke along the LOS [or smoke in the build- In addition to other Stairwells in the build-
kas, Panzerfausts, and Panzerschrecks may
ing hex]). ing, buildings with Cellars are treated as if
not fire from a non-Rooftop building loca-
8.3.81 LOS—When firing at the building an they contain a Stairwell in each ground level
tion (Exception: Emergency use; see
LOS may be established to ANY level of the hex, heading into the cellar. Cellars are at
14.4.41). Vehicle ar mament and Heavy
building, i.e., no specific unit must be seen. Level –10. Place units in a Cellar UNDER a
weapons may not fire at a different location
8.3.82 Attack Resolution—For any hit ob- +10 LOS marker (with no other counters
of the building hex they are in (i.e., may not
tained attack ALL units in any non cellar on TOP of the Level +10 marker). Note: The
fire ‘up-’ or ‘downstairs’). Only Personnel and
location of the building at HALF the FRAG moniker ‘b’ has been appended to this rule
their Light and Medium weapons may fire
factors and apply column shifts for Im- to differentiate it from 8.3.12.
at units occupying the next level above or
proved/Masonry (or 1L for Flimsy Huts) on 8.3.121 Cellar Fire Restrictions —Only
below in the same Building hex and only
the Casualty Table with one exception: If Direct Fire is allowed from a Cellar, and then
through a Stairwell, treating those targets
the units being attacked in this manner are only between the Cellar and Ground level
as if inside a Building normally (even if oc-
out of the LOS of the firing unit, apply an of the same Building hex, or against adja-
cupying the roof location above).
ADDITIONAL 1L shift for each ‘floor’ (i.e., cent units in hexes that are not part of the
13
same building. This same restriction applies
for Direct Fire INTO a Cellar location. Only
Light weapons and Personnel Gunfire Fac-
tors, including Grenades/Satchel Charges/
Gammon Bombs may be fired from a Cel-
lar. Add ALL levels above the Cellar for In-
direct Fire column shifts against Cellar oc-
cupants.
8.3.122 Cellar Movement Restrictions—
Only Personnel and their carried Light and
Medium weapons may set up in or enter a
Cellar. A Cellar may be entered from the
Ground level of the same hex (and vice-versa)
at a cost of 2 MP. Units may also move di-
rectly to a Cellar location from an adjacent
Hedgehog, AT Trench, Blockhouse or Bun-
ker directly from UNDER those Emplace-
ments. No movement or fire is allowed be-
tween adjacent Cellar hexes.
8.3.13 STEEPLE—A building
Hex that contains a white
cross depicts a ‘Steeple’. A
Steeple is treated as a Build-
ing location Level +10 higher
than the highest non-Steeple Building level
in its hex. A Stairwell leads to it. A Steeple
adds +10 levels to the LOS Obstacle height
of the Building in the Steeple hex ONLY.
Example: A House is Level +10 Blocking ter-
rain with a Steeple it is +20 Blocking terrain.
A new level is created in the Steeple hex.
There is never a Rooftop location in a Steeple
hex.
8.3.131 Steeple Stacking Restrictions—
Stacking is limited to TWO Stacking Points.
Overstacking is not permitted.
8.3.132 Steeple Fire Restrictions—
Steeples are treated as building locations
for the purposes of fire restrictions (e.g.,
mortars may not fire from Steeple locations).
8.3.133 Steeple Movement Restrictions—
Only Personnel may enter a Steeple loca-
tion. Place Personnel on an appropriate
Steeple Level marker (or use a Level +10
and +20 marker [two markers] to denote
units at Level +30).
8.3.14 FACTORIES
8.3.141 Factory Defined—A
‘Factory’ is any Building with
a Road or Railway physically
depicted as ‘entering’ it at some
point. Factories are treated in
the same manner as Buildings for all pur-
poses except where noted below.
8.3.142 Levels —Factories ONLY have a
Rooftop location above Ground level and it
is located at their highest Obstacle level.
Factories with at least one large RED cen-
ter dot (representing the Stairwell; or a large
white square) are Level +20 Blocking ter -
rain. All other Factories are Level +10 Block-
ing terrain, with a Stairwell in each hex that
connects to the Rooftop. As there is no level
above the Ground level, Factories do not
provide additional Fire modifiers against
Indirect Fire for units in the Ground level.
8.3.143 Rooftops—Factories ALWAYS have
Rooftops (Exception: Roofless hexes); they
need not be specified by SSR.
8.3.144 Roofless Factories—
Factories may be depicted with
some Rooftops bearing battle
damage (in effect only if stated
in the Battlefield Walkaround
for an ATS game). Known as ‘Roofless’ hexes,
there is no Rooftop in these hexes. Roofless
hexes may not be created during play. For
fire from the roof or within the Factory, treat
these hexes according to the other terrain
in the hex, usually Debris (Airbursts may
occur). Mortars may fire from within roofless
hexes. LOS to (and from, i.e., within the
building) roofless hexes is treated as if across
a CONTOUR hexside.
8.3.1441 Other Roofless Buildings—Treat
non-Factory buildings that are roofless NOR-
MALLY for all purposes with the exception
of any LOS that is created into a Roofless
hex due to the hole in the roof.
8.3.145 Interior —Factories are different
from other Buildings in that as long as a
LOS INSIDE the same building does not
cross any ‘black bar’ hexside, it is NOT
blocked. Unless rubbled, or filled with De-
bris in the case of a Roofless hex, treat all
interior hexes within a Factory as JUNKYARD
for inside-to-inside fire ONLY. For fire from
outside, a Factory is treated as a building
normally.
8.3.146 Entry and Exit—Personnel enter
Factory hexes normally from the outside
(i.e., like other buildings). When moving
from one interior hex to another, treat each
non-Rubble or Debris hex as if it is a
JUNKYARD hex. Unlike normal Buildings,
all vehicles may enter Factories using Road
or Railway ‘entrances’, ignoring ‘junkyard’
terrain in the first hex they enter (i.e., a roll
is ONLY made if the hex is Rubble or De-
bris). Vehicles already inside a Factory move
to new interior hexes as if entering
JUNKYARD hexes. Vehicles enter non-en-
trance Factory hexes from OUTSIDE in the
same manner as normal buildings.
8.3.15 FORT —Several Beau Geste style
Turkish Forts were found in North Africa,
and are depicted by the overlay with the ‘F’
ID. A Fort is a Building with one Gate and a
Courtyard in its center surrounded by a
Rampart.
8.3.151 Fort Movement restrictions—The
Rampart hexside next to hex ‘X’ on a Fort
overlay is the ‘Gate’ hex. Units may only
exit/enter the interior ‘Courtyard’ through
the Gate, and only if it is ‘open’. Placing a
movement arrow in the Gate hex facing IN
to the Fort signifies an open Gate. Only the
Personnel unit in the Gate hex may open or
close the Gate. The Gate may be opened or
closed during the End of Turn Segment by
any Personnel unit in the Gate hex.
8.3.152 Rampart and Courtyard—The Fort
consists of one center Courtyard hex, sur -
rounded by Rampart hexes. Units in the
Courtyard center hex may only be at Ground
level and are treated as if in Open ground
(including allowing the placement of emplace-
ments therein). Units in a Rampart hex may
be in a Courtyard location (at Ground level)
inside the Fort or on a Level +10 marker, to
signify they are in a Rampart location. Per-
sonnel units and their L, M, weapons may
set up and enter a Rampart location. They
may also enter from a same-hex or adjacent
Rampart location within by Crawling or via
Infiltration. NON-large target size H weap-
ons may SET UP in a Rampart (and may
change their covered arc); they may not
14
move from one once set up.
8.3.1521 Cover—Units in a Rampart are
considered in Improved Cover to fire from
OUTSIDE the Fort. They may not ‘Drop’
from a Rampart when fired on.
8.3.1522 LOS and Spotting From Out-
side—Units in a Courtyard location are con-
sidered out of LOS from any hex outside
the Fort, except for Indirect Fire, from which
they receive no cover benefits. Indirect Fire
may fire IN a Courtyard that would be oth-
erwise out of LOS. Use the column B-SM-I
when spotting a Fort on the Spotting Table.
8.3.1523 Rubble Creation—A Rampart hex
may be destroyed and changed into Rubble
like a building. Units in a Courtyard loca-
tion are out of the LOS of units outside the
Fort and may set up hidden if out of LOS of
all enemy units during set up.
8.3.16 Other Building Types-Occasionally
an SSR will specify that a particular Build-
ing is a ‘tomb’, a ‘mosque’ or some other
type not covered in these rules. Rules for
such Building types will be provided entirely
by SSR or in the Battlefield Walkaround
booklet.
8.4 CROPS
8.4 .1 Description —Crops
terrain is depicted by yellow-
brown mass with irregular
edges filling most of one or
more hexes. A Flame marker
may be created in Crops.
8.4.2 LOS—Crops are level +5 Obscuring
terrain. Harvested Crops are Clear Terrain
(and no Flame may be created).
8.4.3 Cover—Crops provide no cover ben-
efits (Exception: Running benefit), but units
may set up Hidden in them. Treat RUN-
NING Personnel units in a Crops hex as if it
is using ASSAULT movement and an Assault
moving Personnel unit as if it was Station-
ary. A Crawling unit derives no extra ben-
efit. Harvested crops are ignored for LOS
and attack purposes.
8.4.4 Movement—It costs 2 MP for all units
to enter a Crops or Harvested Crops hex.
8.4.5 Rice Paddies—Rice Paddies are an-
other form of ‘crops’ terrain that is depicted
on some ATS maps and specified via Battle-
field Walkaround.
8.4.51 Personnel Units—Personnel units
(on foot) treat Rice Paddies as if they are
Crops hexes for movement purposes.
8.4.52 Non Personnel—All other units treat
Rice Paddies in the same manner as Swamp
hexes for movement purposes.
8.4.53 LOS and Attack—Rice Paddies are
treated in the same manner as Crops hexes
for all LOS and attack purposes (i.e., no
cushion effect).
8.4.6 Elephant Grass— Some Pacific The-
ater games use Crops artwork to depict El-
ephant Grass. Treat Elephant Grass in the
same manner as Crops (Exception: Person-
nel may not use Running Movement in El-
ephant Grass; the placement of lanes
through crops may not be placed [see Op-
tional Rules Appendix C]).
8.5 DEBRIS
8.5.1 Description —Debris
terrain is depicted by random
specks.
8.5.2 LOS—Debris is level +5
Obscuring terrain that affects the entire hex
at ground level.
8.5.3 Cover —Debris provides Good cover
to units within and create Airbursts. Units
may set up hidden in Debris.
8.5.4 Movement—Debris terrain costs 2
MP to enter. Personnel may not use Run-
ning movement in a Debris hex. Vehicles
must roll on the Immobilization Table AF-
TER entering Debris.
8.6 DEIR
8.6.1 Description—Deirs de-
pict slight depressions in the
desert and are represented by
any overlay with a ‘D’ ID.
8.6.2 LOS—Deir contours rep-
resent a gentle slope in level
down to Level -5 open ground (barring other
terrain in the hex). An LOS is created DOWN
into a Deir in the same manner as any lower
level terrain, i.e., requiring a contour hexside
from a higher level, including a Deir con-
tour. A non-burning Wreck or vehicle in a
Level -5 location in a Deir is ignored for
LOS purposes if the LOS is between units
at Level 0 or higher.
8.6.3 Cover —Personnel in a Level 0 hex
adjacent to a Deir contour are in Good Cover
if fired at from a unit IN the Deir (i.e., from
Level -5 locations across a hexside to a
higher unit at Level 0). Units IN a Level -5
Deir are also in Good cover for any LOS
that crosses the Deir down contour along a
hexside of the target hex unless the firing
unit is ADJACENT.
8.6.31 Hull-Defilade—Deir contours auto-
matically create Hull-Defilade for Vehicles
on a Deir hex adjacent to a contour for all
non-adjacent LOS traced from higher level
hexes and crossing that contour. Being ‘up’
across the contour (i.e., from fire emanat-
ing from IN the Deir) does NOT create H-D.
8.6.4 Movement—There is no additional
movement point cost to move Down onto a
Deir location. Moving Up (crossing a hex
side with a contour to a Level 0 hex) costs 1
MP + CoT of the hex entered.
8.7 EMBANKMENT
8.7.1 Description—Embank-
ment terrain represents a
raised road or railroad. It is
depicted as a light back-
ground, with a darker back-
ground and Road or Railroad terrain de-
picted in the center.
8.7 .2 LOS —Embankment is Level +10
Blocking terrain.
8.7.3 Cover —Vehicles are automatically
considered in Hull-Defilade position in an
Embankment hex from a lower level firing
unit. All other units receive Good Cover in
the same situation.
8.7.4 Movement—In each case movement
is allowed along the Road, Path, or Railroad
normally, noting any elevation changes if the
Embankment enters or exits to lower -level
terrain.
8.7.41 Non Road Movement—Units mov-
ing into or out of embankment hexes with-
out moving along a Road/Railroad pay 1 MP
plus the cost of any terrain entered. Any
Vehicle using Non-Road movement must roll
for Immobilization BEFORE entering or AF-
TER exiting the Embankment.
8.8 FLAME
8.8.1 Description—Flame exists
only in the form of a marker
placed in a hex or location by SSR
or created during play. If in a
building level Flame never ‘spreads’ DOWN
from its current location; it spreads UP one
level (up ONLY; not to adjacent hexes) dur-
ing each End of Turn Segment starting on
the turn it was placed. Burning Wrecks are
NOT treated in the same manner as Flame
markers but instead as a Wreck with a per-
manent Smoke marker.
8.8.2 LOS—Flame is treated as Smoke for
LOS purposes and rises to Level +30 above
the level of its location. It affects the entire
hex to +30 levels above ground level.
8.8.3 Cover—Flame provides no cover.
8.8.4 Movement—No unit may enter a LO-
CATION containing a Flame marker and any
units in a newly created Flame location must
exit by the End of Turn Segment of the NEXT
turn or they are eliminated (Vehicles are
replaced by burning wreck markers although
no additional smoke effect is created in such
hexes).
8.9 GRAVEYARD
8.9.1 Description —Grave-
yard terrain is depicted by nu-
merous small headstones.
8.9.2 LOS—Graveyard is level
+5 Obscuring terrain that af-
fects the entire hex at ground level.
8.9.3 Cover —Graveyards provide Good
cover to units within. They create Airbursts.
Units may set up Hidden in Graveyards.
8.9.4 Movement—Graveyard terrain costs
2 MP to enter. Vehicles must check Immo-
bilization AFTER entering a Graveyard hex
unless moving on a road.
8.9.41 Graveyard Roads—Roads may run
through Graveyard hexes, often entering
through Gates. Units may move along Road
hexsides through a Graveyard to avoid the
cost and risk of entry but are otherwise
treated as being IN the Graveyard hex.
8.10 HEDGE
8.10.1 Description —Hedge
terrain is depicted by an ir -
regular green hexside.
8.10.2 LOS—Hedge is level +5
Blocking Hexside terrain.
8.10.3 Cover—Hedges provide Good cover
15
for LOS traced across their hexsides. See
7.2 for the ability of higher level ADJACENT
units to negate cover.
8.10.4 Movement—All eligible units pay an
additional 1 MP + CoT to cross a Hedge
hexside. Wheeled Vehicles may cross Hedge
hexsides but must roll on the Immobiliza-
tion Table BEFORE crossing the Hedge.
Heavy weapons may never be Pushed or
Towed across a Hedge hexside unless
through a Gate. When an opening in the
Hedge hexside art is depicted, represent-
ing a Gate, all units may cross the Hedge
without any restrictions and without MP cost
supplement. A Gate is treated for all other
purposes as a Hedge hexside.
8.11 HIGH WALL
8.11.1 Description —A High
Wall is depicted with Wall art-
work containing two or three
large black squares.
8.11.2 LOS—A High Wall is
Level +10 Blocking Hexside terrain.
8.11.3 Cover—High Wall hexsides BLOCK
same-level LOS across them. Units behind
them receive Improved cover from higher
level fire. See 7.2 for the ability of higher
level ADJACENT units to negate cover.
8.11.4 Movement—No Vehicle may cross a
High Wall unless using a Gate opening. Per-
sonnel may only use Crawling or Infiltration
to cross a High Wall hexside.
8.12 HILLOCKS
8.12.1 Description—Hillocks
are found on some hexsides
(although they are not techni-
cally ‘hexside terrain’) and rep-
resent a small rise in eleva-
tion insufficient to constitute a hill. Hillock
terrain is depicted by elevation ‘hachure’ art
along a hexside. There are two types of Hill-
ocks, Full (desert overlays only) and Partial
(all others). The following rules apply to both
types unless expressly stated to be a rule
for FULL or PAR TIAL Hillocks.
8.12.11 Unit Location—Units located in a
hex into which the hexside hachure con-
tour ‘fingers’ point are situated on the DOWN
side of the hexside. Those on the flat side
are in the UP side. Units located within a
complete circuit of a FULL desert Hillock
are in UP hexes regardless of their location
with reference to the Hillock’s hexsides.
In the example at left, Pzkw If ‘C’ is in a hull-
defilade position across the down contour
hexsides in its hex (the front two hexes cor-
responding with its VCA). If squad ‘15’ was
an enemy AFV, Pzkw IIf ‘C’ would NOT be in
hull-defilade to its fire.
Squad ‘15’ can see all units in the deir. If it
was one hex back (away from the deir), it
could NOT see ‘13’. Also, if ‘15’ was back
away from the deir contour, squad ‘21’ would
get the benefit of being in GOOD cover. Be-
ing adjacent to ‘21’ denies this benefit (mak-
ing it in STATIONARY cover).
If squad ‘15’ was backed away from the deir
BUT was up on Level +5 or greater it could
see into all hexes of the deir.
8.12.2 LOS—Any LOS traced from Level +5
Hillock terrain may see OVER any +5 ter -
rain (e.g., Wall; Crops) unless a Continuous
Slope applies (see 7.24). In the case of a
PAR TIAL Hillock, the firing unit must be in
an UP position to be considered at +5 lev-
els. All UP (i.e., Level +5) portions of a FULL
Hillock impart this LOS advantage. Treat
Level +10 and higher portions of a FULL
Hillock as HILL terrain.
8.12.3 Partial Hillock Effects— Hillock
hexsides of a PAR TIAL Hillock do not block
or obscure LOS in ANY way.
8.12.4 Full/Desert Hillocks—A series of
connecting Hillock hexsides that form a
COMPLETE circuit of Level +5 hexes on a
DESER T overlay represent a Full Hillock.
Hillocks on desert overlays are the ONLY
full Hillocks in the system. Treat ALL other
Hillock hexsides, even if part of a ‘ring’ of
connected hexsides, as PAR TIAL Hillocks.
8.12.41 FULL Hillock LOS Effects—LOS
from the Level +5 portion of a FULL Hillock
may be traced from units in UP/+5 hexes
to all other units in UP/+5 hexes. LOS may
also be traced from an UP/+5 Hillock loca-
tion to the first DOWN hex of another FULL
Hillock along a firing unit’s LOS. Both cases
assume there is no higher intervening Block-
ing terrain (or Obscuring terrain of 8+ shift/
HPT DRM) along the LOS (i.e., it is from a
unit on a Hillock to a unit on [or one hex
behind] another Hillock along its LOS). No
blind hexes are created by Hillock hexsides
on the SAME Hillock of a firing unit.
8.12.5 Cover—Non-vehicle units in lower
level hexes receive GOOD cover against at-
tacks crossing (INCLUDING directly along)
a FULL Hillock hexside of their hex (Excep-
tion: Units in lower hexes do not receive
any cover benefits from an adjacent UP hex).
A unit that is in a Hillock hex and UP/+5
levels above a firing unit(s) receives GOOD
Above is the Fort overlay provided with AD-
VANCED TOBRUK. The gate hex is found
along the hexside between the ‘X’ hex and
the one directly under it. The three hexes
directly under the ‘X’ hex, and the two ad-
jacent hexes on either side of these repre-
sent the ‘courtyard’ of the fort. Personnel
may be ‘up’ in all hexes of the fort EXCEPT
the one hex directly in the center of the
courtyard.
cover, including from adjacent firing units.
8.12.51 Hull Defilade—Vehicles in DOWN
hexes automatically receive H-D across a
FULL Hillock hexside (from non adjacent
fire). Vehicles in any UP/+5 Hillock hexes
may roll for H-D status for fire crossing (in-
cluding directly along) a Hillock hexside from
units at lower levels by making a die roll of
‘1’. A vehicle may only roll for H-D when
using ASSAULT movement (or during set
up). H-D in a Hillock UP hex is lost if the
vehicle leaves the hex or changes VCA
(changing TCA without leaving does not re-
sult in the loss of Hull Defilade).
8.12.6 Movement—All units must pay a cost
of 1+CoT to move UP across a Hillock
hexside (Exception: Moving along a Road or
Path). There is no additional cost when
moving down (Exception: Precipitous Ter -
rain). Crossing a Hillock hexside to a higher
or lower level may constitute Precipitous
Terrain (see 8.13.6).
8.13 HILLS
8.13.1 Description—Histori-
cal maps depict Hills and Hill-
ocks using relative topographi-
cal ‘levels’, each printed in a
different color. In the above ex-
ample, hex G35 is a HILL hex; hexside
G35/G36 is a HILLOCK contour hexside
ON a Hill. On non-desert maps Hillock
hexsides represent Level +5 contours ON
TOP of the colored levels. Unlike Hillock
terrain, which is depicted using artistic con-
tour depictions that face out from along a
hexside, the contours for Hill terrain is found
inside a hex in a similar manner to Deirs
(except the terrain surrounding the hex cen-
ter dot slopes UP instead of DOWN).
Example: A Level +30 Hill will have a “+30”
appended to one or more of its hexes, as ref-
erence, somewhere on the mapsheet. All other
hexes of that color found on the map are con-
sidered the same height. Hillocks are NOT
marked with height information—only Hills
are.
8.13.2 LOS—Hills depict more substantial
terrain undulations than Hillocks do and
vary in height. The default change in eleva-
tion of a Hill is +10 LEVELS. Hills block
LOS to units at a lower level than the firing
unit.
8.13.21 Blind Hexes —Hills create Blind
hexes in keeping with the relative height
difference between firing and target units.
Non-Cliff crest lines (contours) create one
LESS Blind hex (to a minimum of ZERO blind
hexes) from a hex that is part of the SAME
hill regardless of the shape of the hill. To
be part of the same hill, there must be con-
nected hexes above Level 0, making up one
‘hill’. (Exception: When TERRACED hills are
in effect a Blind Hex is always created by a
crest line). SUBTRACT ONE from the num-
ber of Blind Hexes specified on the LOS
Blind Hex Creation Table. Example: A squad
in a Level +20 Hill hex tries to see past a
Level +10 Hill (on a different hill) hex 16 hexes
away to see an enemy squad in Level 0 open
ground 20 hexes away. Using the ‘13-18’
column, the row used is the ‘+10’ row, since
the firing unit has a +10 Height Advantage
(Height DIFF) over the +10 Hill and is 16
hexes away from the blocking terrain. Three
16
Blind hexes are created, so the firing squad
has a LOS to the enemy squad. If the enemy
was 19 hexes away, the LOS would be
blocked, due to the three Blind hexes. If the
LOS contained Hill hexes of the same hill
ONLY, one less Blind Hex would be created.
8.13.3 Cover—Vehicles are automatically
considered in Hull-Defilade position from
any lower level firing unit if occupying a Hill
hex containing a contour, i.e., the LOS
crosses a HILL contour in the target unit’s
hex. All other units receive Good cover from
lower level fire UNLESS receiving in-hex
cover from ANY other terrain or Emplace-
ment in their hex location.
8.13.31 Adjacent H-D—A higher level ve-
hicle IS considered H-D across a Hill hexside
from an adjacent, lower level firing unit.
8.13.4 Movement —It costs 1 MP+CoT to
move UP when entering a hill hex; other -
wise pay CoT when moving down.
8.13.5 Cliffs—A rough dark-brown hexside
on a Hill hex depicts a ‘Cliff’. Cliffs separate
some Hill hexes, usually along hexsides
when the change in elevation represents
more than a +10 or -10 Level change (they
may also be used with lesser elevation
changes). Cliff hexsides are impassable. No
unit may move across a Cliff hexside.
8.13.6 Precipitous Terrain—A unit must
pay 4 MP + CoT to enter an adjacent hex
that entails changing levels by +15 or more,
whether moving up or down in levels.
Winded units may not do so, including dur-
ing Infiltration. Note that Hillocks on Hills,
as well as Ravines and Creeks may create
precipitous terrain—always use the actual
level the unit is entering when it crosses a
hexside or enters a new hex. All non Fully-
Tracked Vehicles must roll on the Immobili-
zation Table when moving entails entering
precipitous terrain, prior to entering the new
hex.
8.13.61 Hillock—Precipitous terrain is cre-
ated whenever a Hillock hexside is printed
along a hexside that ALSO has a Hill con-
tour within.
8.13.62 Roads and Paths —Any Road or
Path (not Track) that crosses a Precipitous
terrain hexside cancels the Immobilization
Table roll for vehicles moving along them
and reduces the cost for vehicles to 2 +
CoT. A road or path reduces the cost for
Personnel by ONE MP to 3 + CoT and al-
lows Winded units to Infiltrate into precipi-
tous terrain.
8.13.7 Razor-Back Ridge—Another form of
Hill contour is the ‘Razor-Back Ridge’ (e.g.,
ATS Okinawa map). A Razor -Back Ridge
exists along hexsides containing Hillock art
along adjacent hexsides (i.e., BOTH sides
of one hexside).
8.13.71 LOS—A Razor-Back Ridge hexside/
hexspine is a Level +5 Obstacle just as if it
were a wall hexside. A unit in Full cover
UNDER an Emplacement can see past a
Razor -Back Ridge that forms a hexside or
hexspine of its own hex to non-adjacent
hexes. Units directly behind a Razor -Back
Ridge hexside or hexspine receive IM-
PROVED cover as if it were a wall. It is
otherwise treated as a Hillock contour
across the hexside for purposes of tracing
LOS by units sighting across a Razor -Back
Ridge hexside (i.e., they receive a +5 levels
8.16.21 Orchard Roads—Any SAME LEVEL
LOS height advantage across the hexside
LOS (including Continuous Slope) that en-
[in both directions]).
8.14 JUNKYARD
ters and exits an Orchard hex ALONG a A C
road, never leaves the road art, and does
8.14.1 Description —The
NOT touch an orchard art symbol, is NOT
Junkyard terrain is depicted
affected by the Orchard terrain.
by a pile of irregular objects.
8.16.3 Cover —An Orchard provides no
8.14.2 LOS—Junkyard is
cover to units IN its hex. However, units
level +5 Obscuring terrain that
may set up hidden in orchards.
affects the entire hex at ground level.
8.16.4 Movement—All units enter Orchards B D
8.14.3 Cover —Junkyard provides Good
at the cost of 1 MP.
cover. It creates Airbursts. Units may set
8.17 PALM GROVES
up Hidden in Junkyard.
8.17 .1 Description —Palm
8.14.4 Movement—Junkyard terrain costs
All Personnel units in this example are on the
Groves are found on any Over-
2 MP to enter. Personnel may not use Run-
same terrain level. Squad A has a LOS to C.
lay with a ‘P’ ID and green
ning movement in Junkyard hexes. Vehicles
It does NOT have one to D. Squad B has a
must check Immobilization AFTER entering
‘palm tree’ artwork.
LOS to both C and D. If B fired on C or D it
8.17.2 LOS—A Palm Grove is
a Junkyard hex.
would use the ‘4’ column on the Casualty
8.15 OPEN GROUND
Level +10 Obscuring terrain that affects the
Table, applying its usual ‘8’ Gunfire factors,
8.15.1 Description—All clear
entire hex at ground level and +10 levels
with a 2L shift, reducing it to a ‘4’.
above. Palm Groves create Blind hexes with-
or ‘blank’ terrain, containing If the thick black hexsides were instead
out reference to the number of palm tree
no other terrain art depiction BOCAGE terrain, A and C do NOT have a
terrain symbols in the hex.
within is considered Open LOS to each other. Nor would B and D as
8.17.3 Cover —A Palm Grove provides no
Ground. Bocage is Level +10 hexside terrain and
cover to units in its hex. However, units
8.15.2 LOS—Open Ground is Level 0 Clear blocks any LOS drawn exactly along the
may set up hidden in Palm Groves.
Terrain.
hexside.
8.17.4 Movement —All units enter Palm
8.15.3 Cover—Open Ground provides no
Grove at the cost of 1 MP.
If these were BLACK BAR hexsides inside a
cover.
8.18 RAILCARS
building, squads A and B do NOT have a LOS
8.15.4 Movement —All units enter Open
8.18.1 Description—Railcars
to C or D (and vice-versa) as the hexsides
Ground at the cost of 1 MP.
are found on maps depicting
would block ALL LOS.
8.16 ORCHARD
industrial complexes, such as
8.16.1 Description—Orchard
in Stalingrad.
8.19 RAVINE
terrain is depicted by rows of
8.18.2 LOS—A Railcar is Level
8.19.1 Description—A Ravine
medium foliage pieces that do
+10 Blocking terrain. The traced LOS must
is depicted by green and
not touch one another.
actually touch a Railcar artistic depiction
brown terrain art similar to a
8.16.2 LOS —An Orchard is
within the hex to be affected.
Wadi. Ravine is a Linear De-
Level +10 Obscuring terrain that affects the
8.18.3 Cover —A Railcar provides Good
pression.
entire hex at ground level and +10 levels
cover to units in the hex. ONLY Personnel
8.19.2 LOS—Ravine follows the LOS rules
above if there are 4+ orchard art symbols
and their carried L and M weapons (not H
for Linear Depression terrain.
in the hex. Orchard hexes with three or less
weapons) may set up Hidden in Railcar
8.19.3 Cover —Ravine follows the Cover
symbols ONLY affect LOS if touched by the
hexes.
rules of Linear Depressions normally not-
LOS ‘thread’. Orchards create Blind hexes
8.18.4 Movement—Personnel enter a Rail-
ing the restriction below on which units may
if the LOS traced actually touches a part of
car hex at a cost of 2 MP. Only fully tracked
be in UP positions.
the artistic Orchard depiction in a hex OR
vehicles may enter at the cost of 2 MP and
8.19.4 Movement —Ravine follows the
any part of the hex that contains four or
they must roll on the Immobilization Table
movement rules for Linear Depression ter-
more Orchard symbols. See the exceptions
AFTER entering a Railcar hex.
rain.
created by Orchard Roads.

In the Wadi (also illustrates Ravines and other LD)

LOS example at left, squad ‘13’ only has a LOS to
‘21’, ‘15’ and the Pz IIf ‘C’ (and vice versa).
Squad ‘9’ UP in the wadi (along with its MG 34
L|MG) can SEE but has no LOS to FIRE at squad
‘10’ (ignore ramifications for same nationality for
this example) or ‘15’. Squad ‘10’ CAN see and
fire at (i.e., has a LOS) squad ‘9’ with no restric-
tion as can ‘15’.
Pzkw IIf ‘C’ is also UP in its wadi hex. It has a
LOS to squad ‘10’ but no ability to fire at any
other unit in the example. Its line-of-fire to ‘15’
crosses a wadi hexside; squads ‘13’ and ‘21’ are
down in the wadi and can be seen but not fired
at. Its LOS to squad ‘9’ would NOT cross the two
allowable hexsides the Panzer’s LOS has to cross
from a hull-defilade position in a wadi. If squad ‘10’
was an enemy tank instead, Pzkw IIf ‘C’ would be
in hull-defilade to its direct fire.
Squad ‘10’ cannot see squads ‘13’ and ‘21’ down
in the wadi. If it was in the hex with the “W13”
overlay ID text, it COULD see along the continu-
ous wadi to squad ‘13’.

17
 tering hexes with hexside Roads. They must
pay to change VCA to follow the hexside

In the example at left the Covered Arc (CA) of Road. The facing hit when a vehicle is fired

the PaK 40 H|AT gun is traced through its front at is determined normally as if the hex con-

two hexsides, continuing out to include all tained no terrain. LOS may be blocked by

hexes within the area enclosed by the arrows. terrain in the hex sharing the hexside, how-

To fire outside of this Covered Arc, the gun ever, and is based on where the vehicle

will have to pivot to face a new hexspine, thus entered the hexside in relation to where the

changing its CA. If it turned ONE hexspine, building is in the hex. Vehicles may end the

add a +3 HPT DRM. Movement Segment in hexside Road loca-

This example also describes Vehicle Covered tions and may use Continued Movement

Arc (VCA). Non-turreted vehicles MUST pivot along them.

to engage targets outside their Covered Arc. 8.20.65 Vehicles Entering In-Hex Terrain—

Turreted vehicles may instead pivot their turret A vehicle may not enter in-hex terrain once

ONLY (i.e., change Turret Covered Arc [TCA]).
8.19.41 Up and Position Restriction—Only
Personnel and their carried L and M weap-
ons may be in the UP location in Ravine
hexes.
8 . 2 0 R O A D S , T R A C K S , PAT H S , A N D
RAILROADS
8.20.1 Description —These
are depicted on maps and
overlays by brown, gray or
hatched stripes. Overlays with
an ID beginning with ‘Tr’ are
Tracks. Overlays that begin
with the letter -number ID ‘RR’
are Railroad terrain. Roads (in-
cluding Paved and Unpaved
Roads as well as Paths) are
depicted on non-desert maps. Paved Roads
are depicted in gray. Non-paved Roads are
printed in light brown or tan. Paths are de-
picted by squiggly brown lines. Unless stated
otherwise, there is no difference in game
terms between ‘paved’ and ‘un-paved’ roads.
8.20.2 LOS—Tracks, Roads, Railroads and
Paths themselves are Clear terrain, noting
other terrain in their hexes.
8.20.3 Cover —Tracks, Roads, Railroads
and Paths have NO effect on LOS or cover,
noting other terrain in the same hex is
treated normally for the purposes of cover.
8.20.4 Movement—When moving ALONG
a Road or Track, vehicles pay a HALF MP
(Exception: WHEELED vehicles pay ONE
MP when moving along a Track). Railroad
costs ONE MP for all units moving ALONG
a Railroad. Personnel pay ONE MP unless
changing levels, in which case the MP cost
is reduced by ONE. Movement costs are
NEVER reduced to ‘zero’. The minimum cost
is always ½ MP or 1 MP if only moving one
hex.
8.20.41 Paths —Paths ONLY
affect Personnel movement.
They reduce by ONE the cost
for Personnel moving to a
higher level across a hexside
crossed by a Path. Paths also allow Person-
nel to move through other terrain along a
Path as if moving through Open Ground.
Pay the other cost of entering the terrain
otherwise. Hex N3 (above) is an example of
a Path hex.
8.20.42 Moving Along—To be considered
moving ALONG these terrain types, a unit
must be moving along the SAME Track,
Road, Railroad or Path (or Open Ground to
one of these across a hexside that points to
the ‘clear’ portion of the hex) by entering
and exiting through connected hexsides
crossed by the contiguous art depiction.
Personnel pay ONE MP for all three types,
when moving along. In ALL other movement
cases, use the OTHER terrain in the hex
(usually Open Ground if ONLY Road, Rail-
road, or Path terrain art is depicted in the
hex).
8.20.5 Mines Set Up restrictions—Mines
may NOT be set up Hidden in Paved Roads;
they must be set up on-map if set up in a
Paved Road, with their density value facing
UP.
8.20.6 Hexside Roads and Buildings with
Roads —Some Roads run along hexsides
(e.g., L32-L33 hexside on the Scottish Cor-
ridor mapsheet 1; G21-H20 hexside on the
Arnhem map) or in the same hex as a Build-
ing, but not directly along a hexside (e.g.,
hex A5 on the Combat Rangers map; hex
H6 on the Arnhem map). The rules treat
both of these Road situations in the same
manner. A unit may move along such Roads,
moving from one Road hex to another, with-
out entering other terrain in the hex. Place
a movement arrow OFF the unit, pointing
AWAY from the terrain as a reminder of this
in-hex location status.
8.20.61 LOS—LOS is traced to non moving
units normally (Exception: Opportunity Fire,
see 8.20.63). If the LOS hits any terrain in
the hex shared by the hexside Road before
it touches the Road art depiction in the hex,
it is blocked. Treat a LOS directly along a
hexside as touching a Road that crosses any
part of a hexside it is connected to.
8.20.62 Entry and Exit—A unit using a
Hexside Road to enter a new hex (i.e., in-
stead of entering the other terrain in the
hex) may only enter a new hex across a
hexside physically touched by the Road. A
unit exiting a hex along a hexside Road may
only enter new hexes connected to the Road.
8.20.63 Opportunity Fire —When using
Opportunity Fire at a unit newly entering a
hex along a hexside Road or Road + Build-
ing Road, a LOS is valid if any part of the
Road art can be touched on a hexside the
unit moved across to enter the hex before
hitting any terrain that would block it.
8.20.64 Vehicle Movement—Vehicles may
only use Assault movement on Hexside
Roads and pay ONE MP instead of HALF a
MP for entering along a Hexside Road. They
make all VCA changes normally when en-
it moves along a hexside Road location of
that hex. It must exit the hex first.
8.20.66 Limitations—No more than ONE
vehicle may be in the Hexside Road loca-
tion of a hex. Any vehicle with a Gun Size of
75 or greater, and an ‘A’ Gun Rating may
ONLY move along the hexside if its turret is
facing toward the FRONT covered arc (usu-
ally NO turret marker placed unless the
vehicle is Suppressed) or REAR covered arc.
8.20.661 Range Limit—Any firing unit in
either hex sharing a hexside Road fires at a
target along a shared hexside at a range of
‘0’ (zero).
8.20.67 Personnel Movement—Personnel
units may move along the hexside Road of a
hex that has NO enemy unit in its Ground
level. A Personnel unit may not voluntarily
END the Movement Segment in a Hexside
Road.
8.20.68 Personnel Entering In-Hex Ter-
rain —A Personnel unit moving along a
hexside Road may enter the terrain in the
hex by paying the appropriate MP cost nor-
mally (unlike a vehicle). A Personnel unit
that must end its movement involuntarily is
considered IN the terrain, not along the
hexside, and no Hexside Road may be en-
tered by a Personnel unit if it does not have
enough MP available to do one of the follow-
ing:
a) Continue along the hexside road to end
its movement impulse in a non Hexside Road
location;
b) Enter the terrain in the hex after enter-
ing one or more Hexside Road locations.
8.21 ROCK-STREWN TERRAIN
8.21.1 Description —Rock-
Strewn terrain is found on
Overlays and is depicted by a
collection of gray stones.
8.21.2 LOS—Rock-Strewn
terrain is Level +5 Obscuring terrain that
affects the entire hex at ground level.
8.21.3 Cover —Rock-Strewn terrain pro-
vides Good cover and creates Airbursts.
Units may set up hidden in Rock-Strewn
hexes.
8.21.31 Hull-Defilade —Turreted vehicles
may attempt to gain Hull-Defilade on a roll
of ‘2’ or less in Rock-Strewn terrain.
8.21.4 Movement —Rock-Strewn terrain
costs 2 MP points to enter. All vehicle types
must make a roll on the Immobilization Table
AFTER entering Rock-Strewn terrain. There
is no roll made for vehicles that set up
within.

18
8.22 RUBBLE
8.22.1 Description —Rubble
represents shattered build-
ings, printed on-map or de-
picted by rubble markers. A In the example at left the two hexes to
Rubble location is treated as the front of the turret marker define its
a building location for Victory Condition pur - Turret Covered Arc (TCA). Use the cov-
poses. ered arc of the turret (TCA), not that of
8.22.2 LOS—Rubble is Level +5 Blocking the vehicle (VCA), when a TURRET
terrain that affects the entire hex at ground aspect is struck by a hit.
level. It rises +5 levels above the ground All rules for facing apply to turrets, spe-
level if ALL levels of a building are rubbled cifically the exceptions to FRONT/
(which is the case for all rubble PRINTED FLANK and REAR/FLANK hits for mov-
on map) or +5 levels above any level marker ing vehicles.
a rubble marker is placed on if only an up-
per floor is affected. In the case of rubble
in building levels ABOVE ground level, use
the building art to determine if LOS through
the hex is affected (i.e., rubble at higher +5 (i.e., like a Wall), but they may be speci- 8.25.3 Cover —Shellholes provide Good

levels is NOT considered to affect the EN- fied as Level +10 (i.e., treat like a High Wall cover to Personnel units and their Light and

TIRE hex). for LOS but allow all units to cross) by SSR. Medium weapons (i.e., not to Personnel man-

8.22.3 Cover—Rubble provides Masonry, For LOS purposes, treat Level +5 Sand ning Heavy weapons or vehicles).

Improved or Good cover based on the build- Dunes hexsides as if a Hillock contour runs 8.25.4 Movement—Shellhole terrain costs

ing color/type (gray/brown/Flimsy Huts). along both sides of the hexside; +10 Sand 2 MP to enter. Wheeled Vehicles must make

Units may set up Hidden in Rubble and it Dunes as if a Hill contour runs along the a roll on the Immobilization Table AFTER

creates Airbursts. hexside. entering a Shellhole hex. There is no roll

8.22.4 Movement—Entry costs 2 MP. Only 8.23.3 Cover —Sand Dunes provide the made when setting up within. Any hex con-

Personnel and their Light and Medium weap- same cover benefits as a Wall/High Wall as taining A ROAD hex containing Shellholes

ons, and FULLY tracked vehicles may set well as LOS advantages of Hillock and Hill is treated as a SHELLHOLE hex INSTEAD

up in and enter Rubble. Heavy weapons may contours. (i.e., NO road movement bonuses apply; treat

SET UP in Rubble hexes but may not EN- 8.23.31 Floorpan hits—A Floorpan Armor as Shellholes instead).

TER during play. Personnel may not use Hit may occur when an AFV crosses a Sand 8.26 SOFT SAND

Running movement to enter and vehicles Dune hexside. 8.26.1 Description—Soft

must use Assault movement. A roll is re- 8.23.4 Movement—Crossing a Sand Dune Sand terrain is represented

quired on the Immobilization Table AFTER hexside costs DOUBLE the normal entry by any Overlay with an ‘S’ ID

vehicle entry. cost for the hex. Vehicles roll on the Immo- and pale yellow terrain.

8.22.5 Creation—Rubble is cre- bilization Table when crossing Level +10 8.26 .2 LOS — S o f t S a n d i s

ated by HE (including aircraft Sand Dunes (i.e., not Level +5 dunes; note, Clear Terrain.

bombs) and is noted on the map this check is in addition to any called for by 8.26.3 Cover—Soft Sand provides no cover.

using rubble markers. See the the entry of soft sand terrain; roll AFTER It creates a Cushion effect.

building rules for the creation of rubble. the unit crosses the hexside). 8.26.4 Movement—Soft Sand costs 2 MP

8.23 SAND DUNES 8.24 SCRUB for all units to enter. All Vehicles must roll

8.23.1 Description —Sand 8.24.1 Description —Scrub on the Immobilization Table AFTER enter-

Dunes are found on Overlays terrain is found on AD- ing. There is no roll made when setting up

with an ‘Sd’ ID. They are VANCED TOBRUK (e.g., hex within. A Vehicle may not tow another Ve-

hexside terrain. Soft Sand is QQ20) maps and Overlays and hicle into a Soft Sand hex, but may tow one

found on Sand Dune overlays. on other maps when stated via out.

8.23.2 LOS—Sand Dune hexsides are Block- Battlefield Walkaround. 8.27 SUNKEN ROADS, PATHS AND RAIL-

ing Hexside terrain treated in the same 8.24.2 LOS—Scrub is Clear Terrain. ROADS

manner as a Wall or High Wall. The default 8.24.3 Cover—Scrub doesn’t provide any 8.27.1 Description —This

height of any Sand Dune hexside is Level cover. Units may set up Hidden in Scrub. form of Linear Depression

8.24.31 Hull-Defilade— depicts Roads, Paths and Rail-

Eligible vehicles set up in roads cut into the surround-

In the example at left a path in T18- or entering Scrub via As- ing terrain. These terrain types

7 T19-T20 runs through woods sault movement may at- are depicted with a dark background with

hexes. tempt to gain Hull-Defilade lighter, jagged sides facing ‘downhill’ and

on a roll of ‘1’ or less in rules referring to Sunken ‘Roads’ refer to

Squad 7 has no LOS to squad 5
Scrub terrain. Paths and Railroads also.
due to the intervening woods art
8.24.4 Movement— 8.27.2 LOS—While treating a Sunken Road
in T19, along the LOS between the
Scrub terrain costs 2 MP normally as a Linear Depression, note the
sighting dots of T18 and T20.
to enter for ALL unit art is wider than a Ravine or Wadi when
If squad 7 moves into hex T19, it tracing LOS between units down in the ter-
Woods art pays only 1 MP due to the path
types.

blocksLOS in the hex. If there was no path,

8.25 SHELLHOLES rain, making it easier to maintain an LOS.

8.25 .1 De- 8.27.3 Cover—Personnel units may be in

it would pay 2 MP for entering a
Woods hex.
Assume hex T19 was a HILL at
+10 levels higher than T20.
Squad 5 would STILL only pay 1
5 MP to move uphill due to the
Path. Any fire at 5 will still apply
WOODS cover state, even though
it is moving along a Path.
an UP position in keeping with the LD rules.
scription —
8.27.4 Movement —Movement along a
A Shellhole
hex is de- Sunken Road, Path, or Railroad is handled
picted as as per the rules for Linear Depressions (Ex-
two or more ‘holes’, with ception: ALL vehicles must roll on the Im-
a dark brown center and mobilization Table when entering [roll AF-
light brown, irregular TER entering the hex] and exiting [roll BE-
edges. FORE exiting] along a non ROAD hexside)
8.25.2 LOS —Shellholes and the road/path/railroad rules.

are Clear Terrain.

19
8.28 SWAMP
8.28.1 Description—Swamp
terrain is depicted by a irregu-
lar blue-green ‘grass’.
8.28.2 LOS—Swamp is level
+ 5 Obscuring terrain that af-
fects the entire hex at ground level.
8.28.3 Cover—Swamp provides no cover.
It creates a Cushion effect. Units may set
up hidden in a Swamp hex.
8.28.4 Movement—It costs 2 MP for Per -
sonnel units and any Light and Medium
weapons carried to enter a swamp hex. Per-
sonnel may not use Running movement in
Swamp hexes. A non FULLY Tracked ve-
hicle entering a Swamp hex is automatically
M-KILLed upon entry. Fully Tracked Vehicles
pay 4 MP to enter a Swamp hex and must
roll on the Immobilization Table AFTER en-
tering. There is no roll for vehicles setting
up within. Heavy weapons may not set up
or enter a Swamp hex (nor may they be
towed in unless using a road).
8.29 WADI
8.29.1 Description Wadi ter-
rain is represented by any
Overlay with a ‘W’ identifica-
tion letter -number combina-
tion. Wadis are Linear Depres-
sions.
8.29.2 LOS—Wadis follow the LOS rules of
Linear Depression except where noted be-
low.
8.29.3 Cover —Wadis follow the rules of
Linear Depressions (see 8.29.41-2 for ve-
hicles and H weapons)
8.29.4 Wadi End Hexes—The END of a Wadi
(where the wadi art meets non-wadi terrain)
is considered to slope gradually up to level
‘0’, creating an entrance into the Wadi that
does not increase the movement cost to enter
or exit (i.e., treat it as OPEN GROUND un-
less other terrain is also in the hex) and
does not require a roll on the Immobiliza-
tion Table for vehicles. The Wadi art is still
considered to be at Level –10; however, the
‘gradual’ slope is represented in game terms
ONLY by the absence of a roll for Immobili-
zation. A unit may STILL be UP in an end
hex normally.
8.29.41 Vehicles In UP Position —TUR-
RETED and FULLY tracked vehicles may
set up in or enter an UP position in a Wadi
at a cost of 4 MP. BOTH of the two (or one
if two are not available) GOOD cover
hexsides must be eligible entry hexsides for
the vehicle BEFORE the 4 MP expenditure
is made (often requiring the vehicle to
chance its facing). A cost of 4 MP x 2 (i.e., 8
MP, as the vehicle is considered to be using
reverse movement) is paid to exit, to a
DOWN position. Simply announce the move-
ment expenditure and remove the Level +10
marker. Turrets may be pointed in any di-
rection.
8.29.411 Opportunity Fire—For the pur-
poses of Opportunity Fire HALF of the ex-
penditure of MP is considered in the UP
position when a vehicle enters OR exits UP.
8.29.42 H Weapons In Up and Down Posi-
tion —Heavy weapons may SET UP (only;
they may not enter UP positions during play)
in UP positions and receive GOOD cover
across UP hexsides. Their manning crews
may move between UP and
DOWN positions normally.
If ‘D’ pivots its VCA one
8.30 WALLS
hexspine to fire, a +3 HPT
8.30.1 De-
DRM will be applied for the
scription—
75|B gun. A three column
Some map and
shift LEFT will be applied to
o v e r l a y
any Casualty Table fire us-
hexsides con-
ing the ‘4’ factor BMG if it
tain Wall artwork.
fires during the SAME im-
8.30.2 LOS—Walls are Level
pulse the VCA changed. If
+5 Blocking Hexside terrain.
the BMG was fired during a
8.30 .3 Cover —Personnel
later impulse it would NOT
units and Heavy weapons
pay the 3L shift called for by
behind Wall hexsides receive
pivoting the VCA one
Improved cover. Walls cre-
hexspine.
ate Hull-Defilade for all eli-
are found printed on (or abut in the case of
gible vehicles. See 7.2 for the ability of
a river). Water hexes themselves do not af-
higher level ADJACENT units to negate
fect LOS in any way.
cover.
8.31.3 River and Pond Entry—No unit may
8.30.4 Movement —Unless using a Gate,
enter a river or pond hex unless on a Bridge
all eligible units pay ONE MP + CoT when
or utilizing a Ford, Wading, or via Water -
crossing a Wall hexside and wheeled vehicles
craft.
may not cross except through a Gate. Half-
8.31.4 Fords— Personnel and vehicles may
Tracked vehicles may cross but must roll
enter Pond and River hexes in any hex speci-
on the Immobilization Table BEFORE cross-
fied by SSR (or Battlefield Walkaround) to
ing. Heavy weapons may never be pushed
be a ‘Ford’. Entry costs 4 MP per water hex
or towed across a Wall hexside.
entered via Fording. Towing is allowed and
8.30.41 Gates—An opening in a Wall hexside
vehicles do not require a roll on the Immo-
represents a ‘Gate’. All units may use Gates
bilization Table when entering a Ford. Per-
to cross Wall hexsides without extra MP cost
sonnel units may NOT use Running move-
or risk of immobilization. A Gate is treated
ment in a Ford hex.
for attack purposes as a Wall hexside.
8.31.41 Wading —In some cases a water
8.30.42 Floorpan hits—Unless using a Gate
obstacle may be defined as ‘shallow’, or entry
AFVs are subjected to Floorpan Armor Hits
may be allowed in some or all water hexes
(see 7.6) when crossing a Wall hexside.
via Wading. When using wading in a NON-
8.31 WATER OBSTACLES
Ford water hex, all vehicles must roll on
8.31.1 Description —Water
the Immobilization Table in EACH water hex
obstacles represent rivers,
entered. Entry via wading costs 4 MP for
creeks, and ponds.
entering (i.e., FOUR Movement Points per
8.31.11 Water Terrain Depic-
hex) for both vehicles and personnel. Tow-
tions—Each category of wa-
ing is NOT allowed in NON-Ford water hexes
ter obstacle is depicted using unique art-
and Personnel units may NOT use Running
work. All water terrain contains BLUE in
movement.
the ‘water’ portion of the art.
8.31.5 Bridges —A bridge is treated as a
8.31.12 Pond Terrain—A Pond is depicted
Road crossing water terrain. Unless stated
by an irregular blue shape covering one or
otherwise by SSR, bridges are considered
a small number of hexes.
to be at the same level as any road that
8.31.13 River Terrain—A River is depicted
crosses them (Exception: see 8.31.51).
by an irregular blue shape with a blue por-
8.31.51 Bridge Hexsides —Treat all non-
tion at least two hexes wide.
Road hexsides between bridge and non-
8.31.14 Creek—A creek is depicted in the
bridge hexes as if a Wall is present where
same manner as a Ravine with the excep-
the LOS hits the hexsides.
tion that a blue ‘water’ element is found in
8.31.52 Under Bridge—Place a LOS +10
the middle.
marker ON TOP OF any unit that is in the
8.31.141 Creek Description—A Creek is a
terrain UNDER a bridge to signify this sta-
Linear Depression.
tus. LOS is blocked to/from units directly
8.31.142 Creek LOS —Creeks follow the
above, on the bridge. Treat all other LOS to
LOS rules for Linear Depression terrain.
a unit under a bridge normally (i.e., usually
8.31.143 Creek Cover—Creeks follow the
down in an LD). When attacked by Indirect
Cover rules of Linear Depressions normally
Fire/OBA, the bridge overhead adds one
noting the restriction below on which units
column shift LEFT if under a ‘dirt’ road or
may be in UP positions.
TWO shifts LEFT for a paved road. Other -
8.31.144 Creek Movement—Creeks follow
wise, units under a bridge may only be at-
the movement rules for Linear Depression
tacked by units ON the bridge using Gre-
terrain UNLESS the water depth is stated
nades (including Satchel/Gammon Bombs),
to be ‘deep’ by SSR, in which case treat
with no ‘under bridge’ shift applied. A unit
affected Creeks in the same manner as a
may NOT move directly from on top to un-
River.
der a bridge unless stated otherwise by SSR.
8.31.145 Creek Up Position Restriction—
8.31.53 Pontoon Bridge—Counters for Pon-
Only Personnel and their carried L and M
toon Bridges are provided in some ATS
weapons may be in the UP location in Creek
games. These are placed as per SSR and
hexes.
are treated normally as bridges with the
8.31.2 LOS—All water hexes are considered
following exceptions.
to be at -10 levels below the terrain they
20
8.31.531 Stacking Limit—A Pontoon Bridge
may never be overstacked. No unit may ever
be in a position under a Pontoon Bridge.
8.31.532 Destruction—A Pontoon Bridge
counter is removed by any attack in its hex
that would otherwise create rubble.
8.32 WOODS
8.32.1 Description —Woods
terrain is depicted by large
foliage pieces that touch one
another. Woods is flammable
terrain.
8.32.2 LOS—Woods is Level +10 Blocking
terrain (Exception: Forest).
8.32.21 Forest—In some scenarios some
or all Woods hexes are defined as ‘Forest’.
Forest is treated as Woods in all cases with
the exception that it is Level +20 Blocking
terrain.
8.32.22 Jungle—In some scenarios some
or all Woods hexes are defined as ‘Jungle’.
Jungle is treated in the same manner as
Forest (e.g., Airbursts apply; +20 Blocking
terrain) with the following exceptions. Per-
sonnel may ONLY enter Jungle hexes by
Crawling or via Infiltration Movement. Only
Tracked (i.e., NOT half-tracks or wheeled)
vehicles may enter Jungle hexes but pay
DOUBLE the normal MP to enter. All types
of units may SET UP in Jungle hexes nor-
mally as if in Woods (including hidden set
up).
8.32.23 Bamboo— O n s o m e m a p s t h e
Battlefield Walkaround will state certain
hexes represent another tropical terrain
similar to Jungle called ‘Bamboo’. These
hexes are treated in the same manner as
Jungle, with the following exceptions. Bam-
boo is considered a Level +5 Blocking ter -
rain that affects the ENTIRE hex. Foxholes
may not set up in Bamboo. Units may set
up hidden in Bamboo.
8.32.24 Optional—If using Optional Hid-
den Set Up all units that set up in Jungle or
Bamboo hexes may set up Hidden.
8.32.3 Cover—Woods provide Good cover.
Woods creates Airbursts. Units may set up
hidden in Woods hexes.
8.32.4 Movement —It costs 2 MP for all
units to enter Woods. All Vehicles roll on
the Immobilization Table AFTER entering.
They may set up within with no penalty.
9.0 EMPLACEMENTS
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.1 Emplacements are man-made field
works, used to strengthen defensive posi-
tions. They include Anti-Tank Trenches,
Blockhouses, Bunkers, Foxholes, Hedge-
hogs, Minefields, Roadblocks, Sangars,
Weapon Pits, and Wire.
9.1.2 Emplacements Positions—All Em-
placements except Minefields, Roadblocks
and Wire have two distinct Positions: ON
TOP and UNDER. Together, both positions
count as one Hex location for Stacking pur-
poses. Unless otherwise restricted, units
may move between positions during Move-
ment by spending 1 MP or by Infiltrating.
9.1.3 Emplacement Entry and Exit —A
unit may enter or exit a hex with an Em-
placement. Usually, a unit enters an Em-
placement hex by moving on top of the
Emplacement marker by Crawling, Infiltrat-
ing, or moving normally. In some cases, a
Personnel unit UNDER an Emplacement may
move to an adjacent Emplacement, and re-
main underneath. Example: A unit in Open
Ground moves into a hex containing a Hedge-
hog. It is placed on top. It then moves under
the Hedgehog. If it wants to leave this Hedge-
hog and enter an adjacent one, it may enter
directly to UNDER the adjacent Hedgehog.
9.1.4 Set Up Restrictions-Only one Hedge-
hog, Bunker, Blockhouse or Foxhole marker
may be placed in a hex. NO Emplacement
may be set up in a Swamp or Water Ob-
stacle hex.
9.1.5 Stacking Limits—Emplacements do
not affect stacking. The stacking limit ap-
plies for all units in the hex, whether on top
of or under an Emplacement marker.
9.1.6 Destroying Emplacements—Some
Emplacements may be destroyed by differ-
ent means. When destroyed they are re-
moved from the map.
9.2 ANTI-TANK TRENCH
9.2.1 Description —An Anti-
Tank (AT) Trench is a steep-sided
ditch used to block vehicular
movement. An AT Trench is
treated like a Hedgehog with the
following exceptions.
9.2.2 Movement Restrictions—No vehicu-
lar units of any type may enter hexes con-
taining AT Trenches.
9.2.3 Destruction—An AT Trench may be
eliminated only by a Dozer. See the rules
relating to the Demolition Table.
9.3 BLOCKHOUSE
9.3.1 Description —Block-
houses are concrete defensive
structures built in defensive
strongpoints. They are in use
only by SSR. Use Bunker
counters as Blockhouses and treat them as
Bunkers except as stated below.
9.3.2 Stacking—Up to SIX Stacking Points
of Personnel and any Light and Medium
weapons (not Heavy weapons) they carry
may be stacked under a Blockhouse marker.
A Blockhouse may not be Overstacked.
21
9.3.3 Occupant Restrictions—No unit may
fire (or serve as an FO) when UNDER a
Blockhouse.
9.3.4 Attacking Blockhouse Occupants—
Units under a Blockhouse counter may not
be attacked by Small Arms Gunfire or Gre-
nades, even from adjacent or same-hex
units.
9.3.5 Destruction —A Blockhouse is de-
stroyed in the same manner as a Bunker
(see 9.4.6).
9.4 BUNKER
9.4.1 Description —Bunkers
represent weapons pits covered
with reinforced roofs. Bunkers
have two positions:
On Top Effects—Units on top
of a Bunker occupy the other terrain in the
hex and receive no cover benefits.
Under Effects —Units under a Bunker
marker are assumed to be in FULL cover.
However, they may fire OUT to their maxi-
mum range (Exception: Indirect fire may not
be used from under a Bunker marker [spot-
ting from under is otherwise allowed]). See
12.5.661 for rules on targeting units in
FULL cover.
9.4.2 Set Up Restriction—Bunkers may not
be placed in a building or LD hex.
9.4.3 Stacking Restrictions—ONE Heavy
(no restriction on target size) or Medium
weapon AND a crew OR Personnel units and
their Light weapons totaling no more than
THREE Stacking Points may be placed un-
der a Bunker marker. Units inside a Bun-
ker may not be Overstacked.
9.4.4 Movement restrictions—Units on top
of a Bunker never ‘drop’ into Full cover un-
der a Bunker. They may move under the
Bunker using Movement (at the cost of 1
MP) and via Infiltration. Friendly units may
not move under a Bunker that is already
occupied by enemy units, even by Infiltra-
tion. Enemy and friendly Personnel may
occupy the same hex if one side is UNDER
a Bunker.
9.4.5 Bunker Target and Location—Bun-
ker occupants are treated as being in FULL
cover (Exception: Under Effects, see 9.4.1;
In the example at left the two hexes
to the front of the vehicle marker
define its front target FACING also
known as Vehicle Covered Arc
(VCA). The term ‘aspect’ is used to
define the portion of a vehicle
struck and requires use of the Hit
Location Table.
HPT hits from within its VCA, as
well as exactly along the hexsides
marked ‘Front’ are FRONT facing
hits. Hits from within the FLANK
and REAR facings are also de-
fined.
The exception to the example at
left is if the target is MOVING. If
the LOS is traced exactly between
the flank and the front, the facing
is FRONT if the target is MOVING
and flank if it is STATIONARY. If
the LOS is traced exactly between
the flank and rear, it is rear if
STATIONARY and flank if
MOVING.
Same Hex Fire, see 9.4.52; AP Fire, see
9.4.51) for targeting purposes. The Bunker
and its occupants are attacked as if it is a
SEPARATE location within the hex.
9.4.51 AP Fire—Direct Firing Guns using
AP (any form of AP, e.g., APCR, but not
SCW) may be used to depict firing of solid
shot through the Bunker’s vision slits. A
special +4 HPT DRM (replacing the +3 DRM)
is applied. AP fire has no effect on the Bun-
ker itself. It targets H weapons normally
(i.e., use the C4 table for guns of 20mm or
less); (Exception: No Target Size DRM is
applied) OR Personnel, the latter using a
FRAG equivalent of 4 GF. Units firing AP at
a Bunker do not use or place BOT.
9.4.52 Units in the same hex—Units oc-
cupying the same hex as a Bunker reduce
the cover of enemy units under the Bunker
to IMPROVED (+2/2L) cover to THEIR FIRE
ONLY. There is no Melee allowed against
units in a Bunker unless the unit(s) UN-
DER the Bunker marker Infiltrate out.
9.4.53 Flamethrower Attacks—FT may be
used to attack bunker occupants HOW-
EVER the 3L shift for FULL cover IS ap-
plied.
9.4.6 Bunker Destruction—A Bunker is
destroyed by HE (Direct or Indirect Fire) or
by a Satchel Charge attack following a C6+
result. When a Bunker is destroyed, all oc-
cupants (including their weapons) are de-
stroyed. Remove the Bunker marker from
play.
9.4.7 Morale and Overruns—Bunkers add
‘2’ to the Morale value for Personnel units
beneath them. Personnel units beneath Bun-
kers ignore Overruns.
9.5 FOXHOLE
9.5.1 Description —Foxholes
depict individual holes dug by
soldiers. Foxholes have two po-
sitions:
On Top Effects —Units receive
no cover from the Foxholes.
Under Effects—Only Personnel units and
their Light and Medium weapons may move
under a Foxhole marker. Units Under a
Foxhole marker receive Good cover.
9.5.2 Set Up Restrictions—Foxholes may
not be placed in Buildings, Linear Depres-
sions, Bamboo, Paved Roads, or on a Bridge.
9.5.3 Movement restrictions—Foxholes do
not affect movement for vehicles. Person-
nel must pay 1 MP to move under a Foxhole
counter after entering the hex. They may
also enter via Infiltration.
9.5.4 Morale effect —Personnel units un-
der a Foxhole marker do not suffer the -4
DRM to their Morale during an Overrun.
They still check morale when Overrun.
9.6 HEDGEHOG
9.6.1 Description —Hedgehogs
represent a network of trenches
that provide all-round protection
for Personnel units. Hedgehogs
have two positions:
On Top Effects—Personnel and their Light
and Medium weapons are in Improved cover.
No other units receive a cover benefit.
Under Effects—Only Personnel units and
their Light and Medium weapons may be
placed Under a Hedgehog marker during
movement and Infiltration. Personnel may
also ‘drop’ into Full cover when stacked on
top of a Hedgehog. Units UNDER a Hedge-
hog receive Full cover.
9.6.2 Set Up restrictions—Hedgehogs may
not be placed in a Building, Linear Depres-
sion, or on a Bridge.
9.6.3 Entry—Personnel may move under a
Hedgehog at the cost of 1 MP or via Infiltra-
tion. When moving from Hedgehog to
Hedgehog, the unit may remain in the same
position (i.e., under or on top of the marker),
including during Infiltration. Personnel un-
der a Hedgehog may also move and Infil-
trate to an adjacent AT T rench, Bunker,
Blockhouse, Weapons Pits, and a Building
Cellar and vice-versa. When UNDER, and
moving between Hedgehogs (or allowable
emplacements/terrain as per the immedi-
ately preceding sentence), ignore the cost
of any hexside terrain (e.g., Bocage; Wall).
9.6.4 Movement restrictions—Hedgehogs
do not affect movement for FULLY or HALF-
tracked vehicles. Wheeled vehicles must
check Immobilization AFTER entering a
Hedgehog hex (Exception: Treat Cave Dug-
outs as the hex terrain, i.e., no roll is made).
To pick up a weapon left un-attended un-
der a Hedgehog, a Personnel unit must
move under the marker. Personnel may not
use Running movement when moving from
under one emplacement to under another.
9.6.5 Morale effect—Hedgehogs add ‘1’ to
the Morale value for Personnel units that
receive cover benefits from the Hedgehog.
Personnel units in Full cover under a Hedge-
hog counter do not suffer the -4 DRM to
their Morale during an Overrun. They still
check morale when being Overrun.
9.6.6 Cave Dugouts—Cave Dug-
outs are treated as the terrain
in the hex for vehicles. Person-
nel treat Cave Dugouts in the
same manner as Hedgehogs,
with the exceptions in 9.6.61-7.
9.6.61 Entry Restrictions—Only Japanese
units may enter/set up UNDER a Cave
Dugout counter. Unless using Infiltration,
moving UNDER a Cave Dugout may only be
accomplished from the hex the counter is
in and/or any adjacent LOWER level hex
that does not involve moving more than +10
levels across a hexside. No vehicle may set
up or move UNDER a Cave Dugout emplace-
ment and ONLY Japanese Personnel and
their carried Light and Medium weapons may
MOVE under, including when using Tunnel
Infiltration. Heavy weapons may also SET
UP under Cave Dugouts, and may be pushed
out, but never into the SAME HEX as the
Cave and NEVER back under a Cave Dug-
out once exited. Heavy weapons exit is al-
lowed ONLY to an adjacent hex, across a
hexside that involves a change in levels of
no more than -10 levels.
9.6.62 Set Up and Multi-Level LOS—A Cave
Dugout counter may ONLY be set up in a
hex that has an LOS to LOWER level ter -
rain along at least ONE hexside that is at
least -10 (minus ten) Levels. Any unit UN-
DER a Cave Dugout traces its LOS (and vice
versa) FROM the level of the hex’s center -
dot and/or the lower level of any adjacent
hex (noting Precipitous Terrain and Cliff
hexsides allow multiple LOS levels). How-
ever, a unit under a Cave Dugout marker
has no LOS (and thus may not attack; see
22
9.6.621 exception) into its hex or other
hexes of the same level unless the LOS
crosses a hexside with -10 or lower terrain
(i.e., it may ONLY trace LOS across hexsides
with lower level terrain, including on more
than one ‘side’ of the hex, assuming the hill
‘drops off’ on more than one hexside).
9.6.621 Satchel Charge Same Hex At-
tacks—A Satchel Charge MAY be used to
attack from the same hex as a Cave Dugout
marker IF the unit carrying the SC is on a
HIGHER level than the actual location of
the Cave. A SC may NOT be used (including
by Cave occupants) against units in a higher
level location.
9.6.63 Tunnel Infiltration—Any Japanese
Personnel unit UNDER a Cave Dugout
counter (including marked with FC as per
9.6.64) that is eligible to use Infiltration may
do so to move UNDER any Cave Dugout
counter within FOUR hexes noting the fol-
lowing restrictions. This type of Infiltration
is called Tunnel Infiltration and may also be
used by Japanese Personnel to/from UN-
DER Blockhouse, Bunker, Cave Dugout and
Hedgehog counters. If the Infiltrating unit
is marked with an FC marker (i.e., in CAVE
INTERIOR COVER) it may remain marked
in a new Cave location or remove the marker
upon placement in its new hex.
9.6.631 Tunnel Infiltration Restrictions—
No unit may Infiltrate under a Cave Dugout
in violation of stacking limits. A path of
hexes must be traced that does NOT cross
a level that is LOWER in levels than BOTH
Cave Dugout counters.
9.6.64 Cave INTERIOR Cover—Japanese
Personnel/Heavy Weapons under a Cave
Dugout may set up or ‘drop’ into a special
for m of CAVE INTERIOR COVER. Being
under a Cave marker does NOT provide this
form of special cover. This ‘drop’ may ONLY
be conducted by units ALREADY under a
Cave Dugout counter (mark them with an
FC marker after they drop or mark them
during set up) in the same manner as drop-
ping into FULL cover when stacked on a
hedgehog. A unit that drops into CAVE IN-
TERIOR cover may ONLY be attacked by
DIRECT fire from ADJACENT hexes.
9.6.65 Sealing Cave Dugouts—A Cave is
‘sealed’ by an HE (Direct or Indirect Fire)
attack following a C9+ result (see Table FR)
or by a Satchel Charge C6+ (see Table DT).
Remove the Cave marker and all units un-
der it.
9.6.66 SCW Attacks —Shaped Charge
Weapons may fire at units under Cave Dug-
out markers and apply a FULL cover HPT
DRM for units stacked under a Cave marker
(including HALVING Frag factors as per
12.5.6611).
9.6.67 Fire to Full Range—Unless marked
with an FC marker as per 9.6.64, a unit
under a Cave marker may fire/receive fire
to/from its maximum normal range.
9.7 MINEFIELDS
9.7.1 Description —Minefield
markers depict a combination of
AP and AT mines. Some depict AT
mines only.
9.7.2 Set Up Restrictions—Minefields may
be set up in hexes containing other types of
emplacements.
9.7.3 Minefield Density—On the back of
each Minefield marker, the field Density is
indicated in the form of a number. The Den-
sity is never revealed to the Opponent.
9.7.4 Minefield Quantity —In some sce-
narios the Defender is given a quantity of
Mines in his OOB. This quantity corre-
sponds to the total density of mines the
player may set up. Any quantity of Mine
markers may be used, as long as this num-
ber is not exceeded. Once a total quantity
of markers is selected, up to the quantity
given for that scenario, the markers are then
placed on the map (unless set up Hidden)
by the Defender with the number face
down.
9.7.41 AT Minefields —Some
Minefield markers only show
Anti-Tank Teller mine art (a round
‘pie-plate’) on them. AT mines ALL
have a strength of ‘3’ and when depicted as
part of a side’s OOB, represent the quan-
tity of AT mine COUNTERS provided. Per -
sonnel units ignore such AT Minefields, i.e.,
they are not attacked when entering. Only
Vehicles are attacked.
9.7.42 Remove Non Hidden Mines—A Per-
sonnel unit of at least two Stacking Points
may ‘pick up’ non-hidden mine markers set
up in bridge/paved road/airfield locations
as if it is a Light weapon. The mine marker
is immediately removed from play.
9.7.5 Units entering a friendly Minefield—
Most Minefields contained secret lanes
through which the laying side could safely
pass. Crawling, Infiltrating or Assault mov-
ing Personnel units, or Assault moving ve-
hicles, enter a friendly minefield hex with-
out any effect. Running Personnel units or
Cross-Country moving Vehicles must make
a Forcing attempt when entering a friendly
minefield.
9.7.6 Entering Enemy minefields—Crawl-
ing, Assault moving or Infiltrating Person-
nel units, or Assault moving Vehicles, enter
an enemy Minefield hex without any effect
if moving along a Minefield Lane as do Per-
sonnel using non Running movement from
under -to-under an emplacement. All other
units that are not Running or using Cross-
Country movement require a ‘Forcing’ die
roll upon entry of a mine hex.
9.7.61 Automatic Attack—Running Person-
nel units and Cross-Country moving vehicles
are automatically attacked by the Minefield
when entering an enemy Minefield hex.
9.7.7 Forcing a Minefield—When resolv-
ing a Forcing attempt, roll a die immedi-
ately. A die roll greater than the Minefield
Density value means the unit has success-
fully ‘Forced’ the Minefield. If the die roll is
equal to or less than the Minefield Density,
the Forcing attempt has failed and any unit(s)
entering that triggered the forcing roll is
attacked by the Mines. If more than one
Personnel unit enters, ONE forcing roll is
made and the resulting casualties are dis-
tributed normally.
9.7.71 Hidden Minefield —There is a -1
DRM for any Forcing attempt when enter -
ing an enemy Hidden Minefield.
9.7.8 Creating Lanes —Assault moving
FULLY tracked vehicles may create a WALL with the following exceptions.
Minefield Lane. A Lane is created if a ve-
hicle successfully enters the hex without
being attacked by the mines. Place a
Minefield Lane marker in the hex.
9.7.9 Minefield Attacks—Units unsuccess-
ful in Forcing a mine hex or attacked auto-
matically while entering suffer the following
damage:
9.7.91 AFVs—Are M-KILLed and must per-
form a check on the Bail Out Chart. Any
Personnel units transported on that AFV are
placed on the hex, and suffer automatic
minefield attack unless the mines in the hex
were ONLY AT mines.
9.7.92 APC and Trucks—Are K-KILLed and
replaced by burning wrecks. Any units be-
ing carried are placed in the hex and suffer
an attack unless the mines in the hex were
ONLY AT mines. Units being Towed are oth-
erwise unaffected (they remain in the hex),
unless a Towed Gun, which is marked with
an F-KILL marker.
9.7.93 Personnel Units—They are attacked
on the Casualty Table by FRAG Factors
equal to the Minefield Density number mul-
tiplied by four, using STATIONARY cover.
These attacks are conducted immediately
upon entry, and may ALSO take place dur-
ing the Infiltration Phase.
9.7.10 Dummy M i n e f i e l d s —Dummy
Minefields, marked fields containing no
mines, were often laid between real ones to
increase coverage. To simulate this, some
scenarios provide ‘Dummy’ minefield mark-
ers by SSR. If enemy units attempt to Force
a Dummy Minefield, the true nature of the
Minefield marker must be revealed. The
marker stays in place, face down, challeng-
ing the Opponent to remember its location.
9.7.11 Hidden Minefields—Minefields are
set up Hidden by SSR only. The location of
Hidden Minefields is recorded, including the
Minefield Density in the hex. A Hidden
Minefield is treated normally in every re-
spect and is placed on map when an enemy
unit enters the hex or finds it via search-
ing. Apply a –1 DRM for any Forcing at-
tempt in a Hidden minefield. Dummy
Minefields may not be set up Hidden.
Minefields may not be Hidden in Paved Road
hexes or on a Bridge.
9.7.12 Searching For Mines—Any Person-
nel unit may spend a full Movement Seg-
ment in its current hex to ‘search’ for Hid-
den minefields. The unit is considered to
use Crawling movement although it does not
exit its hex. Any Hidden Minefield marker(s),
adjacent to the Searching unit, is (are) placed
on map. No attack is made against the
Searching unit—it does not enter the Mine
hex.
9.7.13 Mine Clearance—Remove any mines
in a hex attacked by Indirect Fire obtaining
a ‘C6’ or higher result in its location.
9.8 ROADBLOCK
9.8.1 Description—A Roadblock
is a form of Emplacement de-
signed to stop vehicles. A Road-
block marker has three arrows
on it. When setting it up, point
the arrows at three hexsides. The Roadblock
is actually considered ON the hexsides, treat
these three hexsides as if they contain a
9.8.2 Set Up Restrictions—Roadblocks may
not be placed in a Linear Depression. Nor
23
may one be placed in a Building hex unless
there is a Building + Road combination. If
placed in a Building Road hexside or on a
Bridge, only the hexside crossed by the
Road contains the ‘Wall’.
9.8.3 Movement restrictions—No Vehicle
may cross a Roadblock hexside.
9.8.4 Clearing Roadblocks—A Roadblock
marker is removed by any C6 or better re-
sult obtained by Indirect Fire in its hex OR
via Demolition/Dozer OR if the Roadblock
itself is targeted for an attack by Direct Fire
HE (treat it as a Building target) and a C6+
is obtained.
9.9 SANGAR
9.9.1 Description—A Sangar is
an emplacement constructed
above the earth by piling stones.
Treat Sangars as Weapons Pits
with the following exceptions.
On Top Effects—Units on top of a Sangar
do not occupy the Emplacement and receive
no defensive advantages.
Under Effects—Personnel and Heavy weap-
ons are in Good cover. Vehicles receive Hull-
Defilade status.
9.9.2 Set Up Restriction—Sangar markers
may not be placed in a building hex or a
Linear Depression.
9.9.3 Stacking Restrictions—Each Sangar
may hold one Heavy weapon and its crew
OR one vehicle OR up to THREE Stacking
Points of Personnel and their Light and
Medium weapons. A Sangar may not be
Overstacked.
9.9.31 K-KILL and F-KILL Units in
Sangars —A unit continues to occupy a
Sangar regardless of its damage status. A
vehicle that is K-KILLed while in a Sangar
stays there (replaced by the appropriate
wreck counter, i.e., Burning or non-Burn-
ing) and prevents other units from occupy-
ing that Sangar. Likewise, a Heavy weapon
unit that is F-KILLed while in a Sangar stays
there, preventing other units from occupy-
ing the Sangar. Heavy weapons, vehicles and
Wrecks Under a Sangar may be Towed out
normally by Vehicles in the hex (i.e., on top
of the Sangar marker) without the towing
vehicle having to move under the Sangar.
Personnel may move under a Sangar to push
a Heavy weapon out using normal move-
ment rules and a cost of 2 MP.
9.9.4 Movement Restrictions —Vehicles
and Heavy weapons may never move under
a Sangar during play; they may only set up
under one. When overruning a Sangar hex
attacking vehicles do not move under the
emplacement. Sangars do not affect move-
ment through their hex.
9.9.5 Floorpan Hits—AFVs exiting a Sangar
are subject to Floorpan hits in the same
manner as if crossing a Wall hexside, with-
out reference to hexside.
9.9.6 Sangar Destruction—A Sangar is re-
moved from play when any target within is
hit by HE ammunition, either by direct or
indirect fire, that results in a C4 or greater
on the Casualty Table. Overrun of a unit in
a Sangar by any fully-tracked AFV removes
the Sangar AND any Heavy crew-served
weapons (and Light and Medium weapons
NOT carried by a Personnel unit) in it. Any
Personnel (including the manning crew of
the H weapon) receives no additional pen-
alty from the overrun that destroys the
Sangar (i.e., they check morale during Over-
runs, applying the normal morale penalty
with no increase).
9.10 WEAPONS PIT
9.10.1 Description —Weapons
Pit counters depict dug-in gun
positions providing partial pro-
tection for weapons, Personnel,
and vehicles. Weapons Pits have
two positions:
On Top—Units on top of a Weapons Pit do
not occupy the Emplacement and are con-
sidered in the hex’s terrain.
Under Effects:
Personnel units—Receive Improved cover.
Heavy weapons may not set up or move in
Full cover, but their crew may.
Heavy weapons—Improved cover, and they
benefit from an additional +1 HPT DRM for
Direct Fire. Their crew, like any Personnel
unit, receives Improved cover, but may also
move or drop into Full cover like a Hedge-
hog. When the crew is in Full cover, it may
not fire its Heavy weapon.
NON-Very Small Vehicles—Are in H-D po-
sitions. They may not use a BMG (bow ma-
chine-gun).
Very Small Vehicles—Are in FULL cover.
They may not fire ANY weapons except
against adjacent units and aircraft.
9.10.2 Set Up Restrictions—Weapons Pit
markers may not be placed in a building
hex, or on a bridge.
9.10.3 Stacking Restrictions—Each Weap-
ons Pit may hold ONE Heavy weapon unit
and its crew OR one vehicle OR up to
THREE Stacking Points of Personnel and
their Light and Medium weapons. A Weap-
ons Pit may not be Overstacked.
9.10.31 K-KILL and F-KILL Units IN Weap-
ons Pits —A unit continues to occupy a
Weapons Pit regardless of its damage sta-
tus. A Vehicle that is K-KILLed while in a
Weapons Pit is replaced by the appropriate
Wreck counter, which prevents other units
from occupying that Weapons Pit. Likewise,
a Heavy weapon unit that is F-KILLed while
under a Weapons Pit prevents other units
from occupying the Weapons Pit. Heavy
weapons, vehicles and wrecks under a
Weapons Pit may be towed out normally by
vehicles in the hex without having to move
under the Weapons Pit. Personnel may
move under a Weapon Pit marker for 2 MP
to Push an H weapon out.
9.10.4 Movement restriction —Vehicles
and Heavy weapons may never move Un-
der a Weapons Pit during play; they may
only set up under one. A vehicle may exit
from under a Weapons Pit by paying ONE
MP, and is placed on top of the marker; it
may then move normally. Weapons Pits do
not affect movement through their hex, not-
ing the ability to enter from an adjacent
Hedgehog (and vice-versa) while staying
under each Emplacement (and thus still in
Full cover).
9.10.5 Morale effect—Personnel units in
Full cover under a Weapons Pit counter do
not suffer the +4 DRM during an Overrun.
They still check morale during Overruns.
9.11 WIRE
9.11.1 Description—Wire repre-
sents rolled or staked concertina
wire used to hinder enemy move-
ment on the battlefield.
9.11.2 Set Up restrictions—Wire may not
be placed in a Building hex. Wire may be
placed in the same hex as other Emplace-
ments (e.g., Mines).
9.11.3 Movement r e s t r i c t i o n s —No
Wheeled vehicle may enter a hex contain-
ing Wire. Tracked and Half-Tracked Vehicles
must check for Immobilization AFTER en-
tering a Wire hex. Personnel units may only
enter Wire hexes by Crawling or Infiltra-
tion. All may EXIT freely.
9.11.4 Clearing Wire—A Wire counter is
removed by Indirect Fire HE receiving a ‘C6’
result or greater. A LANE may be created
through a Wire hex by a TRACKED (not Half-
Track) vehicle that uses Assault Movement
and successfully enters AND exits the Wire
hex. There is no effect to the Wire when a
vehicle enters and becomes M-KILLed.
10.0 MORALE
10.1 OVERVIEW
Each Personnel unit has a morale value that
represents combat worthiness. The morale
value is the third number displayed on each
Personnel counter. This value is used as
the unit’s base morale value when morale
checks are called for due to various cir -
cumstances (e.g., casualties; overrun).
10.1.1 Axis and Allied Leaders
For all Morale purposes, including rallying
Broken and Surrendered units, German
leaders are considered ‘friendly’ to all Axis
Personnel (e.g., Italian; Romanian; Hungar-
ian). Non German Axis leaders are only con-
sidered friendly to Personnel of their own
nationality. British/American leaders are
considered friendly to Allied troops.
10.2 MORALE SUPPORT RANGE (MSR)
Some friendly and most enemy units within
Morale Support Range alter a unit’s current
morale value. Units in all accessible loca-
tions of its current hex or an adjacent hex,
in both cases within LOS (i.e., not across
interior building ‘black bar’ hexsides, Cliff
hexside, or upper levels of a building out of
a unit’s LOS) and able to be reached via
crawling and/or Infiltration, modify morale.
These include Passengers, as long as they
are NOT in FULL cover in the vehicle trans-
porting them.
10.2.1 Morale Modifiers
Some friendly and most enemy units within
MSR alter a unit’s current morale value, as
well as some conditions (e.g., in a minefield).
There is no ‘maximum’ morale value.
10.2.2 Morale Table
The Morale Table (Table M) provides morale
modifiers related to friendly and enemy units
within MSR. The entry for “Each 3 Stacking
Point Personnel unit” implies that only full
Squads influence morale value (Exception:
USMC). Additionally, a maximum of ONE

In the example at left, Crusader ‘C’ is in a Hull-

Defilade position to Pzkw IIf ‘C’ (and vice versa).
It can ONLY be hit in the turret, which is show-
ing the Crusader a FRONT facing. The Cru-
sader is not in defilade from ATR ‘C’—it can be
hit in the hull REAR or turret SIDE.
Squad ‘9’ has no LOS to squad ‘21’. Squad ‘15’
has a LOS to all the units shown and is at Level
+5.
Squad ‘10’ can see squad ‘21’ and is in GOOD
cover to ‘21’, Pzkw IIf ‘C’, Stuart ‘K’, and Cru-
sader ‘C’. If squad ‘15’ was an enemy unit, it
would deny the GOOD cover when firing at ‘10’
due to being ADJACENT.
Stuart ‘K’ is not automatically in Hull-Defilade—
it may roll when in a hex up on a hillock—after
setting up in or entering the hex. If squad ‘21’
was ALSO on a hillock, it could NOT see ‘9’ since
‘9’ is beyond the first hex of the new Hillock along
21’s LOS.
If ‘10’ was in FULL cover in a hedgehog, it would
be out of LOS of all units in the example except
‘9’ and the adjacent ‘15’.

24
friendly Leader may affect morale. No other
friendly units (e.g., reduced squads; crews)
increase morale, but ONE surrendered
friendly 2+ Stacking Point unit (i.e., non
leader/BAR Gunner/FO/other 1 SP unit)
within MSR reduces morale (Exception:
USMC/Japanese ignore surrendered
friendly units within MSR; Italian units re-
duce morale -2 for EACH surrendered unit).
10.2.21 Morale Table Modifiers —The
modifiers listed on the Morale Table reduce
or increase morale (i.e., they are NOT used
as DRM).
10.2.3 Intimidation
During the End of Turn Segment, check for
Intimidation for all Personnel units within
MSR to at least one enemy unit. If, using all
applicable morale modifiers, such a unit’s
morale value is less than zero, it immedi-
ately surrenders (and is removed from play)
UNLESS a non-Broken/Surrendered
friendly leader is in its location or within
MSR. Leaders ignore Intimidation.
10.2.4 Morale Check (MC) Order
Check morale in the following order when
the listed units are present:
1) Officer
2) NCO
3) All other units at the owning player’s dis-
cretion (Exception: Commissars do not
check).
10.2.5 Adjusted Morale
When checking morale, use the adjusted
value, which includes all morale modifiers
from the Morale Table. The adjusted mo-
rale value changes immediately if friendly
units modifying morale either break or sur-
render.
Example: If a leader fails a Casualty MC or a
friendly unit surrenders, other friendly units
in their MSR that subsequently check their
morale must immediately adjust their mo-
rale.
10.3 CHECKING MORALE
The following situations cause Personnel to
check morale.
a) Casualty MC: Casualties cause all friendly
Personnel units in a Location to check mo-
rale (see 12.5.95);
b) Collateral Fire MC : Personnel must
check morale when entering a Location con-
taining a Collateral Fire ‘C’ marker (see
12.5.101);
c) Overrun MC: Overrun attacks cause tar-
geted Personnel units to check morale (see
12.14.61);
d) Surrender MC: Surrendering Personnel
units check morale to avoid being eliminated
(see 10.8.1);
e) Rally MC: Broken Personnel units trying
to recover (see 10.8).
10.3.1 Die roll
Check morale by rolling one die and com-
paring its result to the unit’s adjusted mo-
rale value. If the result exceeds the adjusted
value, the morale check failed. If it is less
than or equal to the adjusted value the mo-
rale check succeeds. Note: In some cases
rolling EQUAL to the adjusted morale value
may Pin Down a unit (see 10.6).
10.3.2 Automatic Results
A MC automatically succeeds on a DR of 1.
Conversely, a MC automatically fails on a
DR of 0 (Exception: Unless Courage results
in a ‘00’, see 10.4).
10.3.3 Commissars and Japanese ‘*’ Of-
ficers
Commissars and Japanese officers with a
morale value denoted by an asterisk NEVER
check Morale. Friendly units stacked with
these Personnel units only fail MC on a DR
of 0 and each of those failing their MC then
suffers a C1 (no subsequent MC following
this C1) instead of being Broken AND Cour -
age may not result.
10.4 COURAGE
10.4.1 Any Personnel unit that
rolls a 0 (zero) during any MC (in-
cluding while attempting to Rally)
immediately makes a subsequent
die roll. Another 0 results immediate rallies
the unit and marks it with a Courage marker.
Mark it with a ‘medal’ marker (a handful of
historical medals are provided; they are all
the same in game terms). If a second 0 is
not rolled after the first 0, the unit fails its
MC normally.
10.4.2 Courage Benefits
Units marked with a medal are immune
from MC for the remainder of the scenario.
Double their Melee Value against Vehicles
and Personnel (including doubling of leader
benefits). They may also fire any type of
weapon with no penalties for reduced Crews,
etc., including leaders manning weapons and
serving as crews. Do not mark them as
Winded when using Running Movement;
they may use running movement each turn
and do not suffer from exhaustion penal-
ties.
10.5 BROKEN UNITS
10.5.1 Restricted Use
Broken units may not fire or infiltrate.
10.5.2 Reaction
Broken Personnel react as follows.
10.5.21 In Emplacement—They ‘drop’ into
Full cover when first becoming Broken (even
if they already moved or fired) if the Em-
placement allows them to do so, and re-
main there for the remainder of the turn.
10.5.22 Passengers—Mark them with a FC
marker when first becoming Broken if the
Transport Vehicle provides Full cover; if not,
they immediately unload in the current hex.
10.5.23 Enemy Entry—Immediately elimi-
nate a Broken unit if an enemy unit enters/
Infiltrates into its location (see the excep-
tions in 10.5.24).
10.5.24 Overrun & Melee vs. Vehicle—
Broken units may remain in the same hex
with an enemy vehicle after breaking as a
result of an Overrun attack (see 12.14.61)
or by failing a Melee vs. Vehicle morale check
(see 12.15.47).
10.5.3 Broken Unit Movement
Broken Units may never Infiltrate. A Per -
sonnel unit may not move during the turn it
breaks. Those that broke during a previous
turn MAY move, subject to the following
restrictions.
a) They may only use Assault or Crawling;
b) They may not move closer (or adjacent in
a multi-location hex) to enemy units within
their LOS and Spotting Range. If they are
ineligible to move due to LOS to enemy units,
they may always crawl one hex or location
in any direction otherwise eligible for move-
ment.
10.6 PINNED DOWN UNITS
If a moving Personnel unit (even if already
25
Broken) passes a morale check by rolling
equal to its morale value it must immedi-
ately stop moving unless a non-broken
leader is also in the location. Treat such
units as temporarily ‘pinned down.’ They may
Infiltrate normally during the Infiltration
Phase if otherwise eligible.
Example: A 7|5|8 squad that rolls an ‘8’
while moving must immediately stop mov-
ing.
10.7 SURRENDER
10.7.1 Place a ‘Surrender’ marker on a unit
when any of the following occurs:
a) An already broken unit fails a non-rally
MC;
b) The unit fails a non-rally MC while in MSR
of ANY non-broken/surrendered enemy
Personnel unit (Exceptions: Overrun and
Melee, see 10.5.24).
10.7.2 Surrender Effects
A Surrendered unit is treated like a Broken
unit, with the following additional restric-
tions:
a) It may neither move nor Infiltrate;
b) Surrendered units may not be targeted
for fire unless other enemy units are in their
location or another enemy unit is targeted
by FFE that also hits the surrendered units;
c) Enemy units may freely enter their loca-
tion if no non Surrendered friendly units
are present;
d) Surrendered units reduce the morale of
friendly units within MSR (Exception:
USMC/Japanese units).
10.7.3 Automatic Elimination—Automati-
cally eliminate a unit marked as Surren-
dered if any of the following occurs:
i) It fails a non-rally MC;
ii) An enemy Personnel unit moves into or
Infiltrates into its location;
iii) It is still Surrendered at the end of the
End of Turn Segment.
10.8 RALLYING
Broken and Surrendered units may be re-
stored to their normal function by a friendly
(noting 10.1.1 restrictions) NON-Broken
leader via the ‘rally’ process. Surrendered
units may also ‘improve’ their state to Bro-
ken without a leader being present. A NON-
leader Personnel unit is only eligible to at-
tempt to rally if a NON-Broken friendly
leader is in its location
10.8.1 Self Rally —A Broken leader does
not need another leader to attempt Rally and
may BEGIN the segment broken. If it ral-
lies it may immediately attempt to rally other
friendly units. Crews (see 14.2.7) and all 1
SP Personnel units (e.g., BAR Gunner) may
also attempt to rally without a leader present
but do NOT rally other units.
10.8.11 Rally Attempt Limit—With the
exception of LEADERS, one morale check
for rally purposes may be made per unit
per turn (i.e., rallying takes place during
the End of Turn Segment ONLY).
10.8.2 Rally Failure and Success
Any unit that fails to Rally simply remains
Broken (Exception: Surrendered units
checking morale as per 10.8.4 are elimi-
nated; if attempting rally with a NON Bro-
ken leader they remain in play marked as
Surrendered). Surrendered units that rally
are returned to their normal function (i.e.,
they are NOT marked as Broken).
10.8.3 Rally Order
When rallying, units use morale modifiers
based on units PRIOR to the outcome of
ANY rallies (e.g., A Broken friendly squad
within MSR is treated as BROKEN for other
friendly units that attempt to rally later in
the segment). Enemy units within MSR are
also applied prior to the rally of ANY unit,
friendly or enemy.
10.8.4 Surrendered Unit Morale Check—
During the END OF TURN SEGMENT, all
Surrendered units MUST attempt a limited
form of rally to improve their condition and/
or avoid elimination.
10.8.41 Eligible to ‘Improve’— Surren-
dered units in the MSR of any NON-Broken
friendly Personnel unit and/or non F- or M-
KILLed vehicle are marked as BROKEN upon
passing their End of Turn Segment morale
check (Exception: Leaders, crews and all 1
SP units Self Rally and are returned to nor-
mal if they pass, they are eliminated upon
failure as per 10.8.42).
10.8.42 Elimination—Eliminate all Surren-
dered units that fail their End of Turn Seg-
ment MC.
10.9 CAPTURING ENEMY UNITS
10.9.1 Any weapon unit or non-K-KILLed
vehicle may be ‘captured’ and used as if it
were a friendly piece of equipment.
10.9.2 Weapon units—L, M, and H weap-
ons are captured if they are alone in a loca-
tion when an enemy unit enters. They may
be picked up normally and subsequently
used by the new owners. There is no addi-
tional penalties applied for use of enemy
units.
10.9.3 Unarmed Trucks—Unarmed trucks
(always YELLOW vehicle counters with
white movement icons; armed trucks are
always the color of one nationality) are cap-
The turret marker placed on
Pzkw IIIg ‘A’ in the top example
is there to illustrate placement
oriented in the same direction
the AFV is. ‘A’ and ‘B’ are ex-
actly the same as regards sta-
tus. A turret marker is not
needed for this facing UNLESS
the AFV is Suppressed.
tured automatically if they are in a location
at the End of Turn Segment (only) with a
non-moving enemy AFV, APC, or non-bro-
ken Personnel unit. They may be used with-
out penalty once captured.
10.9.4 Bailed Out APCs/AFVs—Bailed Out
vehicles are captured automatically. The
procedure is the same as for weapon units
with the exception that only CREW Person-
nel units may capture these vehicles and
they may only be captured during the End
of Turn Segment. A captured vehicle may
fire its weapons normally (Exception: Un-
less F-KILLed). Captured vehicles may never
move or change VCA/TCA.
10.9.5 Armed Vehicles— Non-Bailed Out
armed vehicles may not be captured.
10.9.6 Towing Captured Units—Captured
H weapons and vehicles may be towed nor-
mally.
10.9.7 Victory Point Bonus—In those sce-
narios using victory points, captured units
are worth double the normal VP value.
10.10 CROSSFIRE
10.10.1 Creation and Effects—When two
consecutive (i.e., two impulses) enemy GF
or Grenade Attacks cross two directly op-
posing hexsides of the target unit’s location,
a ‘Crossfire’ exists. From the second attack
on, morale is reduced by TWO for all CA-
SUALTY morale checks for the remainder
of THAT turn in THAT location. HPT/OBA
attacks NEVER create a Crossfire. Mark
affected locations with two moved markers.
11.0 MOVEMENT
11.1 OVERVIEW—In any one turn, a player
may move some, all or none of his eligible
units during the Fire & Movement Segment.
Moving requires the use of an impulse in all
cases. Units may
use any amount, up
to the available
Movement Points
(MP) for the unit be-
ing moved.
11.1.1 Movement
Type—Before physi-
cally moving a piece
the owning player
announces what type
of movement is being
Each MP spent is deducted from the total
MP allowance of the unit. A unit may
NEVER spend more MP than this allowance.
The Terrain Chart (Table TC) specifies all
costs for entering hexes and crossing
hexsides.
11.1.21 End of Move— Once a player takes
his hand off of a moving unit this ends its
move and it may not be changed or reposi-
tioned. Place a Moved arrow on or behind it
(based on the type used).
11.1.3 Entering Enemy Hexes— Person-
nel may only enter an enemy-occupied lo-
cation during Infiltration or if all enemy units
within are marked as surrendered. Vehicles
may enter enemy-occupied hexes freely. (Ex-
ception: A TRUCK type vehicle may never
stop in one unless forced to by enemy fire).
Note: If a hex has more than one LOCA-
TION (e.g., BUILDING hexes with multiple
‘floors’, including rooftop and cellar locations)
Personnel units may enter non enemy-oc-
cupied locations within that hex even if one
or more other locations in the hex are en-
emy-occupied. If Hidden enemy units are
in a location about to be entered by a friendly
unit, place the Hidden unit(s) on-map and
all friendly PERSONNEL units must stop
their movement in the last hex location they
were in before entering the hidden unit’s
hex or location.
Example: A unit moving ‘downstairs’ from a
Level +20 to a Level +10 location in a build-
ing must stop in the +20 location if a Hidden
unit is in the +10 location. For Opportunity
Fire, the unit is considered to have moved
only in the first location, in this case, the +20
level location. Note: When Personnel are us-
ing Platoon movement, ONLY the entering
unit(s) must back up one MP expenditure; if
otherwise eligible the rest of the Platoon may
continue moving.
11.2 MOVEMENT ELIGIBILITY—Units not
already marked as Moved, Fired, M-KILL,
Bail Out, newly broken or Surrendered are
ELIGIBLE to move.
11.3 PERSONNEL MOVEMENT—Personnel
units do not have a movement allowance
printed on their counters. The MP provided
are the same for all Personnel units and
based on the movement type used (Excep-
tion: Leaders add 1 MP for their own move-

If ‘A’ chose to turn its turret ONE used (i.e., Crawling,

ment and any other units moving with them

hexspine during the Direct Fire Assault Movement or

in the same stack/Platoon, see 13.1.41).

Phase, a +1 HPN DRM would Running). Unless

11.3.1 Movement Types—Personnel may
be added to its to hit attempt. A stated otherwise,
use one of the following Movement types

one column shift LEFT would units are always con-

during a Fire & Movement Segment.

also apply to any Casualty Table sidered to be using

11.3.11 Crawling Movement—Allows Per-
fire using its coaxial machine- Assault movement.
sonnel to enter an accessible adjacent loca-

gun ONLY (it is in the turret) in 11.1.2 Movement In

tion, including the next higher or lower lo-

the same impulse. If the turret General —A moving

cation of the same hex. Units may never

was turned another hexspine, a unit expends MP for

Crawl more than ONE location within a hex
+2 HPN DRM (and two column each hex location it
(e.g., from Ground to +20 using Crawling
shift LEFT) would be applied. If enters (usually 1 or
as this represents a move of TWO levels).
this was a slow turret, a +2 HPN 2 MP). Crossing
Units may also Crawl one-hex-and-under an
DRM would apply for the FIRST hexside terrain (e.g.,
Emplacement providing Full cover, when
TCA change (and TWO column Wall; Hedge) adds an
entering an adjacent hex. A unit may not
shifts LEFT) and a +1 HPN DRM extra cost (usually 1
Crawl ‘down’ to the ground if ‘upstairs’ in a
for each additional hexspine MP) to the cost of the
Building, then to an adjacent hex or vice-
change that impulse. Note, a hit entered terrain
versa. Personnel using Crawling movement
from ‘C’ at ‘A’ that strikes the tur- (CoT). To move under
receive Stationary Cover and are considered
ret aspect is a FLANK hit. some emplacements
to use ALL their movement points in the act
of crawling (Note: a 1 MP expenditure may
also costs 1 M P.
be made to place a smoke grenade prior to

26
leaving its hex). Place a Moved arrow marker
on top of Personnel units using Crawling
movement. A Crawling Personnel unit may
use Assault Fire DURING its move, before
or after entering the new hex or location
using half its GF (and/or any carried L|MG
or L|ATR).
11.3.12 Assault movement—Allows a Per-
sonnel unit to use up to FOUR MP. Person-
nel using Assault movement receive Assault
cover. Place a Moved arrow marker behind
Personnel units using Assault movement.
An Assault moving Personnel unit may Fire
during its move, before OR after expending
a movement point, using half GF (for small
arms or any L MG/ATR ONLY). Medium and
Heavy weapons may NOT be fired by mov-
ing Personnel.
11.3.13 Running movement—Allows a Per-
sonnel unit to use up to SEVEN movement
points. Personnel using Running movement
are considered to be in Running cover for
Opportunity Fire ONLY, while the player is
moving the counter. Use Assault cover for
any fire at them later in the Fire & Move-
ment Segment. Place a Moved arrow marker
behind the unit(s) at the end of their move,
in the same manner as Assault moving Per-
sonnel. Personnel using Running movement
may not fire during the Fire & Movement
Segment. Personnel carrying Medium weap-
ons may not use Running movement.
11.3.131 Winded —A ‘Winded’ marker is
placed on Running Personnel. A Personnel
unit already marked as Winded may not use
Running movement (Exception: Courage).
Remove previously placed Winded markers
from units using an impulse or at the end
of the Fire & Movement Segment if they do
not move or fire.
11.3.132 Exhausted Infantry—Any Person-
nel unit marked as Winded applies a +1/
1L modifier to all fire it takes part in (only
ONE 1L shift is applied, not one PER
Winded Personnel unit in a Firegroup and
there is no modifier/shift AGAINST Winded
units). There is no effect on Melee.
11.3.2 Platoon Movement
11.3.21 Platoon Formation—A Movement
Impulse may also be used to create a ‘Pla-
toon’, to allow Personnel units in up to 3
accessible adjacent hexes to move simulta-
neously (using the same movement impulse).
To qualify for multi-hex Platoon movement,
at least one location must contain a LEADER
moving with the rest of the Platoon. In or-
der to take part, each hex needs to be adja-
cent to at least one of the other hexes (or
locations) in the Platoon at the start of the
Fire & Movement Segment and it must be
possible to move BETWEEN all hexes ‘con-
necting’ the Platoon.
Example: A Platoon cannot be formed be-
tween hexes separated by a Cliff. Players
should announce all units of the Platoon that
will be moving prior to moving ANY.
11.3.211 Same Stack Platoon—Personnel
units stacked in the SAME location may al-
ways move together as a Platoon. No leader
is needed.
11.3.22 Movement—When using multi-hex
Platoon Movement, all Personnel units must
use the same movement type (e.g., Assault;
Running; Crawling). Units using Platoon
Movement may not enter a hex in
violation of stacking at any time
during the move. If the Platoon
leader is unable to continue mov-
ing for any reason, (e.g., no MP left
due to a Wounded result; Broken;
pinned-down; Eliminated) all units
in the Platoon must immediately
stop moving unless there is another
leader moving in one of the Platoon The squad in the example above uses FIVE move-
hexes. When moving as a Platoon, ment points, one to enter the first hex, OPEN
all units expend MP simultaneously GROUND, and two MP to enter each SCRUB hex.
hex-by-hex (and location-by-location This move may ONLY be made by using Running
within hexes). Exception: All units movement since it exceeds the 4 MP available for
in the Platoon pay the SAME MP Assault movement. Mark the squad with a Winded
cost as the HIGHEST expenditure marker. If a leader accompanied the squad it COULD
of ANY Platoon unit. use Assault movement to make this move.
11.3.23 Cohesion—Once Platoon
movement is initiated, individual units may 11.3.33 Pick Up and Carry Routine—Units
not voluntarily ‘break off’ from the Platoon spend one MP to ‘pick up’ weapons in their
that turn. All units must move to the next location (or position, e.g., on top of or un-
adjacent hex or location together, and all der an emplacement) at any point during
units must stay adjacent to one another in movement. A unit that intends to use Crawl-
no more than three hexes. If any unit(s) of ing movement may pick up a weapon dur-
the Platoon are unable to continue moving, ing the same Fire & Movement Segment and
the remainder must use their next MP ex- still move one hex (i.e., it does not have to
penditures to ‘close up’ and qualify for multi- be carrying the weapon already to carry it
hex Platoon status again before any other to a new hex or location that turn).
movement is conducted (otherwise all im- 11.3.331 Transfer—Weapons may also be
mediately stop). transferred between units in the same lo-
11.3.24 With AFV/APC Vehicles—Person- cation if neither unit is moving or marked
nel using Platoon Movement may also com- as moved. The unit that ‘gives up’ the Weapon
bine with AFVs and APCs using Vehicle Pla- is still free to move. The transfer of a weapon
toon Movement or any type of vehicle in a from one unit to another is not considered
Convoy, creating one mixed unit Platoon. movement by BOTH units, just the one re-
All Personnel and vehicles must follow their ceiving the weapon, and costs 1 MP to the
Platoon (or Convoy) movement rules, and at receiving unit. The receiving unit IS treated
least ONE vehicle of the Platoon must be in as moving for the purposes of triggering
the same hex of at least ONE Personnel unit Opportunity Fire.
at all times, including ‘closing up’ to con- 11.3.332 Close Assault Segment—A unit
tinue to qualify as a Platoon if any vehicles may also pick up a weapon in its location
or Personnel are unable to move further. during Infiltration or after all Melee is com-
An Elite Tank Commander allows the Per- pleted in a hex without expending MP.
sonnel portion of the Platoon to continue 11.3.34 Pushing Guns —Heavy weapons
moving even if other Leaders aren’t present. may be moved, or ‘Pushed’ (Exception: Large
11.3.241 Cover Bonus—An AFV/APC pro- target type; they must be towed) during the
vides cover for any fire into or through its Fire & Movement Segment by their crew (or
hex, including during Platoon movement. manning Personnel unit). Heavy weapons
Trucks provide no cover to accompanying may not be moved during Infiltration and
Personnel. may never enter a Water or Swamp hex.
11.3.25 Leader Bonus—Any Platoon using For H weapons that have NO target size
non Crawling movement may add one MP modifier, treat the pushing unit as if using
to their available total if accompanied by a Running movement (i.e., mark as Winded;
Leader. apply Running cover for Opportunity Fire),
11.3.3 Carrying Light and Medium however, the gun may ONLY be pushed ONE
weapon —Weapons never move by them- hex. Personnel pushing a SMALL or VERY
selves. Each Personnel unit may carry a SMALL target size Heavy weapon may use
number of Light and Medium weapons equal Assault movement to Push it ONE hex, with-
to its Stacking Points value. A Light weapon out being marked as Winded, or Running
has a Stacking value of 1, a Medium of 2. movement to Push it TWO hexes (mark as
Any two 1 Stacking Point units may com- Winded), treating each movement type ac-
bine to carry a Medium weapon. cordingly.
11.3.31 Movement Restrictions —Light Example: A Personnel unit stacked with a
Weapons may be carried by any Personnel leader pushing a SMALL H weapon may not
unit using Crawling, Assault, or Running enter a hex that would cost SIX or more MP
movement. Personnel units may not use while using Assault movement as it only has
Running movement when carrying MEDIUM FIVE MP available (4 for Assault movement
weapons. + 1 bonus MP from the leader).
11.3.32 Assault Fire Restrictions—Me- 11.4 VEHICULAR MOVEMENT
dium and Heavy weapons may not fire us- 11.4.1 Movement Types —Each vehicle
ing Assault Fire. However, any remaining counter has a set of two Movement Point
Gunfire Factors (after deducting for the car- values printed on it in the following format:
ried Weapon) left to the carrying Personnel ‘Cross Country’ movement | Assault move-
unit may be used. ment. Assault movement is used to allow a
27
moving vehicle to conduct a variety of ac-
tions, e.g., load or unload Personnel for
transport; Overruns; move and fire during
the same impulse using Assault Fire. Cross
Country movement is used mainly for ve-
hicles wishing to travel from one place to
another as quickly as possible, eschewing
all fire and Overrun capabilities.
11.4.11 Markers—Place a Moved arrow on
top of a vehicle using assault movement and
behind a vehicle using cross-country move-
ment. When placing a Moved arrow behind
a moving vehicle, place the marker in the
hex just vacated by the unit.
11.4.2 Facing and Covered Arc—Each ve-
hicle has a Front, Rear, and Flank orienta-
tion determined by the hexspine to which
the front of the unit’s silhouette is pointed.
This is known as its ‘facing’, also referred
to as ‘Covered Arc’ (CA). A separate Cov-
ered Arc is used for any turret, and is known
as ‘Turret Covered Arc’ (TCA). The facing of
a VEHICLE, usually referred to when being
differentiated from its turret facing, is known
as ‘Vehicle Covered Arc’ (VCA). Note TCA
and VCA may be different from one other.
Both TCA and VCA must always face to-
wards one definite hexspine. When a tur -
reted vehicle has NO turret marker placed
on it, the turret is always considered to face
toward the FRONT VCA (unless stated to
be a rear -facing weapon, via an ‘R’ super -
script on the value on that counter).
11.4.3 Movement Direction Vehicles may
move FOR WARD into one of the two
hexsides it is facing. Vehicles may also use
REVERSE movement, to enter one of the
two hexsides to its rear. Reverse movement
costs DOUBLE the normal MP expenditure
(Exception: wheeled vehicles move in reverse
at 1.5 x CoT per hex). A Vehicle may use
both Forward and Reverse movement in the
same Fire & Movement Segment.
11.4.4 Pivoting—A Vehicle may change its
VCA/TCA to any hexspine within a hex dur-
ing a movement or fire impulse. During a
movement impulse, a unit may ‘pivot’ to face
its VCA to any other hexspine at the cost of
ONE MP per hexspine change. Pivoting is a
‘trigger’ for Opportunity Fire whether con-
ducted during a firing or movement impulse.
When using an impulse to fire, a unit may
also pivot one (including turret) or more
hexspines before firing. Note: The act of fir-
ing itself does not trigger Opportunity Fire;
pivoting does (including turret). When piv-
oting, the shot taken during THAT impulse
pays the appropriate HPT DRM or Casualty
Table shift. For fire using a subsequent
impulse (i.e., an additional ROF use for the
weapon or another weapon in the turret),
as long as the facing is not changed AGAIN,
the penalty for the pivot is not paid. Note: A
turret or vehicle may NOT be pivoted with-
out at least ONE weapon firing unless it is
moving (or marked as moved if all it does is
pivot).
Example: A fast turreted tank with a gun
and CMG in the turret pivots its turret one
hexspine during an impulse to fire at a squad,
firing its CMG. It pays the applicable ONE
LEFT shift. It may choose NOT to fire its main
armament during that impulse. Later during
the turn, it may fire its gun, and does NOT
pay for the pivot made during the earlier im-
pulse.
11.4.5 Continued Movement—A vehicle
marked as Moved may opt to ‘continue’
moving during the marker removal portion
of the End of Turn Segment. Keep the ex-
isting Moved marker on or behind the ve-
hicle (and treat it as a moving target during
the next Fire & Movement Segment). Dur-
ing the next Fire & Movement Segment, so-
marked vehicles must use a movement im-
pulse, but may move using ANY movement
type. Vehicles using Continued Movement
may not use a fire impulse during the sub-
sequent Fire & Movement Segment. They
may Assault Fire if using Assault movement.
They may not take part in a Gun Duel nor
may they use Opportunity Fire.
11.4.51 Stalling—The owning player is free
to use MORE than the necessary MP for a
VEHICLE to enter a location.
11.4.52 Minimum Move—In the rare event
a vehicle lacks the needed MP to enter an
adjacent hex but is OTHERWISE eligible to
enter, a one-hex ‘minimum move’ is allowed
as its only movement. A vehicle may NEVER
fire a weapon nor conduct an Overrun when
using a minimum move (but it may be con-
sidered Assault Movement if that type of
movement is called for, e.g., when towing).
11.4.6 Convoy Movement—When allowed
to by SSR, vehicles may set up or enter
play using ‘Convoy Movement.’ Convoy ve-
hicles must set up or enter play in adjacent
hexes, with no more than ONE vehicle per
hex. A Convoy moves in the same manner
as a Platoon, remaining adjacent, never ex-
ceeding one vehicle per hex and using As-
sault movement (only) of the SLOWEST ve-
hicle in the Convoy.
11.4.61 Off-road Movement—Convoys are
not required to remain on Roads.
11.4.62 Disbanding—No Vehicle may move
independent of the Convoy, including the
voluntary loading or unloading of transported
Personnel or Towed weapons, until at least
one unit in the Convoy is fired on or has a
LOS (within Spotting Range when the Spot-
ting Table is in use) to a non FOW-side en-
emy unit. Once a Convoy disbands, its ve-
hicles may remain in Convoy or may move
normally. In the event the Convoy has al-
ready begun moving when first disbanded,
the owning player may continue to move ONE
eligible vehicle during the movement impulse
the Convoy disbanded. Make note of MP
already expended; the remaining vehicles
of the Convoy may be moved, using one
movement impulse for each, during subse-
quent impulses that turn.
11.4.63 Continued Movement—All units in
the Convoy MUST use Continued Movement
between turns until the Convoy is eligible
to move independently.
11.4.7 AFV/APC Platoon Movement—A
group of 2-5 adjacent Russian, American,
Italian, Japanese, or German or 2-3 British
or French AFVs/APCs (not trucks) may
move together as a multi-unit ‘Platoon’. This
form of Platoon movement represents the
use of ONE Movement Impulse during the
Fire & Movement Segment. The Platoon (or
‘Troop’ for British AFVs) must use the MP
allowance of the slowest vehicle in the Pla-
28
toon at all times. A Platoon may use Contin-
ued movement.
11.4.71 Starting Limitations—Platoons are
created at the beginning of each Fire &
Movement Segment by an appropriate num-
ber of adjacent vehicles. Each must be ad-
jacent at all times during that Fire & Move-
ment Segment. If one or more of the AFVs
in the Platoon are unable to continue move-
ment (e.g., due to M-KILL, K-KILL, or F-
KILL results) all remaining AFVs in the Pla-
toon may continue moving. Any ‘gap’ be-
tween remaining AFVs must be ‘closed up’
by immediate movement to bring them ad-
jacent again. No AFV may voluntarily ‘break
off’ from a Platoon once using Platoon Move-
ment in a Fire & Movement Segment (Ex-
ception: An F-KILLed AFV is no longer re-
stricted by the AFVs in the Platoon and stops
immediately; it will have to exit normally,
beginning with the next available movement
opportunity, i.e., the following turn).
11.4.72 Overrun and Fire Restrictions—
AFVs using Platoon Movement may conduct
overruns and use Assault Fire, and they may
conduct Overruns and use Assault Fire at
different times and at different targets dur-
ing the course of moving as a Platoon. Each
AFV is marked individually after it fires.
11.4.73 MP Expenditure—When moving as
a Platoon, all AFVs expend MP simulta-
neously, hex by hex, paying the same cost
as the highest expenditure of any AFV in
the Platoon for any location entered and
action conducted.
Example: One AFV may spend one MP to
enter a new hex while another spends one
MP to change VCA, at the same time, at a
cost of ONE Movement Point for the Platoon.
11.5 TOWING AND TRANSPORTING PER-
SONNEL
11.5.1 Carrying Capacity—Vehicles that are
used primarily for TRANSPOR T have a maxi-
mum capacity in Stacking Points listed on
their counters in the following format: [Cover
State] | [Stacking Points]. Other vehicles
(without printed transport capacity) may also
transport Personnel and ALL have a maxi-
mum of THREE Stacking Points. Trans-
ported or Towed units are referred to as
‘passengers’ (for those that ride IN a vehicle)
and ‘riders’ for those that ride on (e.g., a
tank) a vehicle.
11.5.11 Riding IN Transport—Personnel
ride IN vehicles that have S (usually trucks)
or G-F (usually APC) printed on them. They
receive Stationary, Good, or Full cover
states.
11.5.12 Riding ON Transport—Personnel
ride ON vehicles that lack any S, G, or F
notation (usually tanks).
11.5.13 Transporting Leaders and L/M
Weapons—Vehicles may also carry (i.e., not
tow) leaders as well as LIGHT and MEDIUM
weapons. These are carried within the
vehicle’s listed Carrying Capacity. However,
the Carrying Capacity of a vehicle is applied
SEPARATELY for Personnel and weapons/
leaders.
Example: A vehicle capable of Carrying
THREE Stacking Points may ALSO carry three
‘L’ weapons AND three leaders OR one ‘M’
weapon, one ‘L’ weapon and three leaders.
11.5.2 Towing capacity-Vehicles may also
TOW Heavy weapons. Note H weapons may
also be pushed by Personnel (Exception:
LARGE target type H weapons may only
move via towing). The Tow | Carry Person-
nel Table lists the ability of each vehicle type
to carry personnel and tow an H weapon.
Note: An H weapon’s crew is counted to-
wards Personnel carrying limits when trans-
ported. Vehicles towing other vehicles may
only use Assault movement. Units towing
Heavy weapons may use Cross Country
movement ONLY when moving along a Road.
11.5.21 Towing Vehicles—Vehicular units
may hook up to tow another vehicle, regard-
less of their apparent facing in respect to
the unit being towed. Once hooked up, turn
the towed vehicle counter so the VCA of the
vehicle being towed matches that of the tow-
ing vehicle and place it on top of the towing
vehicle. There is no cost for this change in
VCA.
11.5.22 Towing Restrictions —A vehicle
may never tow a ‘larger’ (measured by tar-
get size modifier) vehicle. Exception: Wheeled
vehicles may tow larger WHEELED vehicles
when moving along a Road. Otherwise,
Wheeled vehicles may only tow normal (no
target size modifier) or SMALL tracked or
half-track vehicles, in addition to other non-
wheeled vehicles that do not exceed the size
of the towing vehicle.
11.5.3 Loading and Unloading Procedures
Loading and Unloading procedures are the
same for Passengers, Riders, H weapons
and Towed Vehicles.
11.5.31 Loading—To Load a Passenger, the
transporting Vehicle and its Passenger must
be in the same hex Location. The transport-
ing Vehicle must use Assault movement
during the turn it wishes to ‘pick up’ a Pas-
senger; it is then placed on top of the trans-
porting Vehicle counter. No movement is
allowed in the turn of Loading by the trans-
porting Ve h i c l e once it enters the
Passenger’s location.
11.5.32 Unloading—Place Unloaded units
under the transporting Vehicle. Only Ve-
hicles using Assault movement may willingly
Unload Passengers. No movement is allowed
German squad ‘15’ and Italian squad ‘1’ may
form a same-hex firegroup because German
leader ‘7’ is eligible to lead the Firegroup (other-
wise, German and Italian units may not form
Firegroups).
The Axis player may instead opt to use the
1|1|7 ‘7’ to form a Firegroup with Sd 250 ‘B’ and
6|5|7 ‘9’ (or 2|3|8 ‘8’, noting the crew can only
use its 2 GF in the firegroup since a mortar
requires the HPT to fire and may not be part of
a Firegroup) to fire at any ONE of the British
squads. Squad ‘9’ is reduced by 1 GF for car-
rying the MG 34, but the MG may add its 5 GF to
the attack of the firegroup. The Sd 250 half-
track IS allowed to firegroup with Personnel.
The Axis player may also choose to make a
series of separate attacks instead of one large
firegroup. Squad ‘10’ and ATR ‘C’ may fire at
British squad ‘21’, OR squad 3 using 6 GF (5 +
1). If the German player chose to fire at British squad ‘13’, the attack would fire using 3 GF due to the range of SIX hexes, which reduces the printed
GF by HALF (6 MINUS 1 HALVED = 2.5 [round fractions down]); the ATR is still within its range of 16 and provides 1 GF. If any unit fires on British
squad ‘13’ it may ‘drop’ into FULL cover under the hedgehog and avoid the attack. The firing unit(s) is still marked as fired.
in the turn of Unloading by the transport-
ing Vehicle once it Unloads its Passenger. A
Heavy weapon can be Unloaded with any
CA.
11.5.4 Broken
Any Personnel unit that is Broken or Sur -
renders when attempting to load or hook a
Heavy weapon up for towing may not do so
and remains in the hex. Any Personnel unit
that fails a morale check while being trans-
ported must drop into Full cover in the ve-
hicle if available (i.e., denoted by an ‘F’) or
unload in the hex immediately. Place an FC
marker on Personnel units that drop into ‘F’
vehicle cover. Vehicles carrying Broken or
Surrendered Personnel are not restricted
from moving closer to enemy units.
11.5.5 Infiltration
Personnel may unload from a vehicle into
the ground level of their OWN hex as a form
of Infiltration during the Close Assault Seg-
ment of the same turn, even if the vehicle
used Cross Country Movement that turn.
They may NOT unload and Infiltrate out of
their hex or into a non ground level location
of their hex.
11.5.6 Transport and Passenger Fire and
Movement Restrictions
Passengers may NOT fire or move during
the Fire & Movement Segment they are
loaded/unloaded. Towed Heavy weapons
may never fire while being Towed. Person-
nel units and Light weapons may use direct
fire when in GOOD cover in half-tracks.
Vehicles previously carrying or towing are
still eligible to fire using Assault Fire during
the Fire & Movement Segment they load/
unload.
11.5.7 Passengers as Targets
Small arms attacks against their vehicle also
attack Passengers, noting their cover state,
independent of their transport vehicle, as
follows.
11.5.71 In APC—Personnel units in ‘G-F’
vehicles are considered in Good cover, but
may drop into Full cover (in the same man-
ner as a Hedgehog) when fired on. Mark
them with an ‘FC” marker. Personnel already
marked as ‘FC’ when riding in any eligible
29
APC are not affected by small arms attacks
against their transporting vehicle. Excep-
tion: Grenade Attacks affect them normally
even when marked ‘FC’.
11.5.72 In Truck Type Vehicle—Person-
nel in ‘S’ vehicles are in Stationary cover.
11.5.73 On AFV—Units riding on AFVs re-
ceive Assault cover.
11.5.74 Towed Heavy weapons —Towed
Heavy weapons must be targeted separately
for hits using the HPT, using any appropri-
ate modifiers. They are not fired on as part
of an attack against the towing vehicle or
its passengers.
11.5.8 Passengers’ Fate
See 12.5.82 for procedures on determining
the fate of Passengers when their vehicle is
attacked.
11.5.9 Riding ON Automatic Unload
Whenever an AFV is hit by an AP hit from a
weapon of a Gun Size of 20 (i.e., 20mm) or
larger, any Personnel riding ON the AFV
must immediately suffer the specified at-
tack and then immediately unload. Person-
nel units riding on an AFV also unload im-
mediately when it fires any non-AAMG
weapon. This unloading does not require
use of a movement impulse but IS consid-
ered using Running movement (mark accord-
ingly) for the unloading unit(s). They are oth-
erwise treated normally as units that used
Running movement (e.g., may Infiltrate that
turn).
12.0 COMBAT
12.1 OUTLINE
While complex in appearance, vehicles, Per-
sonnel, guns, and aircraft use intuitive, com-
mon routines to conduct ATS battles. Com-
bat consists of the following categories:
a) Direct Fire—The firing unit can see the
target unit (see 12.5).
b) Indirect Fire—The firing unit is off-board
artillery or on-board guns that cannot (or
do not need to) see the target unit to fire at
it (see 12.11).
c) Overrun—An AFV enters an enemy loca-
tion (see 12.14).
d) Close Assault —Personnel units make
Grenade Attacks or enter enemy locations
to conduct Melee (see 12.15).
e) Aircraft Attacks—Aircraft attack ground
units, and anti-aircraft units attack aircraft
(see 12.16).
12.2 ATTACK CLASSIFICATION
All on-board units are classified as either
small arms or guns.
12.2.1 Small Arms
The term ‘small arms’ refers to the values
for Gunfire Factors (GF) printed on Person-
nel, Light machine-guns (L|MG), Medium
machine-guns (M|MG) and Light anti-tank
rifles (L|ATR). Many vehicles and aircraft
are also equipped with machine-guns, and
have GF values printed on their counters.
Flamethrowers, while different in use from
small arms, also have a GF value.
12.2.2 Guns
The term ‘Gun’ refers to all weapons that
must obtain a hit on the HPT before affect-
ing a target. Guns always have a Gun Size
(representing their bore in millimeters, e.g.,
‘75’ depicts a 75mm gun) and Gun Value (A-
D) instead of a GF value on their counters.
Vehicular -mounted main armament (MA)
and H weapons are always Guns (Excep-
tions: when a vehicle’s MA is an MG). Rules
that apply to Guns also refer to L and M
weapons such as M|MG and L|AT when
using their own HPTs (found directly under
the main HPT).
12.3 ELIGIBLE ATTACKERS
Whether a unit is an eligible attacker de-
pends on the type of unit and the type of
attack it will use.
12.3.1 Direct Fire Attackers
Any on-map unit, except a mortar, may use
Direct Fire if it:
a) Has an LOS to the target;
b) Is within Spotting Range of the target (if
using Spotting);
c) Is not Broken or Surrendered;
d) Has not moved except by Crawling or
Assault move;
e) Is not F-KILLed; and
f) It has not used up its entire Rate-of-Fire
(ROF).
Example: A gun has a ROF of ‘2’ (and is not
using a BOT marker). It is marked as Fired to
show it fired once. It still has one ‘shot’ left,
and may fire again. Once it fires twice, no fire
opportunities remain for that turn.
12.3.2 Indirect Fire Attackers
On-board mortars (MTR), howitzers (HOW),
and off-board artillery batteries use Indi-
rect Fire if the manning crew or an eligible
FO or spotter:
a) Has an LOS to the target hex;
b) Is within Spotting Range of the target (if
using Spotting);
c) Is otherwise eligible to fire, and is not
moving.
12.3.3 Overrun Attackers
An AFV/Armed APC/Armed Truck may con-
duct an Overrun if it:
a) Is eligible to move;
b) May enter the overrun hex (note that en-
tering terrain that entails a check on the
Immobilization Table may render the vehicle
unable to move, and thus unable to make
an Overrun attack in the hex it just entered);
c) Has enough Assault MP to enter and
spend 1 MP per enemy unit being Overrun.
12.3.4 Close Assault Attackers
Eligible Personnel units may choose ONE
of two actions during the Close Assault Seg-
ment:
a) Grenade Attack—A Personnel unit may
make a Grenade Attack if it is not Broken
or Surrendered, and is not marked as Fired;
b) Infiltration—Any Personnel unit may use
Infiltration if not Broken or Surrendered.
12.4 ELIGIBLE TARGETS
Whether a unit is an eligible target depends
on the type of unit and the type of attack.
All Personnel (except surrendered units),
vehicles, and weapons are eligible targets.
There are five exceptions:
a) Armor Piercing (AP)—Guns capable of
firing AP ammunition may use it to attack
Personnel units in bunkers, H weapons, and
vehicles (this ammunition limitation is indi-
cated by a white circle or square behind
the unit’s Gun Size, and on the available
ammunition portion of an AFV Card and the
Gun & Mortar Ammo Table for each nation-
ality).
b) Shaped Charge Weapons (SCW)/L|AT—
In addition to H weapons and vehicles, SCW
may attack Personnel in non rooftop build-
ing locations, under Bunker/Cave Dugout
markers or behind Wall (including High Wall)
hexsides (Exception: Personnel denied wall
cover, see 7.22).
c) Units in Full cover—These are only eli-
gible targets for Indirect Fire, direct firing
guns using the HPT (HE/FRAG is halved
against Full cover units), and adjacent and
same-hex attackers (see 12.5.661 for ex-
ceptions).
d) Air Attacks—Aircraft may not attack tar -
gets in building or woods hexes if all six
adjacent hexes are also Woods or building
hexes (Exception: If the target hex is an
Open Roofed building; also see 12.16.2).
e) AA Fire—Only anti-aircraft (AA) guns, anti-
aircraft machine-guns (AAMG), and medium
machine-guns (M|MG) may attack aircraft.
They may do so only from hexes aircraft
can attack as per ‘d’ above.
12.4.1 Non-Eligible Targets—Units may not
fire into locations containing friendly units,
nor those containing surrendered enemy
units, unless the target location also con-
tains at least one non-surrendered enemy
unit.
12.4.2 Direct Fire Targets
Small Arms attack all eligible units in a lo-
cation. Guns firing at a vehicle do not affect
other units in the vehicle’s location, except
its Passengers. Guns firing HE at Person-
nel units do not affect any vehicles in the
target location.
12.4.3 Indirect Fire Targets
Indirect Fire and aircraft bombs attack ev-
ery location in a hex.
Example: Indirect Fire hits a hex that has a
building with two levels. Make ONE roll on
the Casualty Table for EACH level and ap-
ply any resulting casualties normally for each
roll.
12.4.4 Overrun Targets
The only eligible targets for overrun are
Personnel units, H weapons and for FULLY
TRACKED AFVs, Truck type vehicles. The
vehicle must expend 1 MP for each unit it
overruns, counting an H weapon and its crew
30
as ONE unit. The attacker chooses which
units he overruns if he does not (or cannot)
expend Assault MP to overrun all eligible
targets in a location.
12.4.5 Close Assault
Grenade and Melee attacks affect all eligible
Personnel units or any ONE vehicle in a lo-
cation.
12.5 DIRECT FIRE ATTACK ROUTINES
Use the following routines to conduct a Di-
rect Fire attack.
12.5.1 Attack Routine for Small Arms
a) Determine the range from the firing unit
hex to the target hex (see 12.5.3);
b) Determine GF of each attacking unit,
modified by any applicable conditions, and
total all GF (see 12.5.4 and 12.5.5);
c) Use the Cover State Effects Table to de-
termine applicable column shifts for each
unit in the target location (see 12.5.6);
d) Determine the final column to use on the
Casualty Table for each target unit, roll a
die, and cross-reference the result on the
appropriate column (see 12.5.7);
e) Apply casualties among ALL Personnel
units in the targeted location, INCLUDING
Passengers (exception: do not apply casu-
alties against those passengers that are not
eligible to be targeted by Small Arms; i.e.,
those in FULL cover; the fate of these units
depends on the effects [if any] of the attack
against their vehicle, usually a Half-track),
riders (i.e., Personnel units being trans-
ported on a vehicle [usually a tank or SP
Gun] that does not provide GOOD or FULL
cover), and crews manning H weapons (see
12.5.9);
f) For vehicles and H weapons in the target
location, use the Small Arms (GF) vs. Ve-
hicles and H Weapons Table (C6) to see if
the Casualty Table roll has any effect on
these units (see 12.5.8);
g) Place a Collateral Fire (‘C’) marker in any
hex that receives at least SIX NON
FLAMETHROWER Gunfire Factors (see
12.5.10).
12.5.2 Attack Routine for Guns
Guns make attacks using a two-step rou-
tine: first determine if the gun hits the tar-
get, and then determine the hit’s effect on
the target.
12.5.21 Using the HPT—Use the following
routine to determine if a gun hits a target.
a) Determine the range from the firing unit
hex to the target hex (see 12.5.3);
b) Determine the Hit Probability Number
(HPN) (see 12.5.11);
c) Determine applicable HPT DRM;
d) Roll a die, and apply any HPT DRM to
the die roll;
e) If the DRM-modified die roll is less than
or equal to the HPN, the attack hits the tar-
get; if greater, the attack missed and has
no effect.
12.5.22 Gun Attacks vs. Personnel—After
obtaining a hit on a Personnel target, use
the following routine:
a) Determine the appropriate column to use
on the Casualty Table for the Gun’s HE
equivalency (see 12.5.7);
b) Apply column shifts for Airbursts if in
applicable terrain (see also Time Fuzed HE,
14.11);
c) Determine the final column to use on the
Casualty Table for each target unit, roll a
die, and cross-reference the result on the
appropriate column;
d) Apply Casualties to Personnel units in
the target location, followed by the required
morale check (see 12.5.9).
e) Place a Collateral Fire (‘C’) marker in any
location that is attacked by SIX FRAG fac-
tors or more on the Casualty Table (see
12.5.10).
12.5.23 Gun Attacks vs. Vehicles—After
obtaining a hit on a vehicle target, use the
following routine:
a) Make a roll on the Hit Location Table (B)
to determine the target aspect struck (see
12.5.12);
b) Determine the firing weapon’s Penetra-
tion (PEN) value using the Gun Penetration
Values Table for that nationality (repeated
on each AFV Card) and the target vehicle’s
Armor Factor (AF), and calculate the AF to
PEN Differential (DIFF);
c) Make a die roll on the appropriate DIFF
column of the K-KILL Table (C1) (see
12.5.13);
d) Apply the result of the die roll using the
K-KILL Table;
e) Resolve effects on passengers in accor -
dance with 12.5.82;
f) Make a roll on the Suppression Table if
applicable (see 12.5.17).
12.5.24 Gun Attacks/L|AT vs. H Weap-
ons—After obtaining a hit on an H weapon,
use the following routine:
a) Guns greater than 20mm automatically
eliminate any H weapon they hit;
b) Resolve attacks by L|AT, ATR, and guns
≤ 20mm on Table C4 (see 12.10.5);
c) If the attack F-Kills or eliminates the H
weapon, attack any manning crew on the
Casualty Table using the AP column (4 GF)
if firing AP or the column for the HE equiva-
lent (exception: use the 1 GF column for
L|ATRs); if the attack made a roll on Table
C4, use the same die roll on the Casualty
Table.
12.5.3 Range and LOS
Determine the range by counting the num-
ber of hexes in the shortest contiguous path
from the firing unit to the target hex. Do
not include the firing unit’s hex, but include
the target unit’s hex. When firing at a ve-
hicle that is in the same hex or location as
the firing unit, the range is zero. Determine
if there is an LOS between the firing unit
and its intended target. If the LOS is found
to be blocked after declaring intent to fire,
do not mark the firing unit as fired. The
firing player is considered to have ‘passed’,
i.e., his impulse is lost and reverts to the
opponent. The units he wished to fire are
free to fire or move during a later impulse if
otherwise eligible (e.g., have not been de-
stroyed in the interim).
12.5.31 Range Limits—Personnel and MG
have an effective range printed on their
counters, their maximum range being double
this value. Some other weapons (e.g., L|AT
and L|ATR) have a maximum range printed
on their counters. Mortars have a ‘#mini-
mum-maximum’ range printed on their
counters. Other guns do not have a maxi-
mum or minimum range limit. They may fire
at any range, unless the cumulative HPN is
ZERO or less due to HPT DRM (on the HPT
‘-’ denotes a zero per -cent chance of obtain-
ing a hit). A die roll is NOT made on the
HPT in this case.
12.5.4 Firegroups
Two or more units may combine their GF to
attack the same target with small arms fire
(i.e., the HPT is never used in a Firegroup).
This combination of units is known as a
Firegroup. A Firegroup may attack only one
location. AFVs may not form Firegroups with
other units, but all of an AFVs MG (includ-
ing a gun using semi-automatic fire) may
combine their GF to form a one unit
‘Firegroup’.
12.5.41 Eligibility—All units in a Firegroup
must be in the same location, or in adjacent
accessible locations. Axis units of different
nationalities may form a Firegroup together
only if a German leader is part of the
Firegroup (Exception: Finnish leaders may
form Firegroups with German Personnel).
Allied units may form Firegroups together
freely.
12.5.42 Multi-Hex F i r e g r o u p s —A
Firegroup may be made of a maximum of
THREE contiguous hexes and each hex
must contain at least one unit that is part of
the Firegroup. Each location containing at
least one unit of the Firegroup must be ad-
jacent and accessible to at least one other
location containing another unit of the
Firegroup.
12.5.421 Leadership—There must be a non-
Broken/Surrendered friendly leader in at
least one hex of a multi-hex Firegroup. At
least one unit in each location must be eli-
gible to fire and take part in the Firegroup
(Exception: A leader may be alone in a hex;
instead of firing, he may provide his lead-
ership shift to the Firegroup’s attack). Ap-
ply the highest number of left shifts for
Obscuring terrain along the LOS of any
unit(s) in the Firegroup.
12.5.43 Impulse Use —A Firegroup uses
ONE impulse for all units and weapons in
the Firegroup to fire once (or use one ROF).
Units in the same location that wish to fire
at the same target hex need NOT utilize a
Firegroup. Same location units may com-
bine freely, using separate fire impulses.
12.5.44 Leaders and Firegroups —One
friendly leader (only) may apply its leader-
ship to a Firegroup attack. A leader must
have a LOS to the target and be otherwise
eligible to fire; he may not use his GF or
fire/crew a weapon. Additional leader units
provide no additional benefit, but they may
add their printed GF or that of any weap-
ons they fire to the Firegroup’s attack.
12.5.441 Leader Effects —Once a leader
applies its shift/DRM to any unit in a
Firegroup it may continue to modify any fire
later in the SAME segment, by units that
were part of the Firegroup AND any eligible
weapons they carry. It may not lead any
additional units that were not part of the
original Firegroup and must remain other-
wise eligible to provide leadership (e.g., it
may not be Broken in the interim).
Example: An NCO and two squads, each car-
rying an L|MG, form a Firegroup to fire dur-
ing an impulse. The owning player decides
to fire one squad and TWO L|MG ONLY, dur-
31
ing the fire impulse. The leader’s shift is ap-
plied to this attack. Later in the same seg-
ment the second squad fires an L|AT it is
carrying. Its also receives an HPT DRM from
the leader. If instead the second squad
wished to form a NEW Firegroup with an-
other, third squad adjacent to it, the original
leader could NOT be part of (or form) that
new Firegroup. However, the squad COULD
still fire, including as part of a Firegroup, if
another leader was available.
12.5.442 Leader-Only Firegroups—Two or
more leaders may form a Firegroup by them-
selves. If another leader (in addition to the
two required to form a Firegroup) provides
leadership (i.e., does not contribute any GF
or fire a weapon), the Firegroup receives
applicable leadership column shifts.
12.5.5 Modifications to Small Arms
The following rules describe conditions that
modify Gunfire Factors.
12.5.51 GF Reduction—A Personnel unit
subtracts inherent GF equal to the SP of
CARRIED L and M weapons (even if the
weapon is not fired, the reduction is made
for all carried weapons). To fire, an M
weapon must be manned by at least 2 SP of
Personnel (e.g., two leaders; a crew; a
squad). Reductions for weapons are made
before any modifications for Long Range and
Assault Fire. There is no penalty for carry-
ing weapons during Melee, but there is for
Grenade attacks (see 12.15.21). A Person-
nel unit may not fire its printed GF or any L
or M weapons if crewing a HEAVY weapon.
12.5.52 Long Range Fire—Personnel Gun-
fire Factors, L|MG, M|MG, and vehicular-
mounted MG may fire at a range greater
than their printed range. This is known as
Long Range Fire. They may fire at half GF
(total all of the attack’s GF, and then divide
in half) for hexes beyond normal range and
up to double the printed range (see 15.2.45
for the range of vehicular -mounted MGs).
Other weapons may NOT fire beyond the
maximum range printed on their counter,
designated by a number following a ‘#’ on
L|ATR, L|AT. L|MTR, M|MTR, and L|FT
counters (and vehicles equipped with these
weapons).
12.5.53 Assault Fire—Firing during move-
ment is known as Assault Fire. Personnel
using Crawling or Assault movement may
fire their Gunfire Factors and any carried L
weapons while in the act of moving. Vehicles
using Assault movement may also fire their
weapons. GF are halved during Assault Fire
(calculated before applying any reduction for
Long Range Fire). Personnel firing L|AT and
L|ATR on the HPT using Assault Fire must
apply a +3 HPT DRM. Vehicles must apply
a +5 HPT DRM.
12.5.6 Cover States
Cover State represents vulnerability to an
attack. Some cover states affect both Per -
sonnel and vehicles. Others affect only Per -
sonnel.
12.5.61 Cover State Modifiers—Cover state
modifies EITHER :
a) The column used on the Casualty Table;
or
b) The chance of obtaining a hit on the Hit
Probability Table (HPT).
Exception: Apply the modifier for certain
states (e.g., Air Bursts) only on the Casu-
alty Table after obtaining a hit.
12.5.62 Cover State Effects Table (F1)
Table F1 provides Casualty Table column
shifts and HPT DRM for different cover
states. On the HPT, each ‘L’ shift equals a
+1 modifier to the die roll; each ‘R’ shift
equals a -1 modifier.
Example: A unit in Good cover benefits from
a shift of ‘1L’. For an attack using the ‘14’
column on the Casualty Table, resolve the
fire one column to the left, in the ‘10’ column.
If the attack instead requires a roll on the
HPT to obtain a hit, apply a +1 DRM to the
HPN. If a hit results, do not apply a column
shift to the subsequent Casualty Table roll.
12.5.621 Table Usage—Refer to Table F1
to obtain a cover state’s applicable column
shifts and HPT DRM.
a) Cover states denoted with a ‘P’ only apply
to Personnel units;
b) Apply all applicable shifts cumulatively,
but apply only one shift for hex terrain,
hexside terrain, and emplacements. Excep-
tion: AFVs/APCs and non-burning wreck
markers provide Good cover in the ground
level of their hex, but only if no other ter-
rain in the hex provides a cover DRM/shift
(see 6.2.71).
Example: A Personnel unit using Running
movement is fired on while in Good cover.
The modifiers are –2/2R for Running and
+1/1L for Good cover, the combination of
which results in –1/1R.
12.5.63 Personnel Movement—The follow-
ing cover states only apply to Personnel
units:
12.5.631 Stationary—A Personnel unit that
is Crawling, not moving, or transported by
a Vehicle affording S cover to Passengers is
in a Stationary cover, which provides a modi-
fier of zero (no shift or DRM).
12.5.632 Assault—Personnel units using
Assault movement are in Assault cover,
which provides a -1/1R modifier. Note: A
Personnel unit riding on an AFV is in As-
sault cover; guns firing HE on the HPT may
not separately target such units. Any hit by
HE on the AFV also affects riding Person-
nel units, using the Casualty Table for the
latter AND applying a 1R shift INSTEAD of
a -1 HPT DRM in this special case.
12.5.633 Running—Personnel units using
Running movement are in Running cover,
but only when targeted by Opportunity Fire.
Personnel units pushing H weapons may
also be considered to be in Running cover
(see 11.3.34). Running cover provides a -
2/2R modifier. Once a Running unit com-
pletes its movement impulse, it receives
assault cover for the purposes of modifiers
and being targeted, until the end of the turn.
12.5.64 Cover & Terrain—The terrain rules
and Terrain Chart provide the cover state
for each terrain type. Emplacements may
supersede the cover state of terrain for units
in or on them. The use of the term “appli-
cable terrain” specifies cover provided by
terrain and emplacements.
12.5.641 Good Cover—Provides a +1/1L
modifier;
12.5.642 Improved Cover—Provides a +2/
2L modifier;
12.5.643 Masonry Cover—Provides a +3/
3L modifier;
12.5.644 Full Cover —Provides a +3/3L
modifier (there are restrictions on firing at
units in Full cover; see 12.5.661).
12.5.65 Other Cover Modifiers
Other factors affect cover state. In addition
to those listed below, there are modifiers
listed below the HPT that refer only to fire
on that table (and how Casualty Table shifts
are applied as HPT DRM).
12.5.651 Obscuring—Some terrain types
disrupt fire through them. (e.g., Rock
Strewn terrain; Crops). Each obscuring ter-
rain type (or in some cases the hex contain-
ing the terrain or any hexside touched, as
per the rules for individual terrain types)
along an LOS provides a +1/1L modifier.
12.5.652 Smoke—If a unit fires into, out
of, exactly along a hexside, or through a
hex with smoke in it, apply a +4/4L modi-
fier. Burning wrecks, flame markers, and
smoke markers create smoke. Multiple
sources of smoke in the same hex do not
increase the smoke modifier.
12.5.653 Leader directed—Eligible attacks
receive a –1/1R modifier if directed by an
NCO and –2/2R if directed by an Officer.
Commissars do not ‘direct’ attacks (i.e., they
provide no benefit).
12.5.654 Airbursts—Any Personnel unit in
Airburst terrain has its Cover treated as ‘1R’
on the Casualty Table for all mortar/OBA/
aircraft bomb/Indirect fire attacks AFTER
a hit is obtained on the HPT. The normal 1L
Casualty Table shift is NOT applied. Note:
HPT DRM ARE APPLIED normally. Airbursts
do not provide a 1R shift against Personnel
units in Full Cover in APCs (marked with ‘F’
on their counter), Bunkers, Blockhouses or
Buildings.
12.5.655 Cushion—An HE attack against
Personnel in cushioning terrain receives a
1L modifier. Cushion does not produce HPT
DRM; it only provides a column shift on the
Casualty Table after a hit is obtained by HE
or aircraft bombs.
12.5.656 Fog of War—Fire at the following
units receives a +2/2L modifier:
a) An H weapon with its FOW side up;
b) The original manning crew under an H
weapon with its FOW side up;
c) A vehicle with its FOW side up (noting
that it must be non-moving, since moving
within an enemy LOS [or a moving enemy
unit moves within LOS and Spotting Range]
will flip a vehicle to its non-FOW side in all
cases).
12.5.66 Full Cover—A unit under a Full
Cover (FC) marker or eligible Emplacement
is in Full cover.
12.5.661 Firing at Units in Full Cover—
Units marked as ‘FC’ or in FULL cover un-
der an emplacement are only eligible tar -
gets for Indirect Fire, direct-fire using the
HPT, and fire from adjacent hexes (e.g., GF;
Grenade attacks). A unit in FC in a non-
emplacement may be attacked using Melee
normally. Units need not move UNDER an
emplacement providing FULL cover to ini-
tiate Melee with enemy units stacked be-
neath. See the rules for each emplacement
type for restrictions on Melee.
12.5.6611 Direct Fire—When using direct
fire, apply a +3 HPT DRM. FRAG factors
are HALVED on the Casualty Table for any
hit obtained. SCW may also attack using
direct fire against bunker occupants, ap-
plying the +3 and halving effects.
12.5.66111 GF/Grenade Attacks—When
using GF directly on the Casualty Table,
including Grenade attacks, a 3L shift ap-
plies.

It is the German impulse of a Fire & Movement Segment. The German

player decides to combine the GUNFIRE FACTORS of Squad ‘6’ (a 6|5|6 squad)
with his MG 34 L|MG (a 5|8 Light Weapon). Instead of 11 GF, this attack comes
to a total of 10 since 1 GF is deducted from the squad for carrying the L|MG.
Use the 10 GF column on the Casualty Table. The targeted hex, SS2, is OPEN
GROUND, and thus, the Russian 1|1|7 NCO and 6|4|8 squad derive no column
shift benefit when fired on in this terrain type. The German player marks BOTH
the squad AND the L|MG with a 'Fired' marker to denote that each unit has fired
ONCE during the turn. Immediately after rolling for the shot, a Collateral Fire 'C'
marker is placed in the hex since the firepower meets the requirement of 6 GF
or more needed for the placement of this marker. Note, the 'C' marker is placed
in the HEX, not on the units fired on. There is no connection between the
outcome of the attack and the placement of a 'C' marker. The German L|MG may
use another ROF to fire AGAIN at SS2 during the same impulse OR it may use
its 5 GF during a later impulse. If a leader was stacked in RR3, its column shift
benefit would apply to BOTH shots by the L|MG, even if the second ROF was
used in a later impulse. Since the L|MG is in a building, as per 12.6.33 it could
NOT change its COVERED ARC this turn to fire on hex QQ2 as its CA would
have to be set to RR2/SS3 to fire on SS2.

32
 a) The unit exits the location in which it set f) BT: A Bangalore Torpedo attempting to
12.5.6612 Indirect Fire—All HE/FRAG at-
up marked with an FC marker; destroy emplacements make a roll on the
tacks resulting from INDIRECT fire (includ-
b) The unit spends 1 MP or uses crawl/ ‘40’ column on the GF|FRAG row and use
ing OBA and aircraft bombs) are HALVED
Infiltration to remove the FC marker or to the result on the Demolition Table (DT) (see
as per 12.5.71c. Exception: Indirect fire
move on top of an emplacement marker. 14.13.12).
attacks against units marked as ‘FC’ due
12.5.67 HE vs. Personnel Cover State 12.5.73 Determine the Final Column—
ONLY to being behind Bocage/High Wall
When using the HPT to attack a hex loca- Apply
hexsides (see 12.5.663) do so at full strength
tion containing multiple Personnel units in all applicable column shifts on the Casualty
(i.e., do NOT halve).
differing cover states, some may be hit and Table for the cover state of the target unit(s).
12.5.662 Units Firing From Full Cover—
others missed depending on the applicable Column shifts are listed in the ‘Sh’ column
A unit in Full cover may fire at adjacent units
HPT DRM. Make one die roll on the HPT of Table F1; corresponding HPT DRM (for
only. Exception: Mortars may fire normally
and apply the appropriate DRM to deter - attacks using the HPT) are listed in the ‘HPT
from Full cover when under a hedgehog or
mine the units hit, noting that Casualty Table DRM’ column (they are also listed below the
AT -Trench; mortars may also fire normally
shifts are not applied since the DRM are HPT). Cover States that are only used on
from Full cover in ‘down’ Linear Depression
used on the HPT (except in the case of Cush- the Casualty Table have ‘na’ listed in the
hexes, but doing so requires using a Spot-
ion, Air Bursts, and other column shifts that HPT DRM column. Apply any left or right
ter.
are only applied on the Casualty Table). Note: column shifts to derive the attack’s final
12.5.663 Set Up in Full Cover— Person-
When targeting Opportunity Fire against column.
nel may set up in Full cover under eligible
Running Personnel units the attack does not Example: A Firegroup totaling 12 GF, directed
emplacements. Vehicles and Personnel may
affect non-Running units in the location, nor by an NCO fires on a target in Improved cover.
set up marked with an FC marker in the
do any resulting morale checks resulting The starting column is the ‘10’ column on the
following types of terrain:
from casualties. GF|FRAG row. The improved cover gives two
a) Any non-roof location of a multi-hex build-
12.5.7 Casualty Table (F2) shifts left (2L) and the leader provides one
ing;
The Casualty Table is used for all fire ex- shift right (1R) for a final modifier of one shift
b) Behind Level +10 hexsides (e.g., High
cept when guns and FT fire at vehicles, H left. Use the ‘8’ column.
Wall/Bocage hexsides) if all enemy units with
weapons and buildings (i.e., instead of at 12.5.731 Final Column Off Table—If shifts
LOS to the hex trace LOS ACROSS a Level
the building’s occupants). result in a final column to the left of the ‘1’
+10 hexside. Remove the FC marker when-
12.5.71 Determine the Initial Column column on the GF|FRAG row, an announced
ever an enemy unit has an LOS to the hex
a) Gunfire and FRAG Factors: Use the high- attack has no effect (mark attacking units
(and is in Spotting Range), and the LOS is
est numbered column in the GF|FRAG row as fired). If shifts move an attack to the
not traced across a Level +10 hexside.
that is not greater than the attack’s total GF right of the ‘50’ column, use the ‘50’ column
A unit never PLACES an FC marker for ‘a’
or FRAG Factors (see 12.5.661 for excep- (Exception: Heavy Payload).
and ‘b’ above during the course of play. FC
tions). 12.5.732 Heavy Payload—In the case of
markers are ONLY placed in terrain hexes
Example: A Firegroup totaling 28 Gunfire HE direct and indirect fire hits of 300+mm
during set up. After set up, units may only
Factors uses the ‘24’ column. (including aircraft bombs) apply a -1 DIE
obtain Full cover under an emplacement or
b) Indirect Fire and Guns Firing HE: Use ROLL MODIFIER on the Casualty Table for
in a vehicle affording FULL (as denoted by
the highest numbered column in the HE row EACH fraction of 100mm in excess of
an F on the vehicle counter) cover.
that is not greater than the attacking unit’s 200mm. Treat modified rolls less than ‘1’
12.5.664 Dropping Into Full Cover—Eli-
Gun Size. Example: An 88|A Gun uses the as ONE.
gible Personnel units may ‘drop’ into Full
‘80’ column (equivalent to the ‘20’ GF|FRAG Example: A ‘300’ Gun Value HE hit receives a
cover when an enemy unit fires on them.
column). -1 DRM on the Casualty Table, i.e., a roll of
12.5.6641 Eligible Units—Units are eligible
c) HE-Half FRAG Equivalent: When re- ‘7’ on the 50+ column is modified to a ‘6’.
to drop into Full cover when not already
quired to use half the FRAG Factors for an 12.5.74 Roll the Result
marked with a fired or moved marker, if
HE attack, find the GF|FRAG column Cross-reference a die roll on the appropri-
they are fired on by any direct fire, aircraft,
equivalent to the Gun Size, and then use ate column. A ‘-’ means the fire has no ef-
or NON mortar OBA and indirect fire and
the highest column which is not more than fect. A ‘C#’ means the fire generates casu-
they are:
one half that value. alties equal to the number represented by
a) on top of Hedgehogs or other emplace-
Example: A 76mm mortar fires in a case that the ‘#’ following the ‘C’.
ments specifically listed as providing full
requires use of half the FRAG Factors. Nor- 12.5.741 Multiple Targets
cover in their rules;
mally the mortar would use the ‘75’ column Note that small arms attack all eligible tar -
b) Passengers in a Vehicle affording F cover.
on the HE row, which is the same as the ‘14’ gets in the targeted location. Make ONE roll
Units NEVER drop into full cover in build-
column on the GF|FRAG row. Half of 14 is 7. on the Casualty Table and distribute any
ings.
Use the ‘6’ column in the GF|FRAG row. resulting casualties among ALL Personnel
12.5.6642 Sequence —Use the following
12.5.72 Notes Row—The top row contains (to include crews manning H weapons and
sequence when firing on units eligible to drop
abbreviations to remind players of the col- eligible passengers/riders). Use the Casu-
into Full cover:
umn used for certain attacks. alty Table result on Table C6 to determine
a) Enemy unit declares an attack using ANY
a) AP: An AP attack that K-KILLs a vehicle, effects on vehicles and H weapons.
type of fire except MOR TAR (including mor-
targets Personnel in a bunker, or destroys 12.5.8 Small Arms (GF) vs. Vehicles And
tar OBA);
an H weapon attacks passengers, manning H Weapons Table (C6)
b) The owning player of the targeted Per -
crews, and Personnel in a bunker on the ‘4’ Use this table to determine damage when
sonnel unit declares if it will drop into Full
column in the GF|FRAG row (see 11.5.82). Small Arms attack locations containing ve-
cover;
b) CF: Place a Collateral Fire marker in a hicles and H weapons. Small Arms GF
c) Fire is resolved if any effect can be ob-
location that receives Direct Fire from at NEVER use vehicle size (e.g., Very Small)
tained. If the Personnel unit dropped into
least six GF or FRAG factors (see 12.5.10). or Moving Vehicle DRMs as shifts on the
Full cover, it benefits from that cover state
c) SC: Satchel Charges attack Personnel on Casualty Table. After resolving the attack
against the just-declared fire.
the ‘20’ column in the GF|FRAG row (see on the Casualty Table, use the appropriate
12.5.6643 Movement—Units use Crawling
12.15.22). row of Table C6 for the target type to deter -
movement when dropping into Full cover,
d) FT: Flamethrowers attack Personnel on mine any results:
but dropping into Full cover is not an Op-
the ‘30’ column in the GF|FRAG row (see a) AFV/APC: A C1 or greater calls for a roll
portunity Fire trigger. Mark the unit with a
14.7). on the Suppression Table (see 12.5.175).
movement marker; it may not move or fire
e) DOZ: Dozers attempting to destroy ter - For effects on passengers, see 12.5.82;
during that turn’s Fire & Movement Seg-
rain, emplacements, and wrecks make a roll b) Truck Type: A Casualty Table result equal
ment after dropping into Full cover.
on the ‘50’ column in the GF|FRAG row, to a C1 results in an M-KILL; a C2-3 re-
12.5.6644 Leaving Full Cover—A unit may
and use the result on the Demolition Table sults in a K-KILL; a C4+ a Burning wreck.
exit Full cover in the following ways:
(DT) (see 14.13.12); For effects on passengers, see 12.5.82;

33
c) H Weapon: A Casualty Table result of C8+
calls for a roll on the F-KILL Table (see
12.5.15).
12.5.81 Small Arms F-KILL—A large vol-
ume of small arms fire may damage an AFV’s
optics. If a small arms attack against the
front facing of an AFV/APC (must be front
of the turret for turreted AFV/APC) results
in a C8+ make a roll on the F-KILL Table
(see 12.5.15).
12.5.82 Passengers’ Fate
If a transport vehicle is targeted, Passen-
gers (including those that survive or are oth-
erwise unaffected by Small Arms fire) suf-
fer the following fates:
a) Transport Vehicle Burned by Direct
Fire —Eliminate Personnel and L and M
weapons. Place H weapons in the hex with
the burning wreck, marked with F-KILL
marker;
b) Transport K-KILLed or Burned by Indi-
rect Fire or Aircraft Bombs —Eliminate
Personnel and L and M weapons. H weap-
ons undergo separate attacks (see 12.11.2b);
c) Transport Vehicle K-KILLed by Direct
Fire—Place H weapons in the hex with the
wreck. Eliminate L and M weapons. Attack
Personnel units as follows, depending on
the type of weapon that produced the K-
KILL (place surviving passengers in the hex
with the wreck after resolving the attack):
Gun Firing AP: Make a roll on the Casualty
Table using the AP row of the Casualty Table
for K-KILLs from AP/APCR/APDS/HEAT
ammunition.
Gun Firing HE: Use the die roll from the K-
KILL Table on the Casualty Table, using the
gun’s HE equivalent and the column shift
for the passenger’s cover state (see 11.5.7).
Small Arms: Use the die roll from the small
arms attack that caused the K-KILL, apply-
ing the column shift for the passenger’s
cover state.
ATR/MG Using an HPT: Transported Per -
sonnel and weapons are not affected. Place
them in the hex with the wreck;
d) Transport Not K-KILLed —Attack Per -
sonnel units as follows, depending on the
type of weapon that attacked the vehicle:
Gun Firing AP: Transported Personnel and
weapons are not affected.
Gun Firing HE: Use the same die roll from
the K-KILL Table on the Casualty Table,
using the gun’s HE equivalency and the col-
umn shift for the Passenger’s cover state
(Exception: Personnel in ‘F’ cover are unaf-
fected).
Small Arms: Use the die roll from the Small
Arms attack vs. the vehicle, applying the
column shift for the Passenger’s cover state.
ATR/MG Using an HPT: Transported Per-
sonnel and weapons are not affected.
12.5.9 Personnel Casualties
Use the following routine to apply casual-
ties to Personnel units.
12.5.91 Personnel Units and Steps—Per-
sonnel units have a number of ‘steps,’ each
representing a state of combat effectiveness.
Each time a unit ‘absorbs’ a ‘C1’ in casual-
ties, it takes one step loss.
12.5.911 Squads—Squads have four steps.
1st step loss: Place a Casualties marker
on the squad.
2nd step loss: Remove the Casualties
marker and flip the squad to its reduced
side (the back side, with two figures).
3rd step loss: Place a Casualties marker
on the reduced squad.
4th step loss: Remove the reduced squad
from play.
12.5.912 Other Personnel Units—Crews,
FOs, BAR gunners, commissars, and lead-
ers have two steps.
1st step loss: Flip the unit to its reduced
side (the reduced side of leaders, FOs, com-
missars, and BAR gunners is called its
Wounded side).
2nd step loss: Remove the reduced/
Wounded unit from play.
12.5.92 Casualty Effects
Casualties affect Personnel units as follows:
a) The placement of a Casualties marker
reduces printed Gunfire Factors and mo-
rale level of squads and reduced squads by
ONE (Exception: Only the GF of Japanese
Personnel is reduced).
b) A wounded leader, FO/Commissar/BAR
gunner may not use Running movement.
c) The ROF of H and M weapons is reduced
to ONE if manned by a reduced crew.
d) A non-small arms attack that eliminates
a Personnel unit also eliminates any L or M
weapons the unit was carrying.
12.5.93 Targets in the Same Cover State—
The owning player chooses the units to ab-

C AS U ALT Y TAB L E MOD IF IE D GU N F IR E E X AMP L E L IN E OF S IGH T E X AMP L E

ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GF GF GF GF GF GF GF GF GF 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
- -
1 - 4 - 4 2 - - 1 2
2 ● ● - ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 6 - - 6 6 1 6 6 6
3 - - ● - ● - - - -
3 - - - - 4 - - - -
4 ● ● - ● ● ● - ● -
4 8 8 - - 6 2 - 8 -
5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 4 6 6 4 - 1 6 2 6
6 ● ● - ● ● ● ● ● -
6 2 6 - 4 1 - 6 6 -
7 - ● - - ● ● ● - ●
7 - 8 - - 8 2 - - 4

8 1 4 - 4 1 - - - - 8 ● ● - ● ● ● - ● -

9 6 8 - - 8 2 4 - - 9 ● ● - - ● ● ● - ●

N u mb er = C asu alty Tab le co lu mn u sed fo r attack ● = L OS IS GOOD

The tables above use the example at right (on page 35). The Line of Sight
Example provides for a simple review of the inter-relationships of differ-
ent terrain on varying levels. The Casualty Table Modified Gunfire Example
table uses the actual Casualty Table column used for each GF attack. For
example, squad ‘8’, with ‘5’ printed Gunfire Factors, uses the ‘4’ column on
the table prior to any shifts due to terrain.
Squad ‘3’ only has a LOS to ‘5’ due to its LOS following the continuous
Sunken Road from R36 to R37, then as it exits the sunken road to R38,
with the R37/R38 hexside acting as a Linear Depression contour between
the lower and higher levels. It would also have a LOS to any adjacent units
(e.g., hex S37; Q37). A unit in any hex adjacent to ‘3’ would fire at hex R36
as if it were open ground. A squad in Q37 would receive the one column
shift LEFT for the hedge on the Q37-R36 hexside if fired at by ‘3’ in R36.
Squad ‘7’ cannot see ‘8’ due to the SAME LEVEL Blocking terrain in the
form of the +5 levels-high Hedge on the Q36-R35 hexside.
Squad ‘4’ fires at ‘1’ using its full ‘8’ Gunfire factors since it’s up on a hillock,
providing an unobstructed LOS over the Obscuring terrain, Crops, in O38-
P38. When an LOS between two hexes of terrain goes right down the
hexside, only ONE Obscuring terrain hex is added to the shot, i.e., not a
TWO column shift LEFT.
The Wall hexsides in hex O35 have no impact on fire at or by squad ‘6’
since it is at Level +10, above the +5 level walls on ground level. For the
same reason, Squad ‘2’, UP on a partial hillock, can see Squad ‘7’ and fire
at it ignoring the hedge in R37/Q38 as well as any Crops that may be along
its LOS. Squad ‘6’ cannot exit its hex from its current location. It will have
to use 1 MP (or Infiltration) to move ‘downstairs’ to the ground level loca-
tion. If ‘6’ was in the ground level now, the only squads it could see would
be ‘8’ and ‘7’ AND ‘2’ (since it is UP on the Hillock at Level +5). Note fire at
‘6’ would either receive the benefit of the wall OR the building (squad ‘6’
owning player’s choice), not both.
If squad ‘3’ was in hex R35, it could exit the sunken road moving along the
road, into Q35, at the cost of 1 MP. Hex R35 is at the same level as Q35.
If it wanted to move from R35 directly to R34, it would pay 1 MP + CoT.

34
sorb casualties among targeted units in the
same cover state.
12.5.94 Targets in Different Cover
States—If Personnel units (including trans-
ported Personnel and manning crews of H
weapons) in the targeted location are in more
than one cover state, use the following rou-
tine:
a) Cross reference the die roll with the ap-
propriate column on the Casualty Table for
the units in the least beneficial cover state;
b) All Personnel in the least beneficial cover
state absorb all casualties called for;
c) If all Personnel units in the least benefi-
cial cover are eliminated and there are still
casualties to be absorbed, cross reference
the original die roll with the column for the
least beneficial cover among all surviving
units. Apply this result (if any), less any
casualties already absorbed;
d) Continue this process until no further
casualties need to be absorbed, or no
friendly units remain in the attacked loca-
tion.
12.5.95 Casualty Morale Check— Person-
nel units that survive a C# result must
check morale, as must other same-location
friendly Personnel units. Use the C# as a
morale check +DRM, and apply any other
applicable Morale Table modifiers (Excep-
tion: Japanese Personnel do not use the C#
as a DRM). If target units are in different
cover states, use the C# obtained with the
least-protective cover state modifier as a
morale check +DRM for ALL survivors.
Exceptions: Non-Running units do not have
to check morale if they are in the same lo-
cation as Running units targeted by Oppor-
tunity Fire; Full cover Personnel units who
are not eligible targets or are missed by an
HPT shot ignore combat results, including
morale checks resulting against other units
in the hex or location.
12.5.10 Collateral Fire—Place a Collateral
Fire (‘C’) marker in any hex that receives at
least 6 GF (or their equivalent in FRAG Fac-
tors) on the Casualty Table, after applying
all shifts, from a STATIONARY firing unit
using Direct Fire on the Casualty Table.
12.5.101 Entering a ‘C’ Marker—Any Per-
sonnel unit that enters a ‘C’ marker hex
without using Crawling movement must take
an immediate morale check. The unit suf-
fers casualties equal to the amount by which
it fails the check. Treat all Collateral Fire
morale checks as normal morale checks for
all other purposes.
Example: A unit may receive a Courage re-
sult from a ‘C’ marker morale check; morale
modifiers apply normally (e.g., friendly and
enemy units within MSR).
12.5.11 Hit Probability Table (A1)
Guns use this table to determine if their
shots hit the target. MG and L|AT use their
own HPTs, Tables A2 and A3 (see 12.10.1
and 12.10.2). Roll once on the HPT each
time a weapon fires.
12.5.111 Determining the Hit Probabil-
ity Number (HPN)—Cross-index the range
with the Gun Rating. Guns have a rating of
A, B, C or D (L|ATRs use the D row;
M|ATRs use the B row). If the range is 17
hexes or greater, use the appropriate col-
umn according to the Gun Size of the firing
unit. Use the resulting HPN to determine if
a target is hit.
Examples: A gun firing at a range of 2 hexes
uses an HPN of 9. A 57|B gun firing at a
range of 18 hexes uses an HPN of 4; a 76|B
gun firing at a range of 18 hexes uses an
HPN of 6.
12.5.112 Die Roll Modifiers (DRM)—There
are a variety of HPT DRM. DRM are listed
beneath the HPT. Most are self-explanatory;
others are explained below.
12.5.1121 Moving Vehicle—If the target is
a moving vehicle, there is a +2 modifier.
Exception: if the range to the target is 16+
hexes and the firing unit previously placed
a BOT marker on the target, there is no
moving vehicle modifier.
12.5.1122 Burst On Target (BOT)—Any H
weapon, mortar, ATR, and vehicle Main Ar -
mament acquires its target when it secures
a HIT on the HPT. Place a Burst on Target
(BOT) marker of the firing player’s choice of
color (Note: No other weapons, including
aircraft, place BOT markers). When hit us-
ing direct fire, place the BOT in the specific
location of the target. When hit using indi-
rect fire, place the BOT in the hex. A spe-
cific weapon only benefits from BOT mark-
ers it places via hits on the HPT. Subse-
quent shots at a BOT -marked target receive
a -3 HPT DRM.
12.5.1123 BOT Removal—Remove a BOT
marker if the firing weapon fires at a target
outside the current target’s location, moves,
becomes newly suppressed, is rendered
ineligible to fire, or the LOS to the hex is
blocked for any reason (e.g., smoke along
the LOS). If the BOT -marked unit is de-
stroyed or leaves the location, the placing
player may:

7
The example at left is used for the Line Of Sight
Example and the Casualty Table Modified Gun-
LOS +10 marker fire Example on page 34. The map used in this
example is Scottish Corridor mapsheet 1.
6
Squad ‘1’ is in a crops hex on Level +10. It has no
LOS to squad ‘3’ since the latter is down in a
sunken road. It also cannot see ‘7’ due to the
hedge in the R36-Q37 hexside. The hedge is +5
levels high and blocks same level (or lower) LOS.
Squads ‘1’ and ‘7’ are both on Level +10.
8 3
Squad ‘6’ has a LOS to ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘4’, ‘5’, and ‘8’ be-
cause it is up in the steeple in hex O35. It has to
pay for the crops in hexes O37 and O38 when
firing on ‘1’, with each reducing its fire by one
column LEFT. Its shot on ‘4’ is reduced by one
column due to the crops in P36. It ignores the
hedge on the P36-O36 hexside as it is lower than
4
the firing and target unit. The hedge is on Level
0. Squad ‘6’ does not pay for any crops along the
LOS to ‘2’ since the latter is on a hillock in hex
9 Q39, raising it up +5 levels and allowing it to see,
and be seen, over +5 terrain like crops, hedges,
walls, and wrecks.
Squad ‘3’ can ONLY see ‘5’ since the former is
5 down in a sunken road. And since a sunken road
is -10 levels below the terrain it cuts into, ‘5’ is
treated as if fire from ‘3’ crosses a +10 hill hex,
1 2 providing a one column shift LEFT from ‘3’. If
squad ‘3’ was a gun instead, a +1 HPN DRM
would be applied against ‘5’ instead of the col-
umn shift.

35

a) Remove the BOT marker;
b) Leave the BOT marker in the current
LOCATION for use against newly entering
enemy units;
c) If eligible, transfer the BOT marker to a
new target in the same location, or track a
moving target (see 12.5.1127).
12.5.1124 BOT & Spotting—When using
the Spotting Rules, targets marked with BOT
may be spotted at any range by the BOT -
placing units.
12.5.1125 BOT & Hit Location—When fir-
ing at targets in Hull Defilade, apply a -3
BOT DRM on the Hit Location Table after
obtaining a hit on the HPT (this is in addi-
tion to the -3 BOT HPT DRM).
12.5.1126 BOT & ROF—As long as a Gun
fires at its BOT -Marked target, double its
ROF (including any remaining ROF for the
turn in which it places the BOT marker).
Exception: some units, as shown on their
AFV cards, do not receive an increase in
ROF because they have a BOT (e.g., Ger -
man sIG II SPG). However, such units still
receive the BOT –3 HPT DRM.
Example: A ROF 2 weapon fires at, hits, and
K-KILLs an AFV. The gun may use its remain-
ing ROF of one, now doubled to two, in the
BOT marker hex if other units are in the same
location as the just-hit AFV. It may fire again,
twice, this impulse against these other units
(or at the AFV if it was not K-KILLed). If it
decides to use its second ROF to fire at a
target outside the BOT-marked location, its
remaining ROF would be ONE and it will lose
the just-placed BOT. If it keeps firing at the
same BOT-marked location the next turn, its
ROF is doubled from 2 to 4.
12.5.1127 BOT Tracking and Transfer—A
BOT placed by DIRECT fire may remain on
the target if the target moves (or follow one,
owning player’s choice), unless the target
exits the LOS of the placing unit. In that
case, remove the BOT unless there is an-
other enemy unit(s) in the last location the
originally targeted unit occupied, in which
case the firing unit may transfer the BOT to
another target. If the original unit is elimi-
nated, any Direct fire-placed BOT marker
may also be transferred to another same-
location target. BOT markers placed by In-
direct fire may never be transferred or track
a moving unit.
12.5.113 HPT Die Roll—Make a die roll on
the HPT for each shot. Apply any cumula-
tive HPT DRM to the die roll (i.e., these DRM
never modify the HPN, just the die roll that
is compared to the HPN needed for a hit). If
the resulting DRM-applied die roll is equal
to or less than the HPN needed, the shot
hits the target. If a shot fails to hit the tar-
get, it is a miss and has no effect.
Example: An HPN of ‘6’ receives a +2 HPT
DRM. The firing player rolls a ‘5’. Adding the
+2 DRM results in a final die roll of ‘7’, greater
than the HPN. The shot is a miss. If a ‘4’ was
rolled instead, the +2 HPT DRM would result
in a ‘6’, and a HIT would have occurred.
12.5.114 Critical Hit (CH)—Whenever an
HE or AP attack is made a devastating ‘Criti-
cal Hit’ may occur. Following an original HPT
or OBA die roll of ‘0’, make another roll. If
another 0 is rolled (i.e., 00), a Critical Hit
has occurred. Players may not ‘roll for’ CH
Trucks/H weapons. These AF do not vary
if the HPN is less than ZERO (after apply-
with facing/aspect.
ing all HPT DRM) or ‘-’.
12.5.133 Non-HE Penetration Number
12.5.1141 AP/HEAT—Whenever any form
(PEN) —When firing non-HE ammunition,
of AP or HEAT (i.e., includes L|AT) is fired
determine the Penetration Number of the
the PEN number is DOUBLED for use on
weapon by cross-referencing the Gun Size,
the K-KILL Table.
ammunition, and range on the Gun Penetra-
12.5.1142 HE—When firing HE (including
tion Values Table (Play Aid 5) provided for
OBA/aircraft bombs and all forms of air -
each nationality (this information is repeated
craft and Indirect Fire that utilize the HPT)
on individual AFV Cards for convenience).
ignore all applicable LEFT cover shifts (in-
Example: An American 75|B gun using AP
cluding those for bunkers/blockhouses) on
ammunition and firing at a range of 2 hexes
the Casualty Table AND apply a 2R column
has a PEN of 10.
shift to the attack.
12.5.1331 HE Penetration Number
12.5.12 Hit Location Table (B)
(PEN)—The HE Penetration Table (HE) pro-
Use this table after hitting an AFV or a Hull-
vides the Penetration Number for HE am-
Defilade (H-D) APC/truck (use NON-TUR on
munition from all guns. This PEN does not
the table for ALL non-turreted vehicles). Roll
vary by range. Note that HE PEN is doubled
one die on the appropriate column (Non-
when targeting APCs and trucks.
Turreted or Turreted). The result is the as-
12.5.134 K-KILL Results—Make a roll on
pect struck: Turret, Upper Hull (UH), Lower
the appropriate DIFF column. The die roll
Hull (LH), or Track. If the target is H-D,
must be less than or equal to the number
modify the die roll for target size and BOT.
for a result to apply from the following:
12.5.121 Track Hit—When a Track aspect
BURN —The target vehicle is ‘brewed up’.
is hit, immediately make a roll on the M-
Replace the target vehicle with a burning
KILL Table (see 12.5.14); do not make a
wreck marker (the back side of a wreck
roll on the K-KILL Table.
marker, with red flames).
12.5.13 K-KILL Table (C1)
K-KILL—The crew or multiple vehicle sys-
Use this table for non-track hits on AFVs,
tems are out of action. The vehicle is
and for all hits on APC and trucks. This
knocked out permanently, but not burning.
table has two sections: one for attacks us-
Replace the target vehicle with a wreck
ing AP, APCR, APDS, HEAT, and L|AT (SCW)
marker. For ef fects on passengers, see
ammunition, and one for attacks using HE
12.5.82.
ammunition (MGs and ATRs use the AP sec-
POSS K-KILL—A portion of the crew or ve-
tion).
hicle system may be out of action. POSS K-
12.5.131 PEN vs. AF Differential (DIFF)—
KILL results are always treated as K-KILLs
Subtract the target’s AF from the gun’s PEN
for APCs and Trucks. For AFVs use the
to obtain the Differential (DIFF). Use the
POSS K-KILL Results Matrix (PK) to cross-
appropriate DIFF column on the K-KILL
reference the Vehicle Type with the Aspect
Table, using the AP or HE section of the
& Facing hit to determine the result:
table depending on the type of ammunition
a) Immediate K-KILL : The target is K-
that secured the hit (if the DIFF is less than
KILLed;
‘–1’, the shot has no effect).
b) Roll for M-KILL: Make a roll on the M-
12.5.132 Armor Factors (AF)—The armor
KILL Table (D2). See 12.5.14;
factor of an AFV varies for each aspect and
c) Roll for F-KILL: Make a roll on the F-
facing combination (AF for APC/trucks does
KILL Table (D1). See 12.5.15.
not vary by aspect/facing, see 12.5.1322).
Note that some results on the POSS K-KILL
Determine an AFV target’s facing in relation
Results Matrix call for rolls on both the M-
to the firing weapon. By definition, this is
KILL and F-KILL Tables.
the target’s hexside that the LOS crosses.
12.5.14 M-KILL Table (D2) —An M-KILL
If the LOS is traced exactly between the
result destroys a vehicle’s mobility, i.e.,
flank and the front, the facing is front if the
suspension or track integrity is lost. Use
target is MOVING and flank if it is STA-
this table when specified on the POSS K-
TIONARY. If the LOS is traced exactly be-
KILL Results Matrix AND whenever a roll
tween the flank and rear, it is rear if sta-
on the Hit Location Table results in a Track
tionary and flank if moving. On the AFV
hit and in any instance a roll on the M-KILL
Card, cross-reference the target facing and
Table is called for. An M-KILLed vehicle is
aspect to determine the AF (remember that
NOT considered a ‘moving’ HPT target.
facing is different from aspect: the LOS as
12.5.141 Procedure—Use the column for
it enters the target hex determines the
the aspect struck. A roll less than or equal
former; the Hit Location Table determines
to the number provided results in an M-
the latter). If an AFV has a black dot for an
KILL; mark the vehicle with an M-KILL
AF, the AF for that aspect & facing is con-
marker. If the target is M-KILLed, also make
sidered ‘un-armored’ and is always -1.
a roll on the Bail Out Table (see 12.5.16; if
12.5.1321 Facing of Same Hex Vehicle
an M-KILLed vehicle has already received
Targets—When firing at a vehicle that is in
an F-KILL, the crew AUTOMATICALLY bails
the same hex or location as the firing unit,
out) and the Suppression Table (see
determine the target facing by using the
12.5.17).
direction the vehicle was moving when it
12.5.142 M-KILL Effects—Vehicles may not
entered the hex. If both units occupy the
move or pivot for the remainder of the game.
same hex at the beginning of an impulse,
Any turret or 360 degree gun with which
use the facing when the last moving unit
the vehicle is equipped may still rotate, al-
entered the hex.
though the vehicle counter itself may not
12.5.1322 APC and Truck AF—APCs and
move or change its vehicle covered arc.
Trucks use generic AFs: 0 for APCs; -1 for
12.5.143 Failure to M-KILL—A roll on the
36
M-KILL Table that does not result in an M-
KILL instead generates:
a) a K-KILL result for non-track hits;
b) a no effect result for TRACK hits; make a
roll on the Suppression Table.
12.5.15 F-KILL Table (D1)—An F-KILL re-
sult represents a unit’s loss of firepower. In
addition to using this table when specified
on the POSS K-KILL Results Matrix, use
this table if a small arms attack against the
FRONT facing of an AFV (must be FRONT
of the turret for turreted AFVs) or against
an H weapon results in a C8 or greater.
12.5.151 Procedure—Use the row on Table
D1 appropriate for the attack (the ‘C8+ GF
F-KILL’ row for small arms attacks, the ‘F-
KILL’ row for all others). A roll less than or
equal to the number provided results in an
F-KILL; mark the vehicle with an F-KILL
marker. If the target is F-KILLed, also make
a roll on the Bail Out Table (see 12.5.16; if
an F-KILLed vehicle has already received
an M-KILL, the crew AUTOMATICALLY bails
out) and the Suppression Table (see
12.5.17).
12.5.152 F-KILL Effects—F-KILLed units
may not fire ANY weapon for the remainder
of the game. If the F-KILLed vehicle passes
the Bail Out check, it exits along the near-
est friendly map-edge at its earliest oppor-
tunity.
12.5.153 Failure to F-KILL—A roll on the
F-KILL Table that does not result in an F-
KILL instead generates:
a) a K-KILL result for HPT attacks;
b) a no effect result for small arms attacks.
12.5.16 Bail Out Table (E)
Use this table when an AFV, APC, OR
ARMED TRUCK has been M-KILLed or F-
KILLed. Cross-reference the M- or F-KILL
Result with a die roll. A ‘B’ result on this
table means the vehicle crew has bailed out;
mark the vehicle with a ‘Bail Out’ marker.
Vehicle crews are not represented by a
counter and never appear on the battlefield.
A vehicle marked with a ‘Bail Out’ marker
may not move or fire for the remainder of
the scenario, except if re-manned. While it
is not considered K-KILLed for Victory Point
purposes, the same quantity of VP are
awarded (note that another attack that K-
KILLs a bailed-out AFV earns ANOTHER 6
VP).
12.5.161 Re-Manning Bailed Out Ve-
hicles—A friendly full strength crew may
enter a Bailed Out vehicle in the same man-
ner as Personnel entering a vehicle for trans-
port. The vehicle remains marked as Bailed
Out (place the marker to the side of the
table). On a roll less than or
equal to the required number,
mark the target with a Sup-
pressed marker, orienting the
marker with the turret facing
(or ignoring facing for non-tur -
reted vehicles).
12.5.171 Elite Tank Com-
mander DRM—Vehicles with
an Elite Tank Commander (see
15.6) receive a +1 DRM on
Table D3 when checking for
their own suppression.
12.5.172 Turret Aspect Au-
tomatic Suppression—Auto-
matically suppress an AFV
when it is hit in the Turret by
HE/AP of 75mm or greater.
12.5.173 Suppression Ef-
fects —A Suppressed vehicle
uses the Suppressed row on
the Spotting Table (if Spotting
is in effect), has a maximum
ROF of ONE, loses any BOT it
PREVIOUSLY placed on a tar -
get unit, may not fire its
AAMG, and incurs a +2/2L
modifier. Note: This 2L modi-
fier is ALSO applied to FT at- The above AFV 'standoff' example will be used to illumi-
tacks by vehicles. Note that nate a number of points. It is the German Impulse and his
already suppressed vehicles StuG IIIg is parked up on a Hill hex, +10 levels higher than
may place new BOT markers two American M4A1 Shermans. If the StuG fires on the
on targets they hit. M4A1 in hex R14, the latter is in Hull Defilade to the SP-
12.5.174 Additional Suppres- gun's fire. Thus, the facing of the Turret ONLY is consid-
sion Effects—Passengers car - ered AND only a Turret (TUR) aspect will result in a hit.
ried by a suppressed vehicle The StuG IIIg is also in H-D position, up on the Hill, for return
are also suppressed; they may fire from both M4A1 'C' in hex R14 and 'D' in hex O13. To
not fire in any manner, nor may obtain an effective hit on the H-D M4A1 'C' in hex R14, a TUR
they serve as an FO or Spot- aspect must be rolled. Table 'B' is consulted after a hit is
ter. A suppressed OT vehicle obtained using the HPT. On a die roll of 1-3, a Turret aspect is
may not fire any of its weap- struck, resulting in a hit. However, there are some die roll
ons. modifiers provided on Table B, for use only on that table. One
12.5.175 Casualty Table Sup- is for target size. The M4A1 is a 'Large' target, and a -1 DRM
pression—When FRAG or HE is applied, making it EASIER to obtain a TUR hit (and thus hit a
attack an AFV/APC, roll on the large H-D tank). Thus, on an aspect die roll of 1-4, the Sherman
appropriate row of the Casu- is hit in its turret. An aspect die roll of 5-0 results in an ineffec-
alty Table. On a C1 or greater tive result and is treated in the same manner as a 'miss'.
result, ALSO make a roll on
the Suppression Table using
the ‘C# Result*’ row. A roll less than or equal one hit attempt on the HPT between two
to the ‘#’ portion of the C# results in Sup- different target hexes, but units with a ROF
pression. greater than one, vehicles with multiple
Example: On a C2 result a roll of two or less weapons, and Personnel carrying weapons
will result in Suppression. may target different hexes.
Non Suppressed AFVs and APCs may also 12.6.1 Impulse Use
be attacked on the Casualty Table by GF in When one unit or Firegroup uses direct fire,
an attempt to Suppress them, as may OT it uses one impulse, even if using multiple
vehicles at ALL times (even if already marked weapons.
as Suppressed). Example: An AFV may fire its main arma-

vehicle, and remove the Personnel crew from 12.5.176 Removing Suppressed Markers— ment and its machine-guns during one im-

the map). If the vehicle is not F-KILLed, the During the End of Turn Segment, vehicles pulse, and may target more than one hex in

new crew may fire its weapons. The vehicle may remove Suppressed markers by pass- the process.

may NOT move, or change the vehicle or ing a morale check. No morale modifiers Note: A unit so-used may draw a Gun Duel

turret covered arc. If the re-manned vehicle apply to Suppression removal morale checks. before it can finish using its weapons during

sustains another Bail Out result, do not place AFVs have their morale levels listed on their an impulse.

the Personnel crew back on the map; elimi-
nate it in the same manner as a Bailed Out
vehicle crew.
12.5.17 Suppression Table (D3)—When-
ever a hit fails to K-KILL an AFV or APC
(including after M-KILL and F-KILL results),
make a roll on the Suppression Table, us-
ing the appropriate row for Gun Size or C#
(for casualties-produced checks on the
AFV Cards. All APCs have a morale level of
7. Personnel inside a suppressed APC do
not roll to remove suppression; they become
unsuppressed when the APC passes its mo-
rale check.
12.6 FIRE RESTRICTIONS
Certain restrictions limit fire opportunities
and reduce ROF and GF during attacks. No
unit or weapon may split one ‘shot’ of GF or
12.6.2 Rate of Fire
Units may not fire more than their available
ROF. Units lacking a ROF value (provided
in a blue square) have a ROF of ‘1’. A Per -
sonnel unit may thus fire its GF only once
per turn. Units with multiple weapons (e.g.,
an AFV with gun, CMG and BMG weapons)
may fire each weapon separately during one
impulse (or Opportunity Fire attack), noting

37
any ROF restrictions that apply to that unit
or weapon type.
12.6.21 ROF Restrictions —All L and M
weapons, as well as any AA weapon, may
fire any available ROF during the same im-
pulse (noting covered arc ROF restrictions;
see 12.6.33). All other weapons may not
use more than one ROF per impulse, un-
less it places a BOT on its target. Excep-
tions: Assault Fire (see 12.8.21), Opportu-
nity Fire (see 12.7.2), Gun Duels (see 12.9).
12.6.3 Covered Arc
All H and vehicle-mounted weapons have a
restricted field-of-fire known as a Covered
Arc (CA). These weapons must pivot to fire
at any target outside of their current CA:
the FRONT two hexes for all vehicles, un-
less marked with a TURRET marker (in
which the CA of the turret is used instead),
and the front two hexes of all Guns. All L
and M weapons may fire in any direction
(Exception: Terrain-based CA restrictions;
see 12.6.33).
12.6.31 Vehicle and H Weapon Cover Arc—
During Direct Fire (or Opportunity Fire), a
vehicle or H weapon may change its Vehicle
Covered Arc (VCA; separate from that of its
turret) and/or rotate its turret any number
of hexspines before it fires. Apply appro-
priate HPT DRM (or Casualty Table column
shifts for non-HPT fire) to any fire conducted
during the impulse (or Opportunity Fire
shot). When moving, a vehicle pays one
Movement Point for each hexspine it pivots
its VCA. It may independently rotate its tur-
ret one hexspine for each MP it spends while
IN a hex (not total MP spent during the
move).
12.6.32 Changing Covered Arc Without
Firing—Vehicles and H weapons may change
their CA without firing. A unit that changes
its CA without firing is considered to have
moved (crawling movement for H Weapons,
assault movement for vehicles); mark the
unit with a Moved marker. If hidden, a unit
changing CA without firing may stay hidden
if not in the LOS (and Spotting Range if in
use) of an enemy unit.
12.6.33 Terrain-Based ROF Covered Arc
Restrictions—When in a Building (Excep-
tion: Rooftop), Rubble, or Woods location,
or under a Bunker, all multiple ROF weap-
ons have a special covered arc restriction.
The weapon’s first attack determines its CA.
Orient the weapon to face any CA that in-
cludes the target hex (noting there is no shift
or HPT DRM for setting the CA for a L or M
weapon). The weapon may not change its
CA, or fire at targets outside its CA, during
the remainder of the current phase or seg-
ment (Exception: They may fire at vehicles
that enter their hex from any hexside with-
out reference to this set CA).
12.6.4 Counter Orientation
When pivoting, turn the entire gun or ve-
hicle counter to face its new covered arc,
or rotate the turret of a vehicle that has
one. A player may change a vehicle’s CA
even when the vehicle has a turret (e.g., to
face its stronger frontal armor to an enemy
threat); any combination of vehicle AND tur-
ret CA changes apply cumulatively to any
shot taken immediately following the pivot.
12.6.5 DRM for Changing CA
The DRM for changing CA varies by type.
a) Non-turreted units incur a +3/3L modi-
fier for the first hexspine change, with an
additional +1/1L per hexspine change there-
after;
b) Units with a dashed-line circle around
their Gun Size (‘Slow’ traverse turrets) in-
cur a +2/2L modifier for the first hexspine
change, and +1/1L per hexspine thereaf-
ter;
c) Units with a solid circle around their gun
Size (‘Fast’ traverse turrets/guns) incur a
+1/1L modifier for the first and all subse-
quent hexspine changes.
12.6.6 Covered Arc DRM and ROF
When a stationary weapon with multiple
ROF changes its CA, apply the HPT DRM
for a pivot only on the FIRST HPT die roll
following the CA change. Subsequent shots
receive no HPT DRM, unless the unit
changes CA AGAIN before making a new
die roll on the HPT. Treat any vehicle-
mounted MG with multiple ROF in the same
manner when changing CA.
12.7 OPPORTUNITY FIRE
Eligible units may use Opportunity Fire to
attack enemy units that move in the firing
unit’s LOS (and Spotting Range if in use)
during the Fire & Movement Segment. The
firing player may check if he has an LOS to
the moving unit; there is no penalty if none
exists (unlike when using an impulse to fire,
which results in a pass when no LOS ex-
ists). The following actions ‘trigger’ Oppor-
tunity Fire:
a) Any expenditure of a Movement Point;
b) Transport Loading/Unloading Personnel;
c) Pivoting vehicles, turrets, and Heavy
weapons (see 12.9.4 for First to Fire re-
strictions on the use of Opportunity Fire in
these instances). Opportunity Fire may not
be used until after the triggering unit makes
a minimum of one hexspine change in its
facing/covered arc/turret covered arc.
12.7.1 Opportunity Fire Eligibility
A unit that wishes to use Opportunity Fire
must be otherwise eligible to use Direct Fire.
All rules for Direct Fire apply normally. Note
that only the non-impulse player may use
Opportunity Fire.
12.7.2 Opportunity Fire ROF Limit
A unit may not use more Opportunity Fire
ROF against a moving unit than the target
unit spends in MP while:
a) entering the targeted location it is first
fired on in using Opportunity Fire;
b) using MP to pivot or change any CA (e.g.,
VCA) of a vehicle or turret.
12.7.3 Opportunity Fire Routine
Opportunity Fire takes place in the follow-
ing order:
1) Enemy unit triggers Opportunity Fire per
12.7 above;
2) Opportunity firing units use ONE avail-
able firing opportunity (unlike firing during
an impulse, which may allow a unit to fire
all of its ROF);
3) Surviving moving unit may continue its
movement impulse (to include firing one shot
using Assault Fire, if eligible);
4) Repeat 1-3 above as long as Opportunity
and Assault firing unit(s) want to use re-
maining ROF. Place a Fired ‘F’ marker nor-
mally on units that use Opportunity Fire.
12.7.4 Target Using Running Movement
Opportunity Fire against Running Person-
nel units (including Personnel pushing guns)
does not affect other non-Running Person-
nel units in the location, including morale

In the example at left, the Tiger tank pays 1 Movement Point to enter
hex BB5. It enters the hex across the AA5-BB5 hexside, following the
road as if entering the hex normally (i.e., as if no building was present).
Once it enters BB5 it may head into CC5, reverse back into AA5, or
follow the road along the hexside, entering CC6. For our example, the
tank moves into CC5, spending another 1 MP. Once there, it continues
to DD4, spending another 1/2 (half) MP. When moving along a road +
building hex (or a hexside road) the cost is DOUBLED (to 1 from 1/2 MP
on a road) and ONLY Assault movement may be used.
The 6-pdr in BB6 does NOT have a LOS to the Tiger tank when it moves
along the road in hex BB5 since the LOS, drawn normally by using a
straight-edge between the sighting dots of BB6-BB5, hits the building in
BB5 before touching the road. When the tank continues to CC5, the 6-
pdr can see it, since the LOS can be drawn to touch BOTH a hexside
crossed by the tank when it entered CC5 AND the road IN hex CC5.
Opportunity Fire ONLY could be used when the Tiger first entered CC5.
If it stopped there, the LOS would have to be traced normally to the
sighting dot in CC5 (i.e., not to the hexside as can be done against a
moving target). The ability to trace a LOS to the hexside also applies
against personnel.

38
checks following Casualties results.
12.8 ASSAULT FIRE
In certain cases, units using Assault move-
ment may move AND fire. This is known as
Assault Fire. An Assault moving unit may
use Assault Fire before moving, during its
move (after it spends any MP), or in the last
hex it enters. A unit may use Assault Fire
only during its movement impulse; it can-
not save its Assault Fire for later use.
12.8.1 Personnel Assault Fire
Personnel units utilizing Crawling or Assault
movement may fire their printed Gunfire
Factors at half their normal Gunfire (note
that Running units may never use Assault
Fire).
12.8.11 Platoon Use—Personnel units mov-
ing as a Platoon may use Assault Fire as a
Firegroup, but units in a Platoon are NOT
required to all fire at the same time, nor at
the same target. An Assault firing Platoon
may not form a Firegroup with other units.
12.8.13 Light Weapons and Assault Fire—
A Personnel unit carrying an L weapon may
fire the weapon using Assault Fire, although
the L weapon does NOT have to fire at the
same time as the unit, nor at the same tar-
get, as long as ALL Assault Fire is con-
ducted during the unit’s movement impulse.
When fired using Assault Fire, L Weapons
fire at half their normal Gunfire Factors for
non-HPT attacks, have a reduced ROF of
one, and must add a +3 HPT DRM for at-
tacks on the HPT.
12.8.2 Vehicle Assault Fire
Vehicles may fire all available weapons when
using Assault Fire. Vehicle weapons must
add the Assault Fire +5 HPT DRM; the GF
of non-HPT fire is HALVED.
12.8.21 Vehicle ROF—Vehicles with mul-
tiple ROF weapons may use their entire ROF
during Assault Fire, but may only use ONE
shot of its ROF for each MP spent in the
hex from which it fires. Any combination of
different weapons may fire during the same
MP expenditure. Vehicles may spend more
MP than a hex requires for entrance to in-
crease ROF opportunities
12.8.22 Platoon Use—AFVs moving as a
Platoon may use Assault Fire. AFVs of a Pla-
toon are neither required to all fire at the
same time, nor at the same target.
12.9 GUN DUELS
In some cases, a gun-armed vehicle or H
weapon may initiate a ‘Gun Duel’ and re-
turn fire immediately when fired on using
the HPT during the Fire & Movement Seg-
ment. The unit returning fire is the ‘respond-
ing’ unit. A player initiating a Gun Duel does
not use an Impulse. A unit that is firing may
also use the Gun Duel process to assert his
‘right’ to fire BEFORE any Opportunity Fire
may take place. Mark ‘responding’ units that
fire in a Gun Duel with an ‘F’ marker. Once
initiated, complete a Gun Duel before any
other actions.
12.9.1 Eligibility
To initiate a Gun Duel, the responding unit
must be otherwise eligible to fire AND cur-
rently have a BOT marker on the firing en-
emy unit (Exception: Command Tanks may
initiate a Gun Duel without having a BOT
marker on the firing unit) AND not restricted
by First to Fire (see 12.9.4). The respond-
ing unit must be able to fire without pivot-
ing vehicle or turret.
12.9.2 Gun Duel Routine
Use the following routine to conduct a Gun
Duel.
a) A gun initiates direct fire on a unit eli-
gible to declare a Gun Duel:
b) The responding player declares a Gun
Duel following the announcement of the fir-
ing player’s shot, but before the firing player
makes a roll on the HPT;
c) Both players simultaneously make their
HPT die roll;
d) The player rolling lowest (use the FINAL,
i.e., modified die roll) fires first (i.e., if the
shot renders the enemy unit unable to fire
for any reason, the enemy’s shot is consid-
ered to have never taken place). If the roll
is a tie, the firing player fires first;
e) If still able to fire, the losing unit’s attack
then takes place;
f) The opposing player’s unit may fire again
if eligible, and so on.
12.9.3 Sponsons And Multiple Weapons
For Gun Duels involving AFVs with spon-
son-mounted (e.g., Grant; Lee) or turret MA
and hull-mounted Guns (Char B1 bis; Pzkw
B2), BOTH weapons may duel indepen-
dently with two different targets (or one tar-
get) if they have BOT markers in place.
12.9.4 First to Fire—If an opponent de-
clares the use of a Gun Duel or Opportu-
nity Fire against a H weapon/turreted gun/
vehicle using the HPT, the friendly unit may
fire FIRST if its total DRM for pivoting/
changing Covered Arc is less than the Op-
portunity Firing unit.
12.10 ADDITIONAL COMBAT TABLES
This section provides detailed explanations
of some of the other tables used to conduct
combat.
12.10.1 MG Hit Probability Table (A2)
This table is a separate HPT for MG attacks
against vehicles. This table may be used
for M|MG and ALL vehicle MG when firing
against vehicles. The HPT DRM found un-
der the HPT (A1) apply normally. Note that
MGs using Small arms fire on the Casualty
Table against vehicles may opt to use the
HPT (the A2 table) or use their GF on the
Casualty Table and compare any C# results
obtained there with the appropriate target
row on the Small Arms (GF) vs. Vehicles
and H Weapons Table (C6).
12.10.11 MG PEN Value—Machine-guns use
a PEN value of ‘1’ for calculating the PEN
vs. AF Differential (DIFF) and are treated
as K-KILL Table AP.
12.10.2 L|AT Hit Probability Table (A3)
This table is a separate HPT for Light AT
Weapons. Use this table when L|AT fire at
vehicles or eligible Personnel targets (see
14.4.3), and use any applicable HPT DRM
from the HPT (A1).
12.10.3 Indirect HE | FFE | Aircraft
Bomb | Rocket Attacks vs. Vehicles and
H Weapons Table (C2)
Use this table to determine damage when
FFE, on-board indirect fire, Aircraft Bombs
or rockets attack a vehicle or H weapon on
the Casualty Table. Use the row for the
appropriate target type; a Casualty Table
C# result equal to a C# on Table C2 gener -
ates the indicated M-/F-/K-KILL or Burn
39
Sponson-mounted guns (e.g.,
75|C in Grant and Lee tanks)
suffer from a restricted Field-of-
Fire HPT DRM. Any hex on the PORT side
of the VCA adds a +1 HPT DRM.
(apply the Casualty Table result to Person-
nel in the targeted location normally).
12.10.4 Flamethrower vs. Vehicles and H
Weapons Table (C3)
Use this table to determine damage when a
flamethrower attacks a vehicle or H Weapon.
Flamethrowers do not use the HPT or K-
KILL Table. Make a roll directly on this table,
using the appropriate row for the target;
any roll less than or equal to the listed num-
ber results in a burning wreck (i.e., the
equivalent of a BURN result on the K-KILL
Table) or H weapon elimination (AND place
a Flame marker in any location that is Flam-
mable (see 7.1, under ‘Flam’). Automatically
Suppress any vehicle that survives a
flamethrower attack. Note: When
flamethrowers attack manned H Weapons
and vehicles with passengers, make one die
roll and use the result on both the FT Col-
umn of the Casualty Table (to determine the
result for Personnel) and Table C3 (to de-
termine results for H weapons or vehicles).
When firing a flamethrower there is always
the possibility it will run out of fuel (see
14.7.5).
12.10.5 H Weapon Destruction Table HPT
Hits By Weapons ≤ 20mm (C4)
Use this table to determine damage when
non-MG weapons (e.g., ATR; 20|B H|AA
guns) of 20mm or less obtain a hit on the
HPT against an H weapon. Use the row for
the type of ammunition that hit the H
weapon and roll a die; an ‘F’ result on this
table F-KILLs the H weapon.
12.11 INDIRECT FIRE
Indirect Fire takes place when a firing unit
cannot (or does not need to) see its target.
Mortars and off-board artillery ALWAYS fire
using Indirect Fire. Howitzers (HOW) may
use either Direct or Indirect Fire. All other
Guns may use Indirect Fire only if autho-
rized by SSR.
12.11.1 Indirect Fire Attack Routines
There are three attack routines for Indirect
Fire (resolve all in accordance with 12.11.2):
a) Gun with LOS to target: Use the routine
outlined in 12.5.21 to determine hits. A
minimum range of TEN hexes applies (Ex-
ception: Mortars; see 14.6.5); vehicle tar -
gets must be non-moving;
b) Gun without LOS to target: In addition
to the requirements of 12.11.1a, there must
be a Spotter (see 14.6.7) or assigned FO
with LOS to the target;
c) Off-board artillery battery: Use the rou-
tine outlined in 12.12.2 to determine hits.
There must be an assigned FO with LOS to
the target.
12.11.2 Indirect Fire Attack Resolution
Consult the Indirect Fire Effects Table (G)
to determine the number of separate HEXES
an Indirect Fire attack affects (e.g., an FFE
usually attacks six adjacent hexes, centered
around one target hex, for a total of seven
hexes). Indirect Fire attacks units in ALL
locations of a hex; make ONE roll on the
Casualty Table for EACH location that con-
tains a friendly/enemy unit (or terrain that
may result in rubble/flame) within a hex.
Apply the die roll results on:
a) Personnel units (including non FULL cover
Passengers and crews manning guns);
b) H weapons;
c) Vehicles (Note the effects on Passengers
when a vehicle is destroyed), noting any
shifts from the Indirect Fire vs. Vehicle Shifts
table;
d) Unoccupied building locations (for cre-
ation of rubble and Flame).
Absorb casualties suffered by Personnel
units; refer results from the roll against
other targets to the Indirect
HE|FFE|Aircraft Bomb Attacks vs. Vehicles
and H Weapons Table (C2) (see 12.10.3).
12.11.21 Indirect Fire vs. Vehicle Shifts
Table (IS) —This table specifies Casualty
Table shifts for Indirect Fire attacks against
vehicles. These shifts are cumulative with
all applicable cover state modifiers.
12.11.22 Full Cover Units—Units in Full
cover under an emplacement receive a HE-
Half FRAG Equivalent for indirect fire. Units
in Full cover in an APC share the fate of
their vehicle. Units under FC markers re-
ceive NO additional cover benefit. See
12.5.661 for exceptions.
12.11.23 Terrain—Hexside terrain does not
provide cover against Indirect Fire. In-hex
terrain provides cover normally.
12.11.24 FFE vs. 7+ SP of Personnel—
Make an additional roll on the Casualty Table
when OBA attacks a location containing 7+
SP of Personnel. Make this roll AFTER all
others the FFE attack requires; apply any
results as casualties and morale checks
ONLY (i.e., ignore rubble, flame, etc.)
12.11.3 Forward Observers (FO)
FOs (one man Personnel units [usually
1|1|8] with an FO triangle icon) direct off-
board artillery fire. Each off-board battery
in a scenario has one FO counter (if an OOB
lists a battery but no FO, add an FO to that
side’s OOB). FOs are treated as Leaders
for carrying/firing L and M weapons, and
being used as an alternate crew ONLY (i.e.,
they may not lead Firegroups or otherwise
affect an attack by another friendly unit).
They may self-rally.
12.11.31 Battery Assignment—Assign one
FO to a battery or gun on a side note. These
assignments are permanent. An off-board
battery may not fire for the remainder of
the game if the battery’s FO is eliminated
(Exception: A battery may fire if a leader or
FO assigned to a different battery calls in a
Barrage; see 12.11.35).
12.11.32 Set Up—If optional hidden set up
rules are in use an FO may always set up
hidden in allowable terrain.
12.11.321 Off-Map Set Up—FOs may set
up off-map by SSR. Set up the FO in a map-
edge hex in accordance with the SSR; the
only function of an FO’s hex is to serve as
the source of the FO’s LOS; the FO cannot
be attacked in any way.
12.11.33 FO Spotting—FOs must be sta-
tionary to observe their targets. They may
not observe and then move in the same turn.
Mark an FO with an ‘F’ marker when their
corresponding battery or gun fires. Note:
Being marked as ‘Fired’ does not change
the range at which units may Spot an FO. If
the FO is in Full cover or hidden, do not
place a marker (thus giving away its loca-
tion); make a side note instead.
12.11.331 Spotting Range—An FO’s Spot-
ting Range is double the result listed on the
Spotting Table in all columns (due to the
assumed use of binoculars or other optics).
12.11.332 Obstructed LOS—If HPT DRM
from smoke and Obscuring terrain between
the FO and target hex is eight or greater,
the battery or gun may not fire into the hex.
If the LOS to a target hex becomes ob-
structed (8+ HPT DRM) after an FO places
an FFE, the battery may still fire normally
(e.g., smoke FFE is placed); the FO may
not shift an existing CFF out of that hex
until the HPT DRM is seven or less (i.e., a
new CFF may be placed instead).
12.11.34 FO Movement & Melee—If an FO
moves, including Infiltration (and taking part
in Melee), an existing CFF/FFE it placed
remains in its current hex.
12.11.35 Leaders as FOs—Leaders (and FOs
assigned to other batteries) may call in Bar-
rage attacks (see 12.12.62) regardless of
whether or not the firing battery has an
assigned FO. Leaders may not function as
an FO for ANY other purpose (and do not
receive the additional Spotting Range of
12.11.331). Mark leaders that call in Bar -
rages with ‘F’ markers, except when in Full
cover or hidden (make a side note instead).
12.11.4 Observation Post (OP) Vehicles
FOs may spot while being transported by
vehicles. When an FO is adjusting fire from
an OP vehicle, the vehicle may not move or
fire any turret weapons that turn. An FO
may not adjust fire from a Suppressed ve-
hicle or when transported in ASSAULT cover
(i.e., riding ON a tank).
12.11.41 Loading/Unloading —An FO
loads/unloads from a vehicle normally. When
loaded on an AFV or APC, the FO is INSIDE
the vehicle; remove the FO counter from
the map and make a side note of the FO’s
OP Vehicle. An FO using a truck as an OP
vehicle adheres to all normal passenger
rules.
12.11.42 OP AFV/APC K-KILL, Bail Out,
& F-KILL —Eliminate FOs when their OP
AFV/APC is K-KILLed. For a Bail Out re-
sult, place the FO in the hex in which the
vehicle rolled the Bail Out. If a vehicle is
forced to exit due to an F-KILL, remove the
FO from play.

The example at left depicts the limitations

of the starboard side machine-gun turret
on the A9 (and A9 CS) cruiser tank. The
‘4’ Gunfire Factors of the starboard side
bow machine-gun may fire into any hex
marked with a ‘B’. It may NOT fire into
any hex marked with an ‘A’. The port side
machine-gun is likewise restricted, with
a ‘mirror image’ to the left of the AFV as
regards ‘A’ and ‘B’ marked hexes.

The example above right serves two purposes. It depicts the eligible hexes for machine-gun fire using the ‘A’ and ‘B’ method from the above example.
It also depicts the LIMIT the machine-gun sub-turret on an A9 may turn. In this example the starboard side turret is shown. The port side turret is treated
in the same manner, transposing all ‘A’ and ‘B’ marked hexes in a ‘mirror image’ to the other side of the AFV.
Thus, the machine-gun sub-turrets in an A9 (and A9 CS) cruiser tank may not pivot their facing more than one hexspine AND each sub-turret may
ONLY pivot to the side it is on, i.e., the port sub-turret may only turn to the left and the starboard (depicted in the example) to the right.
Note also the machine-gun sub-turrets on an A9 pay +1 for each hexspine pivoted when changing facing to fire. In keeping with the ‘chrome’ provided
in the ATS in the form of model-specific turret markers, a supply of A9 turrets is provided with TOBRUK EXPANSION #1: Wavell’s 30,000.

40
12.12 OFF-BOARD ARTILLERY SUPPORT
Many factors influencing a tactical battle
occur beyond the physical limits of the map.
Off-Board Artillery (OBA) rules represents
Indirect Fire from artillery batteries located
off-map. OBA is not represented on map
except for their FO counters and CFF/FFE
markers. OBA support is only provided by
SSR. Players fire their OBA batteries dur-
ing the Indirect Fire Segment using alter -
nating impulses. There is no limit to the
number of attacks an OBA battery may
make during a scenario.
12.12.1 Registration
SSRs may provide one or more ‘Registra-
tions’ for an OBA battery or on-map gun. A
registration is a target hex the battery or
gun has ‘ranged’ and may hit more easily.
Before play begins, but after all set up, play-
ers make a side note of their registered tar-
get hexes and the battery/gun to which they
belong. Players may not change registration
hexes or battery/gun assignments after play
begins.
12.12.11 Registration DRM—When OBA
targets a registration hex, apply a -20 DRM
to the roll on the Accuracy Diagram (IA).
12.12.2 Attack Routine
OBA batteries may fire HE or smoke (see
6.4.4). Use the following routine to make
an OBA attack:
a) Make Battery Contact by rolling less than
or equal to the Battery Contact number (Ex-
ception: Barrage attacks do NOT require a
contact roll). See 12.12.3;
b) Place a Call for Fire (CFF) marker in the
intended target hex and announce the type
of ammunition employed (HE or smoke) (see
12.12.4);
c) Make a roll on the Accuracy Diagram (IA)
using two dice. Align the chart in any man-
ner so players agree on the direction it faces
on the game map. Roll two dice, one for
‘tens’ and the other for ‘ones’. Apply any
applicable Registration DRM AND DRM for
obscuring terrain along the LOS between
the FO and the target hex; modifiers that
create results less than one are treated as
a roll of ‘1’.
d) Move the CFF to its final hex. If the final
hex (or an adjacent hex) has one or more
locations within the FO’s LOS that contain
enemy units the owning player MUST flip it
to its Fire for Effect (FFE) side (even if the
attack will also affect friendly units); other-
wise, it remains a CFF and the impulse is
over;
e) Resolve attacks as specified in 12.11.2;
FFE also attack any units (friendly and en-
emy) in its multi-hex blast area and that later
enter any attacked FFE hex;
f) Flip the FFE back to its CFF side during
the End of Turn Segment.
12.12.3 Battery Contact
The Accuracy Diagram provides a Battery
Contact number for each nationality. A Bat-
tery Contact roll must be made each turn a
player wishes to place a new CFF, new FFE,
or move an existing CFF. Roll a die, and
apply any ammunition supply DRM. If the
modified result is greater than the Battery
Contact number, the FO may not place a
new CFF marker, and must remove a previ-
ously placed CFF marker.
12.12.31 Ammunition Supply DRM
A battery may have a level of ‘ammunition
supply’ designated by SSR. If a battery has
‘High Ammunition Supply’, apply a -1 DRM
to its Battery Contact rolls; ‘Low Ammuni-
tion Supply’, generates a +1 DRM
12.12.4 Results out of FO’s LOS—Once
an FFE has been resolved a newly-flipped
CFF is removed during the End of Turn
Segment if it is outside of the LOS of its
FO. For the purposes of seeing a CFF (after
initial placement; the FO must be able to
see a location of the hex it wishes to place a
CFF in), a CFF is considered to rise to a
‘blast height’ +20 levels higher than the
ground level of the target hex (or the high-
est obstacle level of a building hex entirely
surrounded by building hexes of the same
building).
12.12.41 FFE Lands Out of Play—If a CFF/
FFE lands out of the playing area (i.e., off
map or beyond the playing area listed for a
scenario) it is immediately removed from
play UNLESS one or more of the hexes at-
tacked by an FFE are IN play.
12.12.5 Using an Existing CFF Marker—
An FO may use an existing CFF placed dur-
ing a previous turn. However, it may not be
placed OR REMAIN in a hex that has no
location within the LOS of the FO. Thus, if
the CFF blast height is the ONLY part of
the current hex within the FO’s LOS, the
CFF must be moved to a hex with an in-
LOS location and is further subject to the
following:
a) Use CFF in current or adjacent hex: Do
not make an accuracy roll when a CFF
marker remains in its current hex, or moves
to an adjacent hex within the FO’s LOS. The
CFF simply remains in its hex or is moved
to an adjacent hex and attacks normally,
assuming no other limitations prohibit use
(e.g., failed contact die roll; newly blocked
LOS).
b) Move CFF two to six hexes: Apply a -20
DRM to the accuracy roll. This DRM is NOT
cumulative with a Registration DRM.
c) Move CFF seven hexes or more: Roll for
accuracy as if newly placing a CFF.
12.12.6 Types of OBA Attacks
There are four types of OBA attacks: Con-
centration, Barrage, Line Barrage, and Roll-
ing Barrage, the last three provided by SSR.
12.12.61 Concentration—Attack all units
in the FFE hex and adjacent hexes (7 hexes
total).
12.12.62 Barrage—A Barrage requires the
use of a Registration hex. Do not roll for
Battery Contact or place a CFF; simply place
the FFE in the Registration hex. Roll for
accuracy and place the FFE in its final hex.
Attack all units in the FFE hex and within
two hexes of the FFE hex (19 hexes total).
12.12.63 Line Barrage—Attack a line of
seven adjacent hexes, centered on the FFE
marker (three on each side). A Line Barrage
is otherwise identical to a Barrage (e.g., no
contact needed, and requires a Registration
hex). Place the barrage FFE and two Bar -
rage Limit markers (one in each of the end
hexes of the seven-hex string of the Line
Barrage) and attack units in these seven
hexes ONLY.
12.12.64 Rolling Barrage—A Rolling Bar-
41
rage is a Line Barrage that has the follow-
ing movement rules.
12.12.641 Movement—The seven-hex long
barrage must be set up in keeping with a
map orientation listed in the SSR providing
the rolling barrage capability. The SSR will
also state how many turns the barrage
moves forward, how many hexes per turn,
and in what direction if accurate. A Rolling
Barrage only attacks the hexes in its line
after it moves, not all those between the
two lines. A Rolling Barrage moves and at-
tacks FIRST during the Indirect Fire Seg-
ment.
12.12.642 Accuracy and Duration—A Roll-
ing Barrage never flips to its CFF side. As
long as it is in play, its FFE and end-hex
markers remain on the map. During the End
of Turn Segment of the turn it is to be ‘lifted’
(removed permanently), a Battery Contact
roll must be made for removal. Otherwise,
the Rolling Barrage continues into the next
turn, when another lift attempt must be
made, and so on. Until lifted, the Rolling
Barrage continues to move and attack. It
does not roll for accuracy after an initial
accuracy roll when its FFE is first placed.
Note: The Registration DRM no longer ap-
plies once a Rolling Barrage has moved from
a Registration hex.
12.13 COUNTER-BATTERY FIRE
OBA (and aircraft; see 12.16.9) may con-
duct ‘counter-battery fire’ to engage enemy
OBA and attempt to interrupt their fire.
Counter -battery fire takes place during the
Indirect Fire Segment.
12.13.1 Battery Limits
Batteries may only use counter-battery fire
against certain types of enemy OBA. Con-
sult the Off-Board Counter -Battery Matrix
(CB) to determine counter -battery fire eligi-
bility.
12.13.2 Counter-Battery Effects and Pro-
cedure
Counter -battery fire does not destroy en-
emy OBA; it temporarily neutralizes their
fire.
12.13.21 Locating Enemy OBA—Enemy
batteries must be located before they may
be affected by counter -battery fire. Only
enemy OBA that fires (i.e., places a FFE)
during a turn may be located in that turn.
Locating attempts are conducted at the end
of the Indirect Fire Segment in which the
enemy OBA fires. Roll one die for each en-
emy battery that fired. A die roll of 1-2 means
the enemy battery has been located. Once
located, an enemy battery remains located
for the remainder of the game. Make a side
note or use the provided markers.
12.13.22 Acquisition—A friendly battery
may initiate counter -battery fire against lo-
cated enemy OBA as an attack during the
Indirect Fire Segment. Counter -battery fire
has a two-turn acquisition procedure. At the
beginning of the second turn after declar -
ing counter -battery fire, the enemy OBA is
neutralized and may not fire. Make a side
note or use the provided markers to indi-
cate this status.
12.13.23 Duration—Batteries remain neu-
tralized while the counter -battery fire is
maintained, and for two turns after it ends.
If the friendly battery resumes counter -bat-
tery fire, it must re-acquire (via 12.13.22)
the target OBA. Once a friendly battery is
no longer maintaining counter -battery fire,
it may be used normally. Markers are pro-
vided to make note of the status of locating
and neutralizing enemy OBA.
12.14 OVERRUN
Overrun attacks take place when a non-F-
KILLed AFV/APC/Armed truck enters a hex
occupied by enemy Personnel or weapons
and declares an Overrun attack. Overrun
has no effect on other unit types.
12.14.1 Overrun Attack Routine
Use the following routine to make an Over-
run attack:
a) Impulse player moves an eligible vehicle
into an enemy-occupied hex using Assault
Movement and places an Overrun marker
(see 12.14.3);
b) Vehicle spends an additional MP in the
target hex for each unit/unmanned weapon
it wishes to overrun;
c) Eligible units may use Opportunity Fire
against the vehicle (see 12.14.4);
d) Eligible H weapons in the target hex may
execute Final Defensive Fire (see 12.14.5);
e) If the vehicle does not suffer a K-KILL,
M-KILL, or Bail Out due to Opportunity or
Final Defensive Fire (or due to Immobiliza-
tion upon entering a hex requiring a roll on
the Immobilization Table), resolve the Over-
run attack (see 12.14.6);
f) The vehicle may end its impulse in the
target hex or, if eligible, exit the hex and
continue its movement impulse. It may con-
duct additional Overrun attacks against
other hexes (see 12.14.7).
12.14.2 Assault Fire Restriction
Overrunning vehicles may conduct Assault
Fire before entering an enemy hex; upon
entering an enemy hex, the overrunning
vehicle may not fire any weapons for the
remainder of its movement impulse.
12.14.3 Movement into an Enemy Hex
Vehicles that conduct overruns must use
Assault movement. After entering an enemy-
occupied hex, the vehicle must pass any
required check on the Immobilization Table
for terrain in the hex. It may then place an
Overrun marker and spend one additional
MP for each Personnel unit and un-manned
H weapon it wishes to Overrun. A vehicle
in an enemy-occupied hex is not required
to conduct an Overrun, nor must it Over -
run all eligible enemy units.
12.14.4 Opportunity Fire vs. Overrunning
Vehicle
Enemy units may use Opportunity Fire
against an Overrunning vehicle for each MP
it uses in the target hex. Opportunity Fire
attacks that do not use the HPT affect all
units in the Overrun location (friendly and
enemy), even those not targeted by the
Overrun attack.
12.14.41 Personnel Fire Restriction —A
Personnel unit may use Opportunity Fire or
Direct Fire vs. a same-hex vehicle only if it
is otherwise eligible to fire. It may NOT fire
outside of its location while an enemy ve-
hicle is within.
12.14.5 Final Defensive Fire
H weapons in an Overrun hex may use a
restricted form of Opportunity Fire against
the overrunning vehicle. An H weapon may
fire one ‘Final Defensive Fire’ HPT shot (only
HPT) at the Overrunning vehicle as long as
the weapon does NOT have to pivot to face
the hex the Overrunning vehicle used to
enter the H weapon’s hex. H weapons may
take a Final Defensive Fire shot even when
already marked as fired, if otherwise eli-
gible to fire. Prior to making the Final De-
fensive Fire HPT roll (but prior to resolving
the Overrun attack) a die roll is made—on a
roll of 5-0, mark the H weapon with an F-
KILL marker, following which ONE HPT to
hit die roll may be made. On a roll of 1-4, a
surviving H weapon is free to use Final
Defensive Fire against new Overrun attacks
by the same or other enemy vehicles. Final
Defensive Fire applies a +2 HPT DRM.
12.14.6 Overrun Resolution
12.14.61 Overrun vs. Personnel—Overrun
attacks affect targeted Personnel (to include
crews manning H weapons) by causing them
to take a morale check. Apply a -4 Morale
modifier for each vehicle Overrunning the
Personnel unit that turn, to a maximum
modifier of -8 in any one turn (one Overrun
marker indicates a -4 modifier; two mark-
ers indicate a -8 modifier). This modifier is
cumulative with other Morale Table modifi-
ers (Exception: Do not count the Overrun-
ning vehicle; the -4 modifier accounts for
it). An Overrun Morale modifier remains in
force for the remainder of the turn, even
after the Overrunning vehicle has exited the
hex, at which time enemy vehicles once again
affect MV of a Personnel unit for any mo-
rale checks not caused by an Overrun. Units
that fail the MC are broken, but they do not
surrender solely due to the overrunning
vehicle being in their hex. Already broken
units that fail a morale check due to over-
run surrender.
12.14.62 Overrun vs. Weapons— Automati-
cally eliminate any H weapon, and any un-
possessed L/M weapons not in FULL cover
under an Emplacement marker, that an over-
running FULLY TRACKED AFV/APC (only;
not Truck type, halftrack or wheeled) at-
tacks.
12.14.621 Track Damage—When a fully
tracked AFV/APC destroys an H weapon in
an Overrun, there is a chance of track
breakage. After resolving the Overrun, roll
a die for each H weapon eliminated. On a
die roll of ‘1’, the AFV/APC is M-KILLed in
the target hex; check for Bail Out normally.
12.14.7 Vehicle Ends Impulse in Overrun
Hex
If the vehicle ends its impulse in the Over-
run hex, all Personnel and weapon units in
the overrun location may not move out of
the location during the remainder of that
turn’s Fire & Movement Segment, make a
Grenade attack, or Infiltrate out of the hex.
They may engage the vehicle in Melee nor-
mally. Units that broke as a result of an
Overrun attack may attempt to rally even if
the vehicle remains in the location at the
end of the End of Turn Segment. A hex with
an overrunning enemy vehicle does not af-
fect units in another in-hex location, i.e.,
outside of the Overrun location UNLESS ALL
positions/locations of the hex are consid-
ered ONE for stacking purposes (e.g., Wadi).
Personnel and vehicles may move and fire
normally the following turn unless the ve-
hicle declares it is continuing the Overrun
as per 12.14.71. Personnel firing at a same-
42
hex enemy vehicle must adhere to
12.14.41.
12.14.71 Continuing Overruns—After com-
pleting an Overrun attack, a vehicle may
Overrun the same location the next turn by
remaining in the hex and announcing Con-
tinued movement during the End of Turn
Segment. Do not remove the Overrun
marker during the End of Turn Segment.
The same vehicle cannot overrun the same
unit more than once during the same im-
pulse. If a vehicle does NOT declare a con-
tinued Overrun, it must exit the hex and
re-enter to Overrun it again during the fol-
lowing turn.
12.15 CLOSE ASSAULT
During the Close Assault Segment, eligible
Personnel units may Infiltrate OR conduct
Grenade Attacks. Players make a roll to
determine which side receives the Initiative
at the start of the Infiltration Phase. The
Close Assault Segment consists of the Infil-
tration Phase and the Melee Phase.
12.15.1 Infiltration
Even if marked as moved or fired, a Per -
sonnel unit (or stack of Personnel units in
the SAME location) that is otherwise capable
of moving may Infiltrate as follows:
a) Move into an accessible location of the
same hex or an adjacent hex;
b) Move under or on top of an emplacement
counter;
c) See 11.5.5 for Passengers.
Notes: A unit may Infiltrate into an adjacent
hex but may NOT move under an emplace-
ment in the newly entered hex. A unit may
not enter an adjacent building hex at ground
level AND move to a higher level of newly
entered hex.
12.15.2 Grenade Attacks
Personnel units may make grenade attacks
against accessible ADJACENT enemy units
during the Infiltration Phase if the Person-
nel unit meets the following criteria:
a) It did not fire during the Combat Seg-
ment;
b) It is otherwise eligible to fire; (it may be
marked as Moved and still make a grenade
attack);
c) It did not Infiltrate in the current Infiltra-
tion Phase;
d) It is not in a location containing an en-
emy vehicle (see 12.14.7);
e) The target location is not more than level
+10 higher than the attacking unit’s loca-
tion.
12.15.21 Grenade Attack Routine—Use the
following routine, including c-e, below, to
conduct grenade attacks:
a) The impulse player selects the attacking
units, indicates the target location, and an-
nounces the type of weapons employed;
b) Calculate the attack’s FRAG factors:
Grenades: Multiply the Stacking Points of
the unit by THREE. Deduct any Stacking
Points for carried weapons. Personnel units
in the SAME location may combine their
FRAG Factors for one attack, or may use
their FRAG Factors separately to attack dif-
ferent hexes (noting only ONE impulse is
used per location of attacking units);
Satchel Charge: Attacks with 20 FRAG fac-
tors (see 12.15.22). May also be used to
seal CAVE DUGOUT emplacements (see
9.6.65).
Gammon Bomb: Adds four FRAG factors a Grenade attack that includes a Gammon ready in the location due to entering during

to a normal Grenade attack (see 12.15.23); Bomb also places a FLAME marker in the an earlier segment or turn);

c) If the attack includes a Satchel Charge, target location if in applicable terrain. b) Additional units from both sides may In-

one enemy Personnel unit may attempt Hurl 12.15.3 Melee vs. Personnel filtrate into the Melee location. If an enemy

Back (see 12.15.24); Whenever a Personnel unit enters a loca- Personnel unit infiltrates into the Melee lo-

d) Resolve the attack (see 12.15.25); tion occupied by an enemy Personnel unit, cation, Melee may not be conducted against

e) Place Rubble and Flame markers as ap- they must Melee (i.e., engage in hand-to- the vehicle (see 12.15.42);

propriate (see 12.15.26-27). hand combat). All Personnel units in the c) If the enemy vehicle is an unarmed truck

12.15.22 Satchel Charges—Some scenarios Melee location must take part in the Melee. without passengers, the Personnel unit cap-

provide Satchel Charges in a specific quan- 12.15.31 Melee vs. Personnel Attack Rou- tures the truck (see 12.15.43);

tity by SSR. Each Satchel Charge may be tine— Use the following routine to engage d) In the Melee Phase, attacking units con-

used only once, and is not assigned to a in Melee vs. Personnel: duct Melee vs. vehicle morale checks (see

specific unit. A Personnel unit eligible to a) The impulse player moves Personnel units 12.15.44);

make a Grenade Attack may instead make into an enemy-occupied location during the e) Resolve Melee by calculating the Melee

a Satchel Charge attack. A unit making a Infiltration Phase and places a Melee marker Value (MV) of each attacking unit (or unit

Satchel Charge attack may not combine this in the location; plus leader combination) and rolling a die;

attack with other attacks taking place dur- b) Additional units from both sides may In- if the die roll is less than or equal to the

ing the impulse. filtrate into the Melee location (there is no final MV, the attack is successful (see

12.15.221 Engineer Use—A Personnel unit penalty for overstacking); 12.15.45);

designated as a ‘Combat Engineer’ by SSR c) Resolve Melee attacks by calculating a f) If an attack against a vehicle carrying

receives a 2R modifier when using a Satchel ratio of GF Factors for each side and rolling Passengers is not successful, the Passen-

Charge. a die on the Melee Table (see 12.15.35); gers unload. A Melee vs. Personnel then

12.15.222 Satchel Charge Counters— d) Recalculate the Melee odds at the new takes place (see 12.15.46).

Satchel Charge counters are provided in strength levels for surviving participants and 12.15.42 Enemy Personnel in Location—
some ATS scenario OOBs. A scenario will conduct another round of Melee. Continue Melee vs. a vehicle cannot occur if there

list the total number of Satchel Charges that until one side is eliminated; are non-transported enemy Personnel units

may be used during play in a side’s OOB e) If there is more than one Melee hex in in the same location as the vehicle, to in-

portion of the scenario card; these counters play, they are resolved in the order they clude when enemy units Infiltrate into a lo-

are simply used as markers during Satchel were initiated or by mutual player consent. cation in which a Melee marker has already

Charge attacks and their reference in the 12.15.32 Frozen In Melee—All enemy units been placed. Instead of attacking the ve-

OOB serves the same purpose as SSR in- in a location with a Melee marker may not hicle, use the routine outlined in 12.15.31

formation. Infiltrate, or make a Grenade/Satchel to resolve the Melee vs. Personnel (Person-

12.15.23 Gammon Bombs —Some sce- Charge attack. Units in a bunker may use nel friendly to the vehicle are the defender).

narios provide Gammon Bombs by SSR. Infiltration to exit the bunker and move into Even if the enemy Personnel units are elimi-

Each Gammon Bomb may be used only once, a Melee location in the hex. nated in the Melee, no Melee attack takes

and is not assigned to a specific unit. Use 12.15.33 Attacker and Defender Designa- place against the vehicle.

of a Gammon Bomb adds to an otherwise tion—The player that first enters the en- 12.15.43 Trucks— A Personnel unit (of any
normal Grenade Attack and has additional emy hex is the attacker. The other player is size) may automatically capture an unarmed

effects against terrain and vehicles. the defender. Place all attacker units on top truck when it Infiltrates into the truck’s lo-

12.15.24 Hurl Back —An eligible enemy of defender units. cation. The capturing player simply takes

Personnel unit in an attacked hex may at- 12.15.34 Melee vs. Personnel Resolution— control of the vehicle. If the truck is armed

tempt to ‘Hurl Back’ a Satchel Charge prior Total each side’s Personnel Gunfire Factors or carrying Passengers, resolve Melee in the

to the attack’s resolution. If the Hurl Back in the Melee location. Use only the GF same manner as vs. an Open Topped ve-

roll is successful, the Satchel Charge in- printed on Personnel units; reduce GF for hicle. If there are non-passenger enemy

stead affects the attacking unit’s location. Casualty markers, but NOT for carried Personnel units in an unarmed truck’s lo-

If the Hurl Back fails, the unit that at- weapons. State the totals as a ratio, attacker- cation, resolve as Melee vs. Personnel. The

tempted Hurl Back suffers an ADDITIONAL t o - d e f e n d e r, and round down in the side that wins captures the truck.

1R modifier (this additional modifier does defender’s favor to obtain a ratio that con- 12.15.44 Melee vs. Vehicle Morale Check—
not affect other units in the target location forms to the columns on the Melee Table Personnel units conducting Melee vs. a ve-

or rubble creation) on the Casualty Table. (ME). If Melee odds are worse than 1 to 2 hicle must undergo a morale check. There

Hurl back attacks do not receive Engineer or greater than 4 to 1 (after rounding), au- are NO modifiers to morale EXCEPT those

2R shifts. tomatically eliminate the weaker side. provided by LEADERS (i.e., use the unit’s

12.15.241 Hurl Back Die Roll—To be suc- 12.15.351 Melee Casualties—Roll one die. printed morale). A leader may affect ALL

cessful, a Hurl Back die roll must be less Cross-index the roll on the appropriate Me- friendly Personnel units in a location that

than or equal to the Stacking Point value of lee Table column. The result is each side’s are making a Melee vs. Vehicle Morale

ONE of the Personnel units being attacked casualties. Check. If the morale check is unsuccess-

(owning player’s choice of unit). There may Example: A roll of 9 on the 4 to 1 column ful, mark the failing Personnel unit as Bro-

be only one Hurl Back attempt per Satchel results in a ‘AC1 | DC2.’ This means the ken; they may NOT attack and remain Bro-

attack. attacker sustains one casualty and the de- ken in their current location.

12.15.25 Grenade Attack Resolution — fender sustains two. The owning player may 12.15.45 Melee vs. Vehicle Resolution—
Resolve grenade/Satchel Charge/Gammon distribute casualties in any manner. Melee resolution involves a comparison be-

Bomb attacks as follows: 12.15.4 Melee vs. Vehicles tween an attacking unit’s Melee Value (MV)

a) Resolution vs. Personnel: Use the ap- Personnel have a chance of destroying AFVs, and a die roll. Personnel units always at-

propriate column on the GF|FRAG row on APCs, and armed Trucks, or capturing un- tack vehicles separately, but a leader can

the Casualty Table, applying applicable shifts armed Trucks in their location. A vehicle aid an attack. Not all Personnel in a hex

from the Cover State Effects Table; may undergo more than one Melee attack must take part, but all units that declare an

b) Resolution vs. other units: Use the in a segment, noting Personnel units may attack and pass their morale check MUST

Small Arms (GF) vs. Vehicles and H Weap- not combine their MVs against vehicles and attack.

ons Table (see 12.5.8). must attack separately. 12.15.451 Melee Value (MV)—The MV of a
12.15.26 Satchel Charge Rubble and Flame 12.15.41 Melee vs. Vehicles Attack Rou- Personnel unit is equal to its Stacking Points.

Creation —Satchel Charge attacks create tine—Use the following routine to engage Modify the MV in the order specified be-

Rubble and Flame in the same manner as in Melee vs. a Vehicle: low:

an HE attack (see 8.3.9). a) The impulse player Infiltrates Personnel a) Courage—Double the MV if the Person-

12.15.27 Gammon Bomb Flame Cre- units into an enemy vehicle’s location and nel unit (including any accompanying leader)

ation—Any Casualty Table die roll of ‘1’ by places a Melee marker (or a vehicle is al- is marked with a Courage marker;

43
b) CT AFV and APC —If the attacked ve- MGs. SSR may allow aircraft to exchange aircraft in its current hex (see 12.16.6);

hicle is a close-topped (CT) AFV/APC, HALVE bombs for Napalm. Aircraft counters may d) If there are any units within three hexes

the MV, rounding fractions up; also be used to represent unarmed OBA of the target, determine if an Accidental At-

c) Moving Vehicle—If the attacked vehicle Spotter planes. A GF on the counter indi- tack occurs (see 12.16.7);

is MOVING, HALVE the MV, rounding frac- cates the aircraft is armed with MG (e.g., e) If no Accidental Attack occurs, roll on the

tions up. Thus, an attack against a moving the P-47 has a -|10 MG denoting a fixed Aerial Accuracy Chart (NR) and place the

Close Topped AFV/APC would be QUAR- CA machine-gun that may only fire along its aircraft in the resulting Final Target Hex;

TERED, (halved, then halved again, then flight path). A Gun Size that uses a Gun f) Resolve the aircraft attack using the pro-

rounding fractions up); value of A-B indicates an aircraft is armed cedures for each type of attack (see

d) Leader—Add two to the MV for an ac- with cannon (e.g., the Russian IL 2M has a 12.16.8). Attacks against hexes [e.g., open

companying officer and one for an NCO (AND 37|B cannon). A Gun Size that uses Gun ground] that are empty and otherwise do

double the MV of the non-leader Personnel values of C-D indicates ROCKET armament not contain terrain subject to rubble or

unit if the leader is marked with a Courage (e.g., the 127|D F4U-4; see 12.16.824). flame, are ignored;

marker); this MV addition is applied even The SSR may also specify an aircraft is g) Place Cease Fire markers on attacked H

for leaders that assisted in Melee vs. Ve- armed with Napalm (see 12.16.812). and M weapons (see 12.16.83);

hicle Morale Checks; 12.16.1 Entry and Duration h) Remove the aircraft from the board (un-

e) Explosives—Add two to the MV for an Aircraft enter the game on the first turn less it has unused weapons remaining, in

available Satchel Charge, or one for a unless specified otherwise by SSR. Ground- which case it may attack during a subse-

Gammon Bomb (not both). Vehicles may not attack aircraft are available on the turn of quent impulse [or a later turn unless re-

attempt to Hurl Back Satchel Charges; entry and are removed (not eliminated; they moved due to time limit on board]).

f) High Morale—Add one to the MV if ALL are assumed to return to their base) when- 12.16.4 Placement
attacking Personnel units (e.g., two 7|5|8 ever they have dropped all available ord- When not attacking, place aircraft aside, out

squads + an accompanying 1|1|8 leader) nance or SSR-specified Napalm has been of play. They may not be attacked in any

have a printed (i.e., the value printed on used or after two turns have elapsed after manner when out of play.

the counter; not modified) Morale Value of their FIRST attack, whichever comes first. 12.16.41 Aircraft Placement for ALL
eight or greater; Spotter aircraft remain in play as long as Ground Attacks—Align the Aerial Accuracy
g) Combat Engineer—Add one to the MV if their battery is available to place a CFF or Chart (Table NR) with the intended target

the attacking Personnel unit(s) (i.e., either make a barrage attack, or until shot down. hex (even if making a bomb attack) and the

the Personnel unit or an accompanying 12.16.11 Off-Board Interceptors—In any flight path chosen, place the aircraft in the

leader) is specified by SSR to be Combat scenario that has Interceptors provided by intended target hex and announce the type

Engineers. SSR, roll one die for each group of three of attack to be made. This represents the

12.15.452 Attack Resolution—Roll one die, enemy aircraft entering the game. A die roll completion of step ‘a’ above. Each aircraft

and compare the result to the MV. of 1 means that group has been intercepted may only bomb one hex per turn, but other

a) Result is less than or equal to half the en route to the target and may not enter the forms of armament (e.g., rockets; Napalm;

MV: K-KILL the vehicle and replace it with game (they are not destroyed for victory point strafing) may attack multiple hexes during

a burning wreck; purposes). one aircraft attack impulse. Aircraft may not

b) Result is less than the MV: K-KILL the 12.16.12 Aircraft Impulse Use—One air - choose a target in a hex for bomb attack

vehicle and replace it with a non-burning craft may use multiple impulses during the that has friendly units in any of the hex’s

wreck (Exception: If an attack uses a same turn, one to make a strafing attack, locations within LOS of the aircraft.

Gammon Bomb, all K-KILLs result in burn- and yet another to use Cannon or rockets 12.16.42 Flight Path—An aircraft’s flight
ing wrecks); on the HPT. However, only ONE of each path is the row of hexes immediately along

c) Result equals the MV: M-KILL the ve- type of attack may be made per turn and the hexgrain in front of and behind an air -

hicle and roll for Bail Out; ONLY MG and cannon GF may be combined craft once placed. This is the path of the

d) Result is greater than the MV: the ve- in the same strafing attack. Note: MG and aircraft’s movement across the map.

hicle is unaffected. rockets may be used during the same im- 12.16.5 On-Board Interceptors
12.15.46 Melee & Passengers/Riders — pulse, along the same flight path. If both sides have ground-attack aircraft,

Passengers cannot participate in Melee. 12.16.2 Aircraft LOS the non-impulse player may declare that one

Eliminate them if their vehicle is K-KILLed. Aircraft have a LOS to all hexes on the map or more of his aircraft will make an Inter-

If their vehicle survives the Melee attack, a except: ceptor attack after the impulse player de-

modified Melee vs. Personnel takes place a) Any Woods hex entirely surrounded by clares an aircraft attack. Stukas (and any

as follows: adjacent Woods/building hexes; other aircraft denoted as ‘non interceptors’

a) Unload the Passengers (Exception: FOs b) A building hex entirely surrounded by by SSR) may not make Interceptor attacks.

do not unload) in the Melee location. The adjacent building/Woods hexes, unless the 12.16.51 Impulse Use—An Interceptor at-
unloaded Personnel units always represent target unit is on the roof or if the target hex tack is a form of Opportunity Fire, and does

the defender; and at least ONE adjacent hex is roofless not count as an impulse used. An aircraft

b) Resolve the Melee vs. Personnel. Defend- (i.e., aircraft have LOS to two adjacent that conducts an Interceptor attack may not

ing units defend at half their normal GF in roofless building hexes but not to one such conduct a normal Aircraft attack that turn

the first ‘round’ after they unload. If they hex); and is set aside after its use in the manner.

survive the first round, they use their nor- c) The cellar of a building. 12.16.52 On-Board Interceptor Resolu-
mal strength in any subsequent rounds; 12.16.3 Aircraft Attack Routine tion—Place one or more Interceptor aircraft
c) If the Passengers were in an unarmed Use the following routine to make an air - in the same hex as the attacking aircraft

truck, the side that wins the Melee controls craft attack: and roll a die for each Interceptor, applying

the truck. a) During the Aircraft Attacks portion of the results from Table C8 as follows:

12.15.47 Unsuccessful Melee vs. Vehicle— Indirect Fire Segment, the impulse player a) Die roll of 1: Eliminate the target aircraft;

Personnel and vehicles left in a hex follow- places an aircraft in its target hex for all b) Die roll 2-3: The target aircraft is driven

ing an unsuccessful Melee may move and forms of attacks and announces the weap- off. Remove intercepted aircraft from the

fire normally the following turn. Personnel ons/bombs that will make an attack; the map, but it may attack during a subsequent

firing at a same-hex enemy vehicle must aircraft also needs to face a specific turn;

adhere to 12.14.41. HEXSIDE representing the owning player’s c) Die roll 4+: Interceptor attack fails.

12.16 AIRCRAFT choice of ‘Flight Path’ (see 12.16.41); 12.16.53 DRM—Apply a -2 DRM when an
Some scenarios provide aircraft in the OOB b) The non-impulse player may declare that Interceptor without a bomb load attacks an

of one or both sides. Aircraft counters rep- one or more of his aircraft will attempt an aircraft with a bomb load. Apply a cumula-

resent ground-attack aircraft armed with a Interceptor attack (see 12.16.5); tive -1 DRM when an Interceptor attacks

combination of bombs, rockets, cannon, and c) Resolve all anti-aircraft fire against the a Stuka (or other SSR designated non-in-
terceptor).

44
12.16.6 Anti-Aircraft (AA) Fire non (using Semi-Automatic fire, noting the
hex, using it as the new target hex. After
Anti-aircraft fire is a form of Opportunity method for determining strafing PEN for
placing the aircraft for the accidental attack
Fire conducted during the Aircraft Attacks cannon, see 12.16.823) may use an impulse
the owning player chooses the flight path in
portion of the Indirect Fire Segment. Mark to make a strafing attack.
the new target hex. Following a roll on the
weapons that use AA fire with an ‘F’ marker 12.16.821 MG/Semi-Automatic Strafing—
Aerial Accuracy Chart (found on the Aerial
normally. During one impulse aircraft armed with MGs
Attack Diagrams [Table NR] on Play Aid #2)
12.16.61 Eligible Weapons—H|AA weap- may use their MG/Semi-Automatic (see 14.8)
the aircraft attacks using its originally an-
ons with a PRINTED AA VALUE (only), the GF to attack the target hex and a number
nounced armament.
AA machine-guns on Vehicles, and M|MGs of adjacent consecutive hexes along the flight
12.16.8 Aircraft Attack Resolution
are eligible to use AA fire if in a hex an air - path, traced forward from the final target
Aircraft may attack during one impulse us-
craft is eligible to attack (e.g., AA weapon is hex (found as per 12.16.3 ‘e’). The total
ing bombs OR strafing by MG/cannon, rock-
not surrounded by woods or building hexes; number of HEXES attacked by one ‘straf-
ets OR Napalm
see 12.16.2 a, b, and c). Note: some weap- ing run’ is equal to HALF the MG/Semi-Au-
12.16.81 Bomb Attacks —Some aircraft
ons that historically were anti-aircraft guns, tomatic GF for that aircraft (round fractions
have a bomb-load on their counter, listed in
such as the 88mm Flak 36, are not classi- down), noting ALL hexes are attacked by
HE factors. Two HE factors separated by
fied as AA Guns in ATS; these guns were the FULL MG/Semi-Automatic GF and if one
the ‘|’ pipes symbol indicates the aircraft
used for high-altitude anti-aircraft fire, type of attack exceeds the other, continue
has TWO sizes of bombs on board (referred
which is beyond the scope of the game. the attack into the additional hexes apply
to as ‘large’ and ‘small’ [or ‘bomblets’] with
12.16.611 Continued Movement —AA ONLY that weapon.
the smaller of the two ALWAYS to the right
weapons mounted on Vehicles that are Example: A P-47 10 GF MG strafes five hexes,
of the ‘pipes’ symbol. An ROF to the imme-
marked with a continued movement marker and each are attacked by 10 GF on the Ca-
diate right of the bomb-load indicates the
are NOT eligible to conduct AA fire. sualty Table.
TOTAL number of bombs, with ONE ROF
12.16.62 AA Range & ROF —An eligible 12.16.822 Aircraft Cannon HPT Use—Air -
always representing the large bomb and THE
weapon may attempt to ‘shoot down’ any craft cannon are treated in the same man-
REMAINDER representing bomblets. In the
enemy aircraft in any hex of its Flight Path ner as GUNS. All cannon-armed aircraft may
absence of bomblets, ROF represents mul-
that is within AA range. The maximum AA fire either HE or AP (and may use semi-
tiple large bombs.
range in hexes for each weapon is as fol- automatic fire, see 14.8) at the owning
Example: Stuka aircraft have a bomb load
lows: player’s option. When using the HPT to fire,
listed as 500|50 with a 5 ROF, indicating
a) Maximum range of 3 for M|MGs; check for Accidental Attack (12.16.7) ONLY
that this aircraft has one large bomb (500
b) Maximum range of 4 for 20mm AA H (i.e., they hit or miss the chosen target based
HE factors) and four smaller bombs (50 HE
weapons; on the HPT roll only).
factors each). In a bomb attack impulse, an
c) Maximum range of 8 for 37mm+ AA guns 12.16.8221 HPT Fire— Aircraft cannons
aircraft may drop its large bomb, or ALL
and is marked on all AA-eligible H weap- must apply a +3 HPT DRM to all HPT hit
smaller bombs, or all available bombs. There-
ons. attempts. All other target DRM are applied
fore, each Stuka may make, at most, two
A unit may fire at as many aircraft as its normally and the full ROF available to an
bombing attacks per game (although only
ROF will allow, but may fire at a particular aircraft cannon may be used against ANY
ONE bomb attack IMPULSE per turn).
ground-attack or Spotter aircraft only once targets within range, in LOS and along its
12.16.811 Bomb Attack Resolution—Air -
per aircraft attack impulse, in its current flight path using ONE impulse.
craft bombs attack all locations in the tar-
hex. 12.16.8222 Aircraft Range—When count-
get hex (similar to Indirect Fire; see 12.11.2)
12.16.63 Changing Covered Arc—An AA ing hexes to the target hex, count each hex
and are resolved as follows:
Gun may pivot any number of hexsides to outside the final target hex as TWO hexes
a) Conduct the actions in 12.16.3 until step
bring an aircraft into the Gun’s covered arc. for the purposes of ALL range calculation.
‘f’ is reached;
However, this CA change does NOT gener - 12.16.823 Aircraft Attack vs. Vehicles
b) Attack the FINAL target hex by making a
ate HPT DRM. Resolution—Resolve hits from aircraft can-
roll directly on the Casualty Table for EACH
12.16.64 AA Fire Resolution—Resolve AA non vs. vehicle targets using the Attack
bomb (e.g., four rolls on the ‘50’ column
fire by rolling a die on the Anti-Aircraft Fire Routine for Guns (12.5.2). Modify routine
[same as 6 GF] for a Stuka bomb attack
Table (C5), applying a +1 DRM if the firing as follows:
using the four ‘50’ bombs or once on the
weapon is an M|MG, and apply the results a) Deck Armor: To reflect the thinner Deck
‘200+’ [same as 50 GF and noting the Heavy
as follows: Armor on close-topped AFVs and APCs, dis-
Payload DRM] AND four times on the ‘50’
a) Die roll of 1: Eliminate the aircraft; regard the Vehicle’s AF for the aspect and
columns), using the appropriate HE column
b) Die roll of 2-3: The aircraft is driven off; facing hit. Instead, HALVE the target’s low-
and applying appropriate column shifts for
remove from play with no attack made; Note: est AF (rounded down to a minimum of ‘0’).
terrain and emplacements. if the hex is de-
Driven off aircraft are not considered elimi- ALL OT vehicles (including AFVs) have Deck
void of units, roll on the Casualty Table
nated for Victory Point purposes and may Armor of 0. All trucks have ‘Deck Armor’ of
ONLY if there is any terrain that may be
be used again during a subsequent turn; -1.
affected by rubble or flame results; note
c) Die roll of 4-9: The aircraft may make its Example: a CT AFV with a 2 as its lowest AF
the DRM for Heavy Payloads;
attack, but must add a +10 DRM on the uses Deck Armor of 1; a 5 lowest AF pro-
c) For Vehicles and H weapons in the target
Aerial Accuracy Chart (NR) (or the Accuracy duces Deck Armor of 2.
hex, refer Casualty Table results to the In-
Diagram [IA] for the CFF/FFE placed by b) Strafing PEN: For MG, use the MG PEN
direct HE | FFE | Aircraft Bomb Attacks
Spotter aircraft). of ‘1’ when strafing. Cannon using semi-
vs. Vehicles and H Weapons Table (Table
d) Die roll of 0+: No effect on the aircraft’s automatic fire use HALF their normal PEN
C2, see 12.10.9).
attack. (noting the manner aircraft attack ranges
12.16.812 Napalm Strike—A Napalm Strike
12.16.7 Accidental Attack are calculated, see 12.16.822). Both attacks
is available by SSR only. If available, air -
If there are any on-board units, friendly or use Deck Armor AF for an attacked vehicle.
craft may exchange their bomb load for
enemy, within three hexes of the target hex 12.16.824 Rocket Armed—Rocket-armed
Napalm. A Napalm Strike attacks ALL units
and within the aircraft’s LOS, roll a die. On aircraft uses their armament in the same
in all locations of three adjacent hexes (the
a roll of ‘1’, the aircraft has mistaken the manner as Aircraft Cannon on the HPT (Ex-
Final Hex and the next two adjacent hexes
target. Align the Accuracy Diagram (IA) with ception: Rockets are considered HE only)
along its Flight Direction) in the same man-
the target hex and make a roll. If the result and may use Aerial Rocket Strike and Rocket
ner as a Flamethrower (i.e., 30 GF and no
is a hex that contains ANY units of EITHER Strafe attacks (owning player’s choice). MGs
terrain shifts). Each aircraft may only make
side, the resulting hex becomes the NEW may also be fired by aircraft using rockets,
ONE Napalm Strike per scenario and is re-
target hex. Otherwise the OPPONENT may and MGs and cannon may be fired using
moved IMMEDIATELY after using Napalm.
choose the nearest hex (that contains ANY the same final target hex obtained as per
12.16.82 Strafing Attack—Ground-attack
units without reference to side) to the re- 12.16.821.
aircraft armed with machine-guns or can-
sulting hex and the aircraft is placed in THAT 12.16.8241 Aerial Rocket Attacks—When

45
not using the HPT an aircraft armed with
127|D Rocket Armament must attack in the
form of an Aerial Rocket Strafe OR Rocket
Strike.
a) Rocket Strafe—Each hex listed on the
AERIAL ROCKET STRAFE diagram receives
an attack by the quantity of FRAG Factors
listed for each hex. Treat Rocket FRAG in
the same manner as an HE FFE attack.
b) Rocket Strike—Each hex listed on the
AERIAL ROCKET STRIKE diagram receives
an attack by FRAG Factors listed for each
hex. Treat Rocket FRAG in the same man-
ner as an HE FFE attack.
12.16.83 Cease Fire—An aircraft attack (re-
gardless of outcome) forces all M and H
weapons in the target hex to cease fire for
that turn. Mark such units with a ‘Cease
Fire’ marker, and remove all BOT markers
they have placed. Also remove any BOT
markers placed by L|MTR or L|ATRs tar -
geted by aircraft attacks.
12.16.9 Aircraft Counter-Battery Attacks
Ground attack aircraft may make counter-
battery attacks against OBA batteries. Air-
craft assigned to counter -battery operations
may not make any on-board attacks. Re-
move them from play after they locate an
enemy OBA battery.
12.16.91 Aircraft Required—One aircraft
is required to make a counter -battery at-
tack against one enemy battery. More than
one aircraft may be assigned in order to
increase the likelihood of locating a battery.
12.16.92 Counter-Battery Attack Rou-
tine—To conduct a counter -battery attack,
use the following routine.
a) The owning player assigns one or more
available aircraft to counter -battery duty (at
least ONE non-MG weapon/ordnance must
be announced as being used by each air -
craft for counter -battery);
b) During the Aircraft Attacks portion of the
Indirect Fire Segment, the impulse player
makes one location attempt (see 12.13.21)
for EACH assigned aircraft. Aircraft may
attempt to locate enemy batteries that have
not yet fired and more than one aircraft may
be used against a particular battery;
c) Neutralize a located enemy battery for the
current and following turn, after which the
battery may resume normal function;
d) Aircraft used for counter -battery attacks
return to play normally if otherwise allowed
(i.e., have NOT used all ordnance).
12.16.10 Spotter Aircraft
Some scenarios have Spotter aircraft in the
OOB, or provided by SSR. Certain ATS
products provide counters for Spotter air -
craft; otherwise use any spare aircraft
counter.
12.16.101 Battery Assignment —Assign
Spotter aircraft to an OBA Battery in the
same manner as an FO (see 12.11.31).
12.16.102 Aerial Spotting for OBA—Place
a Spotter aircraft on-board in any hex dur-
ing the Aircraft Attacks Segment of the turn
it is available. It may move to any hex dur-
ing the Aircraft Attacks Segment of later
turns. Spotter aircraft may place a CFF
marker in any hex the aircraft has an LOS
to.
12.16.103 Spotting Range —A Spotter
aircraft’s Spotting Range is double the re-
sult listed on the Spotting Table (if in use)
or in LOS.
12.17 Gliderborne Assault:
12.17.1 Gliders—These aircraft are treated
as TRUCK type vehicles for all purposes
except MOVEMENT. In any scenario where
one side enters via a Gliderborne assault,
the OOB provided glider counters enter play
using a unique sequence.
12.17.2 Troop Loads—Before any gliders
enter play, the owning player makes a side
note of the unit(s) carried in each glider. No
glider may enter play empty. The reference
S|5 on each glider counter refers to its stack-
ing limits in the same manner as a TRUCK
counter.
12.17.3 Entry—Units carried by gliders do
not enter play by setting up or entering from
off-board. They ‘land’ on the map. After all
enemy units have set up, the player mak-
ing the gliderborne assault places his glider
counters in their intended hexes within his
set up area, with no more than ONE glider
per hex and each pointing in a Flight Path
(Exception: ALL gliders must point toward
the SAME hexside, i.e., their Flight Path may
NOT vary). Play then begins on turn one
with the side making a gliderborne assault
receiving the Initiative automatically. His first
impulse must be used to land ALL his glid-
ers. Opportunity Fire is allowed normally at
gliders during this landing impulse, includ-
ing their original placement hex and all hexes
along their Flight Path.
12.17.31 Landing —The owning player
makes a roll for each glider, in the order of
his choosing, using the Aerial Accuracy Chart
(NR). On a roll of 01-55 the glider lands in
its original hex safely (Exception: Unless it
is a NON open ground hex). If it lands out-
side its original target hex (or if the original
hex is not open ground) make a roll as per
12.17.32 to determine if a crash landing
occurs.
12.17.32 Crash Landing —Whenever a
glider fails to land safely a crash landing
may occur in its final landing hex. The glider
is considered to move through a glide path
of connected adjacent hexes indicated by
the Aerial Accuracy Chart (NR) die roll, not-
ing that rolls of 91-95 and 96-00 do not
represent moving in reverse (these results
represent a ‘short’ landing). Note any ter -
rain in the hexes in and between the origi-
nal and final hexes (taking into account the
hexes a glider does NOT travel through on
a short landing—ONLY apply the landing
hex) and add the cumulative DRM found
under the Glider Crash Landing Table. On
a modified roll of ‘0’, a crash occurs.
12.17.33 Casualties—When a glider
‘crashes’, roll a die as the base number of
Casualties. Divide by 4 (divide by 2 for a
Horsa glider), rounding down fractions to
obtain the number for C# to apply to per-
sonnel units the Glider carried. Exception:
When a HORSA glider crashes, HALVE the
die roll (round down) to determine casual-
ties). Weapons carried by any Personnel unit
ELIMINATED are also eliminated.
12.17.34 Water Crash—A glider and its oc-
cupants landing in a non-fordable water hex
46
are eliminated.
12.17.35 Off-Board Crash—Any glider that
lands ‘off-board’ is treated normally and may
crash in its final landing hex. Treat ALL ‘off-
board’ hexes as Open Ground and apply
crash casualties normally. Surviving units
may enter from off-map on the following turn
within THREE hexes of the last on-map hex
of the glide path that took the glider off-
map.
12.17.36 Opportunity Fire—Enemy units
may conduct normal Opportunity Fire against
gliders and the units they carry in any hex
along the Glide Path, including the original
placement hex. Treat gliders and their pas-
sengers as trucks for the purposes of tar -
geting them, and noting a glider is ALWAYS
considered to use ONE MP in its placement
hex and any hex entered along its glide path.
A glider moving along its Glide Path is al-
ways considered to be +10 levels higher than
the highest level terrain in the hex. If a glider
is ‘wrecked’ it is still placed in its final hex,
representing a glider ‘wreck’, and has flame
marker placed on it to represent a burning
glider if a burning wreck results from en-
emy fire. All passengers in a burning wreck
glider are eliminated.
12.17.37 Morale Checks—Personnel car -
ried inside a glider (including once landed,
but prior to exiting via Infiltration), no mo-
rale check is taken following casualties.
12.17.38 Exiting—After landing, place Per-
sonnel units on TOP of the glider counter
carrying them. All Personnel must de-plane
during the immediately following Infiltration
phase. They may Infiltrate into the glider
hex or an otherwise eligible adjacent hex
(e.g., across a cliff is not an eligible adja-
cent hex to enter). Treat glider passengers
as if in a separate location (in the same
manner as a blockhouse) of the hex for any
enemy units in the same hex; Infiltration
must occur before Melee can take place,
i.e., the units are not considered to be in
the same location until AFTER Infiltration
occurs (i.e., enemy units are free to move
out if Melee hasn’t occurred already [i.e.,
an enemy unit has entered their location]).
12.17.39 Landed Gliders —Treat landed
gliders in the same manner as non-burning
or burning wrecks for the purposes of LOS.
Once Personnel have exited a glider, it may
NOT be re-entered during play.
13.0 SPECIAL TROOP TYPES
13.1 OVERVIEW
In some scenarios an SSR will state that all
or a portion of a side’s OOB is made up of
special troop types. Elite troops receive a
beneficial DRM to their MV without the need
of an SSR.
13.1.1 Elite Troops —Personnel with a
printed Morale of EIGHT or greater add ONE
to their Melee Value against vehicles.
13.1.2 Combat Engineers—Personnel des-
ignated by SSR as ‘Combat Engineers’ add
1 to their Melee Value against vehicles (no
matter their current morale). They also use
Satchel Charges with a 2R column shift.
13.1.3 Gurkhas—SSR may designate all or
some portion of a British OOB as Gurkhas.
 ken Japanese Personnel may DEFEND in
Gurkhas double their Melee Value against eligible for entry, e.g., not across a Cliff
Melee as if they are NOT marked as Bro-
Personnel. hexside) is considered a ‘trigger’ for this form
ken. They may not Infiltrate.
13.1.4 Leaders—An NCO pro- of attack.
13.2.5 Japanese Leaders—Japanese Offic-
vides +1 morale/1R/-1 HPT 13.2.71 Attack Resolution and Attacker
ers are provided a 1|1|* value and are
DRM. Officers provide +2 mo- Casualties—For each Tank Hunter attack
treated as Commissars (Exception: They
rale/2R/-2 HPT DRM. The HPT made, the attacking Personnel unit absorbs
MAY form Firegroups and affect fire) for
DRM is only used for HPT at- a ‘C1’ result and immediately attacks the
morale and rally purposes. Japanese NCOs
tacks for L and M weapons (using the HPT same hex/adjacent enemy vehicle in Melee
are provided a 1|1|9 value (as are FOs)
as well as tables A2 and A3) in a stack or as if the equivalent of a 1|1|9 NCO marked
and are treated normally unless stated oth-
Firegroup that includes the directing leader. with Courage is making the attack. How-
erwise.
Only ONE leader may benefit a specific at- ever, the Tank Hunter is removed from play
13.2.51 Morale Checks and Rallying —
tack and the listed DRM are provided even immediately after resolving the attack us-
Japanese leaders automatically Rally.
if the leader is wounded. Leaders check ing the Melee Table. Players may wish to
13.2.6 Banzai Charge—Japanese Person-
morale first during Rally and may also be place an un-used Japanese 1|1|9 (marked
nel may declare a ‘Banzai Charge’, a special
used as crews or to supplement reduced with a medal marker) in the attacked hex
form of Platoon Movement that creates
crews. as a reference. For each MP or ROF used
‘Overrun’ attacks immediate Melee by Japa-
13.1.41 Leader Movement Bonus—All non- in an eligible hex for Tank Hunter attack,
nese Personnel. A Banzai Charge may be
wounded leaders provide a ONE Movement ONE such attack may be made by a Per -
made when at least SIX Stacking Points of
Point bonus to THEIR OWN MOVEMENT sonnel unit.
non Leader Personnel are eligible to use
and other Personnel moving in the same 13.3 USMC Personnel
Platoon Movement, even after movement
stack or platoon. This one additional MP is The United States Marine Corps faced
has already begun by the Platoon. Normal
added for all non-Crawling movement, even unique challenges on the battlefields of the
Platoon Movement rules apply except where
if the leader is marked as Winded. All 1 SP Pacific Theater of Operations, at all times
stated otherwise below.
Personnel units are treated as ‘leaders’ for
13.2.61 Running Targets—Japanese Per-
the purpose of adding 1 MP to THEIR OWN
sonnel conducting a Banzai Charge are con-
movement allowance (i.e., BAR Gunners may
sidered to be using Running movement (and
use 5 MP when using Assault Movement; 8
may do so even if already marked as
MP when running).
Winded). Treat Personnel making a Banzai
13.2 Japanese Personnel
Charge as if using Running movement for
The soldiers of the Japanese Empire brought squaring off against a determined, even sui-
the remainder of the turn (i.e., even AFTER
a unique military code, known as ‘Bushido’, cidal foe that needed to be killed before re-
the Platoon has completed its move).
to the battlefields of Asia and the Pacific. linquishing contested ground.
13.2.62 Overrun Morale Check—All enemy
USMC squads are all 9|6|9 (and 7|6|7
Personnel units ADJACENT to Banzai Charg-
reduced squads). Their Officers (and FOs)
ing units eligible (e.g., not across a Cliff
are 1|1|9 leaders and NCOs are 1|1|8s.
hexside) to enter their location make an IM-
USMC crews receive a value of 2|3|9.
MEDIATE morale check as if being Over -
13.3.1 Morale Table Effects—USMC Per -
run (i.e., apply a +4 DRM per Banzai Charge
sonnel receive a morale modifier of +2 for
to a maximum of +8 and mark such units
The rules below depict these unique com- each 3 Stacking Point Personnel unit and
with an Overrun marker). Units that fail are
batants without resorting to caricature. Play- +1 for EACH non Leader 2 SP Personnel
marked as Broken. Movement by the units
ers will note the morale of Japanese Per - unit. They are not penalized for Surrendered
in the Banzai Charge platoon then contin-
sonnel does NOT reduce as they receive units and suffer a -2 modifier for Overruns.
ues. Reminder: Entry of the location of a
casualties/flip or when leaders become 13.3.2 Weapons Use—Any USMC Person-
Broken enemy unit ELIMINATES it immedi-
wounded. nel unit (or combination of units) totaling 2
ately.
13.2.1 Morale Effects—Japanese Person- Stacking Points or more may serve as the
13.2.63 Banzai Halt and Immediate Me-
nel are immune to the effects of Casualties crew of a HEAVY weapon without penalty.
lee—Personnel using a Banzai Charge may
on morale checks and do NOT reduce their There is NO REDUCTION made to the
enter enemy locations (i.e., they do NOT have
printed Morale value when marked with a printed GF for non Leader/non Crew USMC
to wait until the Infiltration Phase) but each
Casualties marker. They are still forced to Personnel using Light or Medium weapons.
entering unit/stack must immediately STOP
check morale when casualties result on the 13.4 Volkssturm/Conscript Personnel
once the first enemy location has been en-
Casualty Table, however, no DRM is applied In the last days of the Third Reich old men
tered. Other Banzai Charging units of the
for the ‘#’ portion of a ‘C#’ result. Japanese and boys were pressed into service with
Platoon may continue moving in keeping with
Personnel ignore Morale Table modifiers to little training. The troops of other nations
Platoon Movement rules until they have ei-
morale checks (Exception: They still check
ther expended any remaining Movement
morale when Overrun, see 13.2.2).
Points the owning player wishes to use OR
13.2.2 Overruns—When attacked by Over-
entered an enemy location. Once ALL units
runs, Japanese Personnel apply a -2 mo-
of the Banzai Charge Platoon have completed
rale modifier.
their movement, and all enemy Opportunity
13.2.3 Japanese Off-Board Artillery — may also be specified by SSR to be ‘Con-
Fire has been conducted, play is halted and
When provided Off-Board artillery support scripts’.
Melee is conducted in hexes containing units
by SSR, unless stated otherwise an FFE only 1.34.1 Penalties—Add a +2 HPT DRM for
of both sides.
attacks the hex it is in. any Volkssturm/Conscript Personnel unit
13.2.7 Japanese Tank Hunters—A special
13.2.4 Surrender —Japanese Personnel firing a weapon on ANY Hit Probability Table
form of ‘Opportunity Fire’ Melee (represent-
never Surrender. In any case that the rules (i.e., including M|MG, SCW and L|AT).
ing Japanese Tank Hunters, described by
call for a unit to Surrender, treat them as
the US Army in Intelligence Bulletin Vol. III,
BROKEN instead (even if already Broken,
No 5. [January 1945]) may be conducted 14.0 SPECIAL WEAPON AND CREW RULES
i.e., there is no additional effect).
against same hex or adjacent enemy VE- 14.1 DUG-IN HEAVY WEAPONS —Heavy
13.2.41 Already Broken Units —Broken
HICLES by Japanese Personnel units of weapons that begin a non-Desert scenario
Japanese Personnel remain Broken upon
TWO Stacking Points or greater. Movement set up in hexes eligible for the placement of
failing another morale check or when adja-
(including entering a Japanese Personnel a Weapons Pit Emplacement are provided
cent to enemy units.
hex to conduct an Overrun but BEFORE one if NO Weapons Pits counters are pro-
13.2.42 Broken Units and Melee—Japa-
the effects are considered applied, i.e., be- vided in ANY portion of that side’s OOB.
nese Personnel units are NOT eliminated
fore a morale check is taken) AND fire while The only units that may set up in these Weap-
when enemy units enter their location. Bro-
in the same or adjacent hex (and otherwise ons Pits are the Heavy weapon and its man-

47

ning Crew. Weapons Pits provided as part
of a side’s OOB may have ANY unit set up
within.
14.2 WEAPON CREWS
14.2.1 Overview- Crews are
Personnel units and function
within all previously cited rules
in regards to stacking, gunfire,
movement, etc. Crews are used
to operate Medium and Heavy weapons but
may also operate Light weapons. To fire, a
Medium or Heavy weapon must be
‘manned’, i.e., set up with its crew (or other
Personnel unit later in the game if the origi-
nal crew has been eliminated or moved away)
or using the pick up and carry routine be-
fore it may be fired in the current turn.
14.2.2 OOB Crews—Before beginning play,
assign one Crew counter to EACH Medium
and Heavy weapon provided in the OOB for
that side.
14.2.3 Fire Options—A Crew may NOT fire
its printed Gunfire Factors or make a Gre-
nade Attack in the same turn it fires a Me-
dium or Heavy weapon. They may, however,
engage in Melee in the normal manner and
are subject to normal Personnel restrictions
when using Light weapons.
14.2.4 Crew Casualties —Crew counters
have two sides, full strength and reduced.
They flip to their reduced side upon taking
one Causalities result (i.e., on a ‘C1’) and
are eliminated after absorbing TWO Casu-
alties (i.e., immediately on a ‘C2’ or greater
result), or upon receiving another ‘C1’ if al-
ready flipped to their reduced side.
14.2.5 Reduced Crew Penalty—Any Heavy
or Medium weapon fired by a reduced Crew
fires with a reduction in its printed ROF.
The ROF of all H and M weapons is reduced
to 1, even if a BOT marker has been placed.
The –3 HPT DRM for BOT is still received.
14.2.6 Alternate crews—Two Leaders (or
BAR Gunners, Commissars, or FOs; BAR
Gunners may NOT use their printed GF and
a weapon) or a squad (including reduced)
may be used as an alternate crew. They are
treated as the equivalent of a REDUCED
Crew with the following exception: In the
absence of a leader, squads add +1 to any
HPT hit attempt for an M weapon and +2
for any H weapon. Three Leaders (or FOs)
or a Leader AND a full strength squad are
treated as the equivalent of a full-strength
Crew. When manning weapons, these units
function as Crew units and must abide by
Crew rules.
14.2.7 Self Rally—As per 10.8.1 Broken/
Surrendered crews may attempt to Rally
without a leader present.
14.3 MACHINE-GUN DIRECT FIRE
14.3.1 Overview—There are two types of
Machine-guns used in the game: Light and
Medium 5/8" weapon units and those
mounted on vehicles.
14.3.2 Long Range Machine-Gun Fire—
Light and Medium Machine-guns may fire
beyond their printed range at HALF Gun-
fire Factors, to a maximum of DOUBLE their
normal range (Exception: Long Range fire
may not be applied when a MG uses an
HPT).
14.3.3 Anti-vehicle Machine-Gun fire—All
Light and Medium MGs may fire at vehicles
by using their GF directly on the Casualty
ately following the HPT die roll, the oppos-
Table and comparing the result to the At-
ing player must apply casualties in the form
tack results vs. Vehicles And H Weapons
of a C2 result to ANY Personnel unit(s) in
Table. M|MG and vehicular MG may also
the same location (or in the same vehicle).
fire on the A2 MG HPT, using all appropri-
Casualty morale checks follow for all units
ate HPT DRM. After securing a hit, use the
in the location. A SCW may only be fired in
K-KILL Table to obtain a result. When fir-
this manner from a non-moving vehicle by
ing at AFV using the HPT, MG use their
a unit in S|G|F cover.
PEN of ‘1’.
14.4.5 Panzerfaust and Bazooka Range—
14.3.4 BOT Restriction —Machine-guns
The range for Panzerfaust and Bazooka
never place BOT or have their ROF increased
weapons varies by year. In 1943-44, the
for any reason.
maximum range for Bazookas is 4 hexes; in
14.4 SHAPED CHARGE L|AT WEAPONS
1945 it is 5. In 1943-44 the maximum range
(SCW)
for Panzerfausts is one hex; in 1945 it is
two.
14.5 ANTI-TANK RIFLES
14.4.1 Overview—Shaped Charge Weapons
(SCW) are Light Anti Tank Weapons (L|AT)
that represent the American Bazooka, Brit-
14.5.1 Overview—Anti-tank rifles (ATR) are
ish PIAT and German Panzerfaust (Pf) (and
Light weapons (Exception: The Italian
Panzerschreck (PsK) weapons. Apply a +3
Solothurn M|ATR is a Medium weapon).
HPT DRM for Personnel units firing SCW
They may fire against Personnel directly on
while using Assault Movement.
the Casualty Table using their ‘1’ GF or
14.4.11 Panzerfaust Removal— The
against vehicles on the HPT. In all cases
Panzerfaust is a one-use only weapon. A Pf
ATRs may not fire beyond the maximum
L|AT counter is removed from play after it
range listed on each ATR counter after the
is fired the first time.
‘#’ notation.
14.4.2 Anti Vehicular/H weapon Usage—
14.5.2 Casualty Table Use—An L|ATR may
Fire at vehicles using the L|AT HPT (A3).
fire using its ‘1’ GF directly on the Casualty
All normal HPT DRM apply. After a hit against
Table, including against vehicles and their
a vehicle is secured, SCW use the AP por-
riders and passengers.
tion of the K-KILL Table.
14.5.3 HPT Use—ROF, BOT, HPT DRM and
14.4.3 Anti Personnel/H Weapon Usage—
other Direct Fire rules apply to ATRs using
SCW may fire HE at Personnel in the same
the HPT. Use the ‘D’ row (Exception: The
manner as a H weapon—but ONLY against
20|B ATR uses the ‘B’ row) on the HPT for
Personnel in a building location, UNDER a
ATRs. ALL L|AT weapons use a +3 Assault
bunker, blockhouse, Cave Dugout, or BE-
Fire HPT DRM.
HIND a Wall/High Wall hexside that pro-
14.5.4 Anti Vehicle Attacks—After obtain-
vides cover (i.e., no fire allowed by SCW in
ing a hit, use the PEN of ‘1’ listed for ATRs
the case of denial of Wall cover), noting the
on the Gun Penetration Values table (Play
exception for targeting H weapons in
Aid #5) for each nationality. The line excep-
14.4.31. SCW may create rubble and Flame
tion to this is the Italian Solothurn 20|B
in building locations like other weapons fir-
ATR. It may only fire out to the maximum
ing HE.
range listed on the counter, but uses the
14.4.31 vs. H Weapon—Any hit against an
20|B listing on the Italian Gun Penetration
H weapon eliminates the weapon (and re-
Values table.
solve HE results against any manning crew
14.5.5 Anti Personnel Attacks—Any Per-
or Personnel in the same location as per
sonnel riding on a TANK are attacked by
14.4.3). An SCW may always fire at an H
the same die roll used for the K-KILL Table
weapon (in any terrain) and any manning
roll, but using the ‘1’ column on the Casu-
crew is attacked on the Casualty Table ONLY
alty Table (unlike AP from H weapons, which
if the weapon is hit. In the case of a weapon
use the ‘4’ GF column) and using Assault
in terrain eligible for SCW attack, the firing
cover. Passengers in S cover in vehicles are
player must specify that he is attacking the
also attacked by 1 GF following a hit. No
H weapon INSTEAD and any hit obtained
separate FRAG attack is made against pas-
ONLY affects the weapon and any manning
sengers in G and F cover following an ATR
crew unless the target location may other-
hit; use the K-KILL Table against the ve-
wise be attacked (e.g., building location).
hicle and apply any wreck results to the
14.4.4 Firing Restrictions —Only a PIAT
passengers normally.
L|AT may fire safely from inside a building
14.6 MORTARS
or under a bunker/cave. All SCW may fire
freely from rubble locations. Personnel be-
ing transported by vehicle may not fire any
form of L|AT. A PIAT may not fire at a tar-
get that is ADJACENT and +20 or more lev-
els lower than the PIAT hex. Non ATR L|AT
14.6.1 Overview —Mortars are on-board
weapons do not place BOT markers.
Indirect Fire weapons and are either Light
14.4.41 Emergency Use—In the event the
or Medium weapons, or mounted on ve-
owning player wishes to fire a SCW from a
hicles.
location otherwise restricted in 14.4.4, he
14.6.2 CA—Light and Medium Mortars have
may do so (Exception: PIAT +20 level re-
a 360-degree field-of-fire. Only those
striction always applies). However, immedi-
mounted in vehicles have a CA. Their ve-
48
hicle must pivot to fire at targets outside its
14.7 FLAMETHROWERS Table C6 against vehicles and H weapons).
VCA.
14.8.3 Range—Semi-Automatic Guns may
14.6.3 Fire Type—Mortar fire by on-board
fire out to a range equal to half the Gun
units is considered Indirect Fire, but it is
size. Example: A 37mm AA Gun may fire up
conducted during the Fire & Movement Seg-
to 18 hexes away.
ment. Mortars use the HPT and place BOT
14.9 SPIKING WEAPONS —Any type of
markers. When attacking vehicles refer to
14.7.1 Overview—Flamethrowers refer to Weapon unit may be ‘spiked,’ or rendered
Table C2 after making a roll on the Casu-
both infantry weapons and vehicular - useless, by any Personnel unit that carries
alty Table following each HIT obtained on
mounted versions. FT use the same proce- or picks it up. The weapon may be spiked
the HPT.
dure as small arms fire against Personnel instead of fired by any unit that could oth-
14.6.4 Fire and BOT Restrictions—Mor -
but may NEVER be included in a Firegroup, erwise fire it. Remove Spiked Light and
tars may not fire from inside Buildings (ex-
and use their own procedure against ve- Medium weapons from the map. Place an
cept from roof or roofless locations), bun-
hicles. F-KILL marker on spiked Heavy weapons.
kers, blockhouses, from water hexes, or,
14.7.2 Fire restrictions—A Flamethrower 14.10 ALTERNATE AP AMMUNITION
unless vehicular -mounted, by Personnel
may never combine its fire with any other 14.10.1 Ammunition Types—During World
transported by vehicles. BOT markers
unit or be used in a Firegroup. Leaders do War II new forms of Armor Piercing (AP)
placed by mortars may never be moved to
not provide any shifts to FT attacks nor is ammunition was created in an effort to deal
‘follow’ a target.
an FT halved during Assault Fire use. with the thicker plates armoring new tank
14.6.5 Minimum and Maximum Range—
14.7.3 Cover State exception—Fire from models. In game terms, these alternate
Mortars have a minimum and maximum
an FT ignores any Cover State produced by ammunition types are listed on each AFV
range as indicated on their counter in the
the terrain in the target hex or hexside, in- Card or for each gun on the Gun & Mortar
format minimum-maximum following the “#”.
cluding any cover state column shift af- Ammunition Table (Play Aid 5 for each na-
Example: The British 3 inch M|MTR has a
forded by vehicles and wrecks. Only tionality). Treat each form of alternate AP
minimum range of TWO and a maximum
SMOKE cover is applied, and then ONLY ammunition as a form of ‘AP’—they use the
range of 32 hexes.
when attacking NON-vehicle targets. AP portion of the K-KILL Table.
Mortars may not fire at targets beyond their
14.7.4 Range—The range of a Flamethrower 14.10.2 Dates of Availability—During the
maximum range or less than their minimum.
is stated as 30|1 with ‘1’ serving as the war, the Axis produced a limited supply of
14.6.6 Full Cover—Mortars may fire from
range. The normal ‘#’ is also used to denote Armor-Piercing Composite Rigid (APCR) and
Full cover when located in a hedgehog/AT -
range. High Explosive Anti-Tank (HEAT) ammuni-
Trench (always), or from ‘down’ in a Wadi or
14.7.5 Flame and Fuel—Roll 2 dice when tion, which had markedly superior penetra-
Ravine, the latter two only when using a
attacking with an FT. Use the colored die tion capabilities. HEAT may not be used for
Spotter that has an LOS to the target hex.
for the attack. If the target unit is any ter - any scenario set before June 1942. Italian
14.6.7 On Board Indirect Fire Spotter—
rain eligible for Flame placement (Building; 75mm and 65mm guns had HEAT available
Mortars and howitzers (H|HOW) may fire
Woods, etc.), place a Flame marker in the beginning in September 1942. The Allies
without an LOS to their target by using a
attacked hex following a result of C6 or manufactured a limited supply of Armor
‘Spotter’, a Personnel unit functioning in a
higher. On a white die roll of 9-0, the Piercing Discarding Sabot (APDS). APDS may
similar manner to an FO. Any adjacent Per-
Flamethrower is ‘out of fuel’ and the Weapon not be used for any scenario set before June
sonnel unit may act as a Spotter. A Person-
is removed from play AFTER the attack is 1944.
nel unit may only act as a Spotter for one or
resolved. If the FT is a vehicle’s MA, mark 14.10.3 Special Ammunition Penetra-
more mortars/HOW in ONE hex (mortars
the vehicle with an F-KILL marker, unless tion—When firing APCR, HEAT, or APDS
in multiple locations of a hex are allowed,
the vehicle is also equipped with another ammunition, use the appropriate entry (e.g.
e.g., on top of AND under a Hedgehog).
MA, for example a Gun, whereas the ve- APDS) on the Gun Penetration Table for those
When spotting for multiple weapons, each
hicle may continue to operate normally with ammunition types.
weapon may attack a different hex. To indi-
its other weapons. A side note is suggested 14.10.4 Determine number available—To
cate it is not eligible to move, mark the Per-
to keep track. determine the number of ‘rounds’ for each
sonnel unit with an ‘F’ marker when spot-
14.7.6 Sd 251-16—This vehicle has ammunition type available during a scenario,
ting (or make a side note if the Personnel
Flamethrowers mounted on both its left and add the number of ‘APCR,’ ‘HEAT’ and APDS
unit is hidden; spotting does not in itself
right sides. Treat each as a separate capable units in the Order Of Battle and
reveal the unit). A Personnel unit acting as
Flamethrower that may only fire at target use one third (round fractions down) of this
a Spotter is considered to have fired one L
hexes adjacent to the vehicles left or right total as the base number for that ammuni-
weapon (no matter how many weapons are
FLANK aspect. Each Flamethrower may run tion type. Note the modifier on the table if
spotted for) for the purposes of restricting
out of fuel separately. The vehicle is not the opponent’s order of battle includes cer -
their ability to use other weapons. Placing
removed from play for being F-KILLed un- tain tanks, such as the Grant and Tiger.
an F marker for Spotting is not an Opportu-
less both Flamethrowers are out of fuel. The base number, plus the total from the
nity Fire trigger.
Make a side note of the side out of fuel when Alternate Ammunition Availability Table
14.6.71 Full Cover Usage—If an LOS oth-
placing one F-KILL marker on a Sd 251-16. (found on Play Aid #5 for each nationality
erwise would exist, mortars may be fired
14.8 SEMI-AUTOMATIC GUNS that has weapons eligible for alternate am-
from FULL cover position in an Emplace-
14.8.1 Overview—Some small caliber Guns munition types) roll equals the number of
ment, without the need for another unit to
(e.g., Pzkw IIf turreted MA) have a high rate- each type of APCR, HEAT, and/or APDS
serve the function of a Spotter. Firing a
of-fire and may directly attack on the Casu- shots available for the scenario.
mortar in this manner does not ‘reduce’ the
alty Table in the same way as a MG used 14.10.5 Assign Special Ammunition—The
FULL cover protection of the firing unit in
without rolling for a hit on the HPT. Known owning player must specify the identity of
any way.
as ‘Semi-Automatic Fire’, this form of fire the AFVs or Guns ‘carrying’ the alternate
Example: A British 51mm Mortar down in a
consumes all available ROF of the weapon rounds resulting from the calculation above.
Ravine wishes to attack a German squad
for that turn. Apply any column shifts for Make a side note of the ID letter of the unit’s
assault moving in an Open Ground hex 9
pivoting normally. allotted APCR, HEAT or APDS ammunition
hexes away. A 1|1|8 leader in a Brush hex
14.8.2 Procedure—For any H|AA Gun of and quantity available for each. Only the
adjacent to the ravine is spotting for the mor-
40mm or less and ANY Gun of 20mm or noted units may use this ammunition. Each
tar. The Mortar is a D gun type, which at 9-16
less (including 20|B ATRs), multiply the ‘round’ is equal to one hit attempt die roll on
hexes needs a 4 to hit on the HPT. The Ger-
normal FRAG Factors for that gun by its the HPT.
mans have Assault Cover, so the British
ROF to obtain a GF equivalent. This GF value 14.11 TIME-FUZED HE AMMUNITION—
player subtracts one from the roll; he needs
can be used against any target directly on When firing the 88mm Flak using Direct
a 5 or less to hit. If a hit is obtained, the
the Casualty Table, and is treated in the HE, or when an SSR specifies a ‘Variable
result is unmodified. Use the ‘6’ column on
same manner as Small Arms fire (e.g., use Timed Fuse’, airbursts are produced in ter -
the Casualty Table and place a BOT marker.

49
rain that does not normally produce air -
bursts (but does NOT produce airbursts in
hexes/locations specifically negated, e.g.,
buildings). There is no additional effect in
hexes that already provide airbursts (no HPT
DRM is created).
14.12 CANISTER AMMUNITION
Canister ammunition is listed on the Gun &
Mortar Ammo Table under the ‘C’ column.
Canister is fired in the same manner as a
Gun using Semi-Automatic Fire with the
exception that it may fire at any TWO adja-
cent hexes (or two locations within one hex)
within the LOS and covered arc (CA) of the
firing weapon. Apply pivoting normally as
column shifts when using Canister ammu-
nition.
14.13 SPECIAL WEAPONS
14.13.1 Demolitions —Certain weapons
allow units to destroy terrain, emplacements
or other special targets during play. Satchel
Charges may be used to attack combat tar-
gets, emplacements, and terrain. Bulldoz-
ers and Bangalore Torpedoes never attack
enemy troops.
14.13.11 Dozer —Bulldozers (or Dozers)
come in three varieties: unarmed (and
unarmored) types with a white movement
icon; armored types with a yellow icon; and
tanks equipped with dozer blades. All three
have a special form of Assault movement
that may be used for ‘Dozing’. The dozing
value is printed in this format Cross Coun-
try | Assault Dozing MP. All Dozers per -
form Dozing tasks the same way.
14.13.12 Dozing—Dozers affect certain ter-
rain, emplacements and remove non-burn-
ing wrecks from play. They ‘doze’ moving
normally to enter the hex in question. They
then may spend their ONE Dozing MP AF-
TER already entering the hex, in order to
conduct a Dozing activity. Dozing triggers
Opportunity Fire and the dozing results only
apply AFTER any fire is completed against
the Dozing vehicle. Although not considered
firing, Dozing requires a roll on the ‘50’ col-
umn of the Casualty Table to attempt an
affect on the terrain, emplacement or wreck.
After rolling on the Casualty Table, refer to
the Demolition Table (DT) for results. If the
C# is high enough, the terrain, emplace-
ment or wreck is affected. Otherwise, there
is no effect. Upon obtaining a result, ONE
Bunker, Beach Obstacle, Roadblock, Wreck
or Wire counter in the hex (or along one of
its hexsides in the case of a Roadblock) is
removed from play. Mark a Bocage, Hedge
or Wall (including High Wall) hexside with a
Minefield Lane counter to signify all forms
of units may now cross the hexside (LOS is
still treated normally). Replace an AT Trench
or Hedgehog with a Foxhole counter.
14.13.13 Bangalore Torpedo (BT)—Banga-
lore Torpedoes are special 1/2" Light weap-
ons that may only be used once and then
are removed from play. Normally used by
Engineer units, Bangalore Torpedoes are
used to remove Roadblocks, Wire and Mines
from the map. A BT attacks on the ‘40’ col-
umn of the Casualty Table and refer to the
Demolition Table for results.
15.0 SPECIAL VEHICLE RULES
15.1 AFV TYPES
AFVs have gray movement point back-
grounds, and are differentiated by move-
ment type, armor, open- or closed-top, and
turret.
15.1.1 Tanks
A Tank is a fully armored (gray movement
icon and AFV Card provided), turreted, fully
tracked AFV. Tanks may be open-topped
(OT) or close-topped (CT).
15.1.2 Armored Cars (AC)
Armored Cars are turreted or non-turreted,
wheeled vehicles and are sometimes suffi-
ciently armored to be considered AFV (gray
movement icon and AFV Card provided).
They are treated as AFV or APC or truck
normally based on their movement icon and
may move in reverse at the reduced cost
for wheeled vehicles.
15.1.3 Self-Propelled Guns (SPG)
A Self-Propelled Gun is a fully armored, tur-
ret-less, fully tracked AFV, either open- or
close-topped. An SPG may only fire its main
armament at targets within its VCA.
15.1.4 Open Topped vehicles
OT vehicles have a white outline behind the
vehicle art on the counter (e.g., German Sd
251-1). An OT vehicle is more vulnerable to
Indirect Fire, Grenades, Melee and Person-
nel Fire due to the exposed nature of the
crew compartment. The crews of OT ve-
hicles may be attacked by GF and Grenades,
using the Casualty Table (followed by the
Suppression Table) in an effort to Suppress
them or force Bail Out (see 15.1.41). Sup-
pression (and any Bail Out roll required by
suppressing an already Suppressed OT ve-
hicle) is the only additional result possible.
15.1.41 Suppression and Bail Out—Sup-
pressed OT vehicles may not fire. If an al-
ready Suppressed OT vehicle receives a
NEW Suppression result, make a roll on the
Bail Out Table using the M-KILL row.
15.2 VEHICLE WEAPONS
Most vehicles have multiple weapons, con-
sisting usually of a Main Armament (MA) and
machine-guns. Some vehicles have multiple
MA, a FT, or some combination thereof. A
vehicle may use all of its weapons once per
Fire & Movement Segment during different
impulses OR all during the SAME Impulse.
When marking a vehicle with an ‘F’ marker,
note if any of the vehicle’s various weapons
are still available to fire. All of a vehicle’s
weapons are unusable if it suffers an F-
KILL result (Exception: TURRET - and SPON-
SON-mounted weapons are F-KILLed sepa-
rately).
15.2.1 Main Armament (MA)
A Gun Size printed in the lower left corner
of a vehicle counter indicates the vehicle’s
MA. In the absence of such a weapon, treat
any MG marked with a circle around the
MG value as that vehicle’s MA. No other
vehicles have an MA (thus they are not forced
to exit if any other vehicle armament is F-
KILLed). MA can be mounted in three ways:
Turret, Hull, or Sponson, or a combination
of turret and hull or sponson.
15.2.11 Turret-Mounted MA —Turret-
mounted MA are indicated by a solid or
dashed circle around a vehicle’s Gun Size
50
(e.g., 75|B with a circle around it). These
Guns rotate with the turret, and thus can
change covered arc independent of the ve-
hicle.
15.2.12 Hull-Mounted MA—Hull-mounted
MA are indicated by a vehicle’s Gun Size
not being circled. Hull-mounted Weapons
use the same covered arc as the vehicle
(VCA). The vehicle must pivot to fire these
weapons at a target not already within its
VCA.
15.2.13 Sponson-Mounted MA—Sponson-
mounted MA are indicated by a superscript
‘s’ appended to the Gun Size (e.g., Grant/
Lee, M11/39). Sponson- and turret-
mounted weapons may fire at different tar-
gets. Each Gun acquires its target separately
for BOT purposes.
15.2.131 Limited Traverse —Sponson-
mounted weapons fire in the same manner
as SPG but pay a +1 HPT DRM for targets
within their VCA but in any hexes on the
POR T side of center.
15.2.132 F-KILL Exception—Weapons on
a Sponson AFV are destroyed separately.
An F-KILL resulting from a Turret hit F-Kills
turret-mounted weapons. An F-KILL from
any other front hull hit F-Kills Sponson and
hull-mounted weapons.
15.2.2 Machine-guns
Vehicles have the following types of machine-
guns. All are considered M|MG, except the
L|MG with which Carriers are armed.
15.2.21 Coaxial (CMG) —Mounted in the
turret, the CMG shares the turret’s Cov-
ered Arc (also referred to as ‘TCA’).
15.2.22 Bow (BMG)—Mounted in the front
Hull, the BMG shares the vehicle’s covered
arc.
15.2.23 Anti-Aircraft (AAMG)— Mounted
on top of the vehicle in an external mount,
the AAMG may fire at any target within range
regardless of the turret or vehicle covered
arcs. It is capable of fire only if the vehicle
is NOT Suppressed.
15.2.24 MG Format on counter—Machine-
guns are listed in the following format: CMG
| BMG | AAMG. Some vehicles have only
two MG and use the format CMG | BMG.
Others have multiple MG of a specific type
listed as ‘x2’ (two times) or ‘S+P’ (starboard
[right] and port [left] side) or limited cov-
ered arc (e.g., ‘P’ for port side only). The
absence of a particular MG vehicle mount
is indicated by a ‘-’.
15.2.25 MG Range—CMG and AAMG, as
well as BMG mounted on APC, have a nor-
mal range of ‘10’ hexes. Other BMG have a
normal range of ‘6’ hexes. All types may fire
out to double their normal range using Long
Range Fire (see 12.5.52).
15.2.3 Rear Facing
Some vehicles have weapons that face to
the rear. Rear -facing guns have a super -
script ‘R’ appended to the Gun Size (e.g.,
Portees); rear -facing MGs have an ‘R’ su-
perscript appended to the MG value (e.g.,
Italian AB 40 APC). These weapons are con-
sidered to face to the rear VCA (or rear tur-
ret covered arc [TCA]).
15.3 TURRETS
15.3.1 Turrets and 360-degree H weapons
have fast (power) OR slow (hand-crank) ro-
tation capabilities.

15.3.11 Fast Traverse—Have a solid black
circle around the Gun Size (e.g., Crusader
II; Pz IVh; Bofors H|AA).
15.3.12 Slow Traverse —Have a dashed
black circle around the Gun Size (e.g., Pzkw
IIf; Pz IVj).
15.3.2 Turret Covered Arc (TCA)
Instead of turning a turreted vehicle’s VCA,
a turreted vehicle may pivot its turret to
fire turret-mounted weapons in a new TCA.
15.3.3 Turret Marker
Place a turret marker on the AFV to indi-
cate its TCA whenever the TCA and VCA
are not identical. Any hit on the turret as-
pect strikes the front, side, or rear of the
turret according to the turret marker fac-
ing.
15.3.4 One Man Turret—Some AFV Cards
note the vehicle has a “One man turret” or
other information restricting turret-mounted
weapons, usually stating they may not fire
more than ONE turreted armament during
the same segment.
15.3.5 Turret Rotation—An AFV may ro-
tate its turret while moving, and as part of
firing. Place a turret marker on the vehicle
accordingly.
15.3.51 Turret Rotation While Moving—
An AFV may rotate its turret one hexspine
per movement point that it spends during a
Movement Impulse. It may expend MP to
rotate its turret without leaving its hex.
Turning a turret without leaving a hex is an
Opportunity Fire ‘trigger,’ but one hexspine
change in turret facing occurs before the
vehicle may be fired on.
15.3.52 Turret Rotation While Firing—
During a direct or indirect fire impulse or
when using opportunity fire, an AFV may
rotate its turret to any hexspine prior to fir-
ing. Turret rotation adds HPT DRM. Rotat-
ing one hexspine incurs a DRM of +1 for
Fast traverse and +2 for Slow traverse. Each
hexspine of rotation past the first incurs an
additional +1 DRM for both turret types.
Each DRM for turret rotation also provides
a one column shift LEFT for any of the
vehicle’s turret-mounted weapons that fire
directly on the Casualty Table.
Example, a +2 DRM for turret rotation gener-
ates two LEFT shifts on the Casualty Table
when firing a CMG during the same impulse
a turret pivoted.
15.4 HULL-DEFILADE
Vehicles positioned behind or in certain
types of terrain and emplacements receive
(or may roll to receive) partial cover that
makes the lower part of the vehicle invul-
nerable to direct fire. This is called Hull-
Defilade (H-D).
15.4.1 Automatic Hull-Defilade terrain and
Emplacements
Vehicles are automatically in Hull-Defilade
if incoming direct fire crosses a wall or
bocage hexside of its hex, or a crest-line
mander’. Simply make a side note of the ID
from a lower elevation hex if on a Hill or
of the AFV.
Embankment, or higher elevation hex if in
15.6.1 HPT DRM—Apply a -1 on HPT DRM,
a Wadi or Deir. Non-small vehicles in Weap-
Immobilization checks, and Hull-Defilade
ons Pits also receive H-D status (Very Small
checks, and apply a +1 on Suppression die
target size vehicles in Weapons Pits are con-
rolls for the AFV. Elite tank Commanders
sidered in FULL cover).
may move from one AFV to another. Pre 1943
15.4.2 Die Roll Hull-Defilade Terrain
ELITE Russian tanks IGNORE the +2 HPT
Scrub, UP positions on Hillocks, and Rock-
DRM specified in 15.5.
Strewn Terrain MAY provide Hull-Defilade,
15.6.2 Initiative Modifier
but acquiring H-D status will require a die
If only one side in a scenario has a non M/
roll, which may be made following a sepa-
K-KILLed Elite Tank Commander, that side
rate H-D expenditure of 1 MP while mov-
has a -1 modifier to all of its Initiative die
ing. Place a Hull Defilade marker on vehicles
rolls if both OOBs contain vehicles only.
that roll successfully. Only one vehicle per
15.6.3 Bail Out Modifier
hex may obtain H-D status via the die roll
If the Elite tank is K-KILLed, F-KILLed or
method. When H-D status is obtained VIA
M-KILLed, add 1 to the die roll for all Bail-
A DIE ROLL, the vehicle is H-D only through
Out checks for the remaining AFVs for that
its FRONT VCA and if the vehicle leaves the
side for the rest of the game (making bail-
hex or changes its VCA, the H-D marker is
ing out more likely) UNLESS one or more
immediately removed. If the vehicle pivots
Elite Tank remain for that side.
only and does not leave the hex, a new roll
15.6.4 Commander Relocation
may be made. Changing TURRET covered
If the Elite tank commander spends an en-
arc does not remove the H-D marker.
tire Fire & Movement Segment with another
15.4.21 H-D Weapon Use
AFV in the same hex, without either mov-
Vehicles in H-D terrain positions or marked
ing, the Commander may be placed in the
as H-D may not fire Bow-mounted weap-
new AFV. Make a secret side note to this
ons. Sponson-mounted weapons may fire.
effect.
15.4.3 Flank HPT DRM
15.7 APC UNITS
Do not apply the -1 Flank HPT DRM when
APC are lightly armored, usually Open-
firing on a turreted H-D vehicle. Apply the -
Topped Transport vehicles. APC have yel-
1 Flank HPT DRM when firing on a H-D
low movement icons on their counters and
non-turreted vehicle.
all receive an AF of 0. Half-Tracks and Car -
15.4.4 Vulnerable Vehicle Aspects
riers are the most common types of APC.
When firing at a H-D vehicle, only hits on
15.7.1 Inherent Crew—APCs contain inher-
certain aspects actually hit the vehicle. Ig-
ent Crews in the same manner as AFVs—
nore hits against all other aspects.
they never take counter form (Exception:
a) Non-sponson, turreted vehicle: Turret
Carriers) as per the rules for Bail Out (i.e.,
hits only;
they may Bail Out; see 12.5.16).
b) Non-turreted vehicle: UH hits only;
15.7.2 APC as targets—APCs may be at-
c) Sponson AFV: UH and turret hits only;
tacked by using the Casualty Table (see
Note: Usually hit location is not rolled for
Tables C2 and C6) and on the HPT followed
APCs or armed trucks. When these vehicle
by the K-KILL Table for each hit obtained.
types are H-D, use the Hit Location Table
15.7.3 APC Passengers—Personnel units
to determine if the round has struck a vul-
being transported in APC whose counters
nerable aspect.
include a ‘G’ or ‘F’ notation are in Good Cover
15.4.41 Vehicle Size DRM for Hit Loca-
and (if an ‘F’ notation is present) may drop
tion—When firing at a H-D vehicle, vehicle
into Full Cover, marked with a FC marker.
size is used as a DRM on the Hit Location
If the vehicle counter does not contain a ‘G’
Table. Large vehicles receive a -1 DRM;
or an ‘F,’ treat the cover state as Stationary.
Small a +1; and Very Small a +2.
15.7.4 APC Firegroups—All APCs and their
15.4.42 BOT DRM for Hit Location—For
Passengers may form firegroups with other
H-D targets marked with BOT, a -3 DRM
APC and Personnel, following the standard
applies on the Hit Location Table (in addi-
Firegroup rules.
tion to applying the -3 HPT DRM). Note: BOT
15.7.5 Half-Tracks-Half-Tracks are usually
markers are placed on H-D vehicles only
APC with a yellow movement point icon in
when a hit strikes a vulnerable aspect.
the shape of an ‘oval plus small circle’. Some
15.5 PRE 1943 RUSSIAN VEHICLE MA
are unarmored white icon vehicles.
15.5.1 Rationale: This rule simulates the
15.7.51 Half-Track MG—Many Half-Track
relative inexperience of Russian tank com-
APCs such as the 251/1 are equipped with
manders prior to 1943. The following rule
one BMG. Some have AAMG or BMG that
15.5.2 applies in ALL scenarios set before
may only fire from a REAR VCA, and are
January 1, 1943 (i.e., no SSR is required).
marked with an ‘R’ superscript. The ‘stan-
15.5.2 HPT DRM—A +2 HPT DRM is ap-
dard’ BMG has a front field-of-fire and fires
plied when a Russian vehicle fires on the
like an AFV BMG.
Hit Probability Table. No shifts are applied
15.7.52 Half-Track APC Passenger Fire—
on the Casualty Table due to this HPT DRM
Personnel units transported in a Half-Track
nor is non MA fire affected. Non vehicle (e.g.,
may fire their printed Gunfire Factors and
H weapons) HPT use is not affected.
any ONE carried L|MG while in Good Cover.
Example: A Suppressed Russian tank in a
This L|MG is fired through the rear and
September 1941 scenario needs to roll a FIVE
side facings of the Half-Track only, but Per-
or less to obtain a hit at a range of TWO hexes.
sonnel Gunfire Factors may be fired through
15.6 ELITE TANK COMMANDERS
the front facing too. If the Half-Track uses
In some scenarios, SSR will specify that one
Assault movement, passenger fire is halved.
or more AFVs have an ‘Elite Tank Com-
Passengers in a Half-Track may not fire if
51

the vehicle uses Cross-Country movement.
15.7.6 Carriers—The Carrier is a small fully
tracked lightly armored APC usually used
by British and Commonwealth forces. It
carries an inherent Crew. Unlike other ve-
hicle Crews, a Carrier’s Crew may exit nor-
mally and take counter form as a 2|3|8
Crew counter.
15.7.61 Weapon Mounts—Carrier weaponry
functions in the same manner as the main
armament and machine-guns of AFVs. Ex-
ception: The Carrier machine-gun functions
in the same manner as a British L|MG, in-
cluding when removed (e.g., 3 GF; 6 range),
with one exception. When mounted in a
carrier this BMG only has a ROF of ONE.
Carrier weapons may only fire through their
VCA. All other ATR and BMG rules apply to
Carrier armament normally.
15.7.62 C r e w / We a p o n R e m o v a l —A
weapon may be removed from a Carrier by
its inherent crew, which must also exit.
Removal of any weapon and unloading of
the crew is done using normal loading and
unloading procedures. If the Carrier is K-
KILLed, all weapons are destroyed. A side
note must be maintained as to which weap-
ons are removed from Carriers—or mark
with F-KILL and Bail Out markers (noting
these do not count as Victory Points for the
opponent). A Carrier may no longer fire or
Overrun if its Personnel crew unloads but
it may still move. Any Carrier machine-gun
removed enters play as a Bren L|MG
counter. A British Boys L|ATR and/or Bren
L|MG may be removed from a Carrier B by
its crew. A Bailed Out result does NOT place
a crew in play nor are any weapons removed.
15.8 PORTEES
Portees are gun armed trucks (i.e., -1 AF)
with a Gun mounted on the bed (most in a
REAR Covered Arc). Trucks mounting AT
guns in Portee may not tow H weapons nor
carry any passengers except its inherent
Crew. AT guns mounted in Portees have
their guns facing to the rear two hexsides
(as indicated by the ‘R’ superscript on the
gun value on the counter) unless marked
with a Turret traverse circle.
15.8.1 Crew
Portees carry an ‘inherent’ Crew, treated in
the same manner as an AFV Crew—as per
the rules for Bail Out (i.e., they may Bail
Out; see 12.5.16). A Portees’ Crew receives
Stationary Cover. AT Guns and Crews in
Portee on K-KILLed Trucks are destroyed.
15.8.2 Unloading
An AT Gun may be Unloaded from a Portee
in a two turn Unloading procedure during
which the Gun, Truck, and Crew may not
move or fire. A Crew or larger unit is re-
quired to Unload the Gun. If the Portee re-
ceives an attack by Gunfire or FRAG Fac-
tors, the Unloading process must halt. Make
a side note after the first turn of Unloading.
Replace the Portee counter with the appro-
priate Gun, a Crew and a LT Tr vehicle
counter once unloaded. Note: The ‘37’
Portee is armed with a captured German
PaK 36.
15.9 WATERCRAFT
Watercraft transport Personnel, weapons
and vehicles in Stationary cover in the same
manner as trucks. The values on watercraft
counters are in the following format: Cover
State | Stacking Points they may carry in
WATER hexes. Personnel carry watercraft
in the same manner as M weapons (as de-
noted by the value on the counters as
‘M|WC’), and thus never move on their own.
They may be carried in APCs providing G
or F cover or in trucks, as if they are M
weapons.
15.9.1 Personnel Usage
Personnel units carry watercraft in the same
manner as M weapons, including firepower
reduction for carrying units. A watercraft
may be placed in a water hex by a carrying
Personnel unit ONLY if using Assault move-
ment and the carrying unit may be stacked
ON TOP OF the watercraft to signify it is
riding IN it in the water hex. Any Personnel
unit(s) moving with the carrying unit as a
Platoon may also enter the watercraft at this
time. Adjacent Personnel units may also use
Infiltration to enter a watercraft. Once
placed in its FIRST water hex, a watercraft
may be moved no further during that move-
ment impulse.
15.9.2 Vehicle Usage
The only watercraft that may transport a
vehicle is a ‘Raft (L)’. If using Assault move-
ment, ONE vehicle may be placed ON TOP
OF an ‘L’ Raft in an adjacent water hex or
may exit one to an adjacent non-water hex.
A watercraft may never be carried by Per -
sonnel until any vehicle on the raft has ex-
ited. A vehicle uses ALL Stacking Points of
a watercraft (i.e., no other unit may be
placed on it with the exception of any H
weapon towed or passengers and their L
and M weapons carried in or on the vehicle).
15.9.3 Carrying Heavy Weapons
Rafts are treated in the same manner as
normal transport (Exception: They are en-
tered FROM and exited TO adjacent, non-
water hexes by pushing; large target size H
weapons can only be TOWED onto a water-
craft). One Heavy weapon and its crew may
be carried in the same manner as a vehicle
on a Raft (L).
15.9.4 Water Movement
Once in water hexes, watercraft use the MP
printed on the WC movement icon (waves
over a white background) to move in WA-
F chard LOS principles. Unit ‘A’ cannot
A see ‘C’ and ‘D’ since the LOS is along
B C
E
‘E’ does have to add a +1/1L for ‘B’s hex when firing at ‘F’, even if it did NOT touch any Orchard
symbols, since its LOS is NOT along a road and there are greater than FOUR symbols in the hex.
52
TER hexes only and do NOT need Person-
nel on them in order to move (Exception:
Raft WC may also move one hex using Infil-
tration if Personnel of at least 2 SP are on
board). When Personnel move via Infiltra-
tion, their one hex may include entering an
adjacent LAND hex. RAFT type watercraft
may not use Infiltration when carrying a ve-
hicle or H weapon.
15.9.5 Target Status
When firing at Personnel in watercraft while
in WATER hexes, treat them as in Station-
ary cover and apply Casualties normally.
However, NO morale check is taken follow-
ing a ‘C’ result when in a water hex. Water-
craft may not be ‘sunk’, only their passen-
gers are attacked.
15.9.6 Rafts and S-Boats
The only difference between ‘Raft’, ‘Raft (L)’
and ‘S-Boat’ counters in game terms is their
speed and Stacking Points limits, including
the ability of ‘L’ rafts to transport vehicles.
All are considered Watercraft.
15.9.7 Amphibious Ve -
hicles—The American LVT4 is
a fully tracked amphibious
APC. Unlike watercraft, it is a
vehicle and is never carried by
Personnel.
15.9.8 Water Entry and Exit— Amphibi-
ous vehicles are denoted by having a back-
side WATER movement icon. They may en-
ter a water hex using Assault movement but
must stop upon reaching the first water hex
entered. Flip the vehicle counter over to its
water movement side upon entering. Once
flipped, the vehicle may enter water hexes
at the cost of 1 MP each but may NOT use
water MP to enter a non-water hex. Once
adjacent to a non-water hex, the vehicle may
exit, using Assault movement, and is flipped
back to its ‘land’ movement side.
15.9.9 Target Status—When targeting an
amphibious vehicle in a water hex, treat it
as if it is in Hull Defilade, without reference
to its facing. It is also considered a moving
target at ALL times.
15.9.10 LVT4 MG—The LVT4 is armed with
a 10 GF MG on each of the port and star-
board sides. These may never fire at tar -
gets directly in the front or rear of the ve-
hicle.
The example at left il-
lustrates the principles
of a Crossfire. Two
consecutive Gunfire or
Grenade Attack im-
pulses (i.e., HPT attacks
never create a
Crossfire) across op-
posing hexsides like ‘A’
create a Crossfire. Hexside combinations like
‘B’ and ‘C’ do NOT create a Crossfire.
The example at left illustrates Or-
see ‘B’ due to the Blind Hex created
by hex P3, which contains more than
FOUR Orchard symbols. Unit ‘A’ can
D
a road into both hexes. Unit ‘B’ does
NOT have to apply a DRM/shift for
Obscuring terrain through ‘C’s hex
due to the Orchard Road effect. Unit

K the Woods in hex N6. Assuming that hex N7 was
G as it could see over the Level +10 LOS obstacle
V tack. ‘V’ still receives the +1/1L cover for the
C M
P U
B S
F I
A H
a) Unit ‘A’ in hex L7 has an LOS to ‘B’ in hex L4.
It does NOT have an LOS to ‘C’ in hex L3.
Explanation: A Hillock on a Hill creates a con-
tour, getting rid of the ‘pancake’ effect and al-
lowing for LOS across the Hillock contour
hexside. The intervening Woods in hex L4
blocks LOS to L3.
b) Unit ‘D’ in hex Q4 has an LOS to ‘E’ in hex S7,
and has to pay +1|1L for the Crops hex in R5
and +1|1L for the Crops hexside S6-R6, for a
total of +2|2L.
Explanation: Crops are Obscuring terrain and
add +1/1L per hexside along an LOS. If an LOS
A D
C 1
vening Woods in hex N6. If hex N7 were a level
+20 Hill instead, it would still not be able to see
hex N5, as N5 would be a blind hex created by
a level +20 hill, a unit would have LOS to hex N4,
represented by the Woods in N6.
e) Unit ‘J’, which is ‘Up’ in the ‘Partial’ Hillock in hex
Q R7 has an LOS to unit ‘V’ in O3, ‘L’ in R4 and ‘M’ in
T3, with NO Obscuring Crops applied to its at-
Hedge hexside in O4/P3. ‘J’ has no LOS to ‘K’ in
N1 due to a Blind Hex created by Orchards in O2.
Explanation: The LOS for ‘J’ is in a +5 Hillock
hex. This +5 level position allows it to see over
ALL the intervening level +5 terrain (Crops). The
D Orchard terrain in hex O2 creates a Blind Hex in
N1 since the ENTIRE hex is treated as Orchard
L due to 4+ art symbols.
f) Unit ‘N’ in hex P7 has an LOS to ‘O’ in hex T7.
Explanation: The Hillock in hex R7 is consid-
ered a ‘Partial’ Hillock, and it does NOT block
LOS in ANY way. If this were instead a Desert
R map, then hex R7 would be considered a ‘Full’
Hillock, and would block the LOS. Crops along
the LOS will Obscure it.
T g) Unit ‘P’ in hex M4 has no LOS to ‘Q’ in hex P2.
Explanation: The N3-O3 Hedge hexside blocks
LOS on the same level. LOS that runs directly
along level +5 hexside terrain can only be traced
to the hex just behind that hexside terrain. Thus,
E an LOS exists from hex M4 to hex O3, but not
beyond to P2.
N J O h) Unit ‘F’ in hex L5 has no LOS to ‘R’ in hex P5.
Explanation: Since there are four or more Or-
chard art depictions in hex O5, the ENTIRE hex
is considered Orchard terrain and a Blind Hex
is created to fire from a higher level, even though
the LOS does not actually touch the Orchard art.
i) Unit ‘S’ in hex N4 has an LOS to ‘R’ in hex P5. It
is exactly ALONG a hexside with Obscuring ter- does NOT have an LOS to ‘T’ in hex Q6.
rain in EACH hex, only ONE Obscuring hex is Explanation: The same level Hedge hexsides of
applied to the LOS (the highest, in the case of ‘S’ and ‘R’ are in the actual hexes of the firing and
Smoke and a +1/1L hex along the same hexside). target units. In the case of the blocked LOS to ‘T’
c) Unit ‘F’ in hex L5 has an LOS to unit ‘G’ in hex in Q6, the intervening O5-P5 Hedge hexside
O2. blocks LOS as it is not in the firing or target
Explanation: ‘F’, on a Level +10 Hill, can see units’ hex.
over ALL the intervening level +5 terrain (Crops j) Unit ‘U’ in hex O4 has no LOS to ‘H’ in hex N7.
and Hedge) for a clear, unobstructed shot at hex Explanation: The intervening Woods in hex N6
‘G’ in hex O2. blocks LOS. If the building in hex O4 had a
d) Unit ‘H’ in hex N7 has no LOS to hex ‘I’ in hex Level +10 location, LOS would still be blocked
N5. due to the creation of a Blind Hex in N7 by the
Explanation: LOS is blocked due to the inter- Woods in N6.
k) Unit I in hex N5 has an LOS to unit R in P5. The
Orchard terrain in O5 acts as Obscuring terrain,
since firing and target unit are both on the same
level. If ‘I’ fires on ‘R’, +1/1L cover is applied.
Explanation: The Hedge in hexside O6 is Ob-
scuring terrain, as is the Orchard in O5. How-
ever, only ONE instance of Obscuring terrain is
used when firing along a hexside. If there was a
Smoke marker in O5, the total cover ‘R’ would
receive is +4/4L (i.e., +1/1L + +3/3L = cumula-
tive +4/4L).
The example at left illusrates Cave Dugout LOS principles. Cave ‘A’
can establish LOSs across ALL six hexsides of its hex. However, it
cannot see a unit IN hex M10. Cave ‘B’ can see across three
hexesides, but cannot see into hex L9, nor may it see M9, L10, or
M10. It does have an LOS into hex K11, since the LOS is traced
exactly across any portion of a hexside to lower terrain and an LOS
can be traced to K11 without touching higher hill terrain art (it is a
‘downhill’ shot). Squad ‘1’ in P11 can see units stacked under ‘A’, ‘C’
and ‘D’ but NOT ‘B’. Squad ‘1’ could also NOT see units under a Cave
Dugout marker in N9.
53

APPENDIX A. CHARTS AND TABLES
IA....................................Accuracy Diagram
NR......................................Aerial Attack Diagrams
DA........AFV AF (Armor Factors) vs. Aircraft Attacks
E...............................................AFV Bail Out Table
AFV.......................................................AFV Cards
AA..........Alternate Ammunition Availability Table
C5.......................................Anti-Aircraft Fire Table
C7......................................APC/Truck AF Table
TP...............Attack vs. Transported Personnel Table
BT....................................................Building Table
F2................................................Casualty Table
F1...............................Cover State Effects Table
DT..............................................Demolition Table
EC........................................Emplacements Chart
D1..................................................F-KILL Table
C3........Flamethrower vs. Vehicles and H Weapons
CC.....................................Glider Crash Casualties
GC............................................Glider Crash Table
GA.................................Grenade Attack Table
GM............................Gun & Mortar Ammo Table
BP................................Gun Penetration Table
C4..............................................H Weapon De-
struction Table HPT Hits by Weapons ≤ 20mm
HE.........................................HE Penetration Table
B.............................................Hit Location Table
A1.........................................Hit Probability Table
I...........................................Immobilization Table
IS...............................Indirect Fire Vs Vehicle Shifts
C2.................................Indirect HE | FFE | Air -
craft Bomb Attacks Vs Vehicles And H Weapons Table
G................................Indirect Fire Affects Table
C8................................................Interceptor Table
C1....................................................K-KILL Table
L...........................LOS Blind Hex Creation Table
ME.......................................................Melee Table
A2.....................................MG Hit Probability Table
D2...................................................M-KILL Table
M......................................................Morale Table
CB.....................Off-Board Counter-Battery Matrix
OA..................................OOB Addition Table
P................................Personnel Movement Table
FR.........................Rubble | Flame | Removal Table
A3...................................SCW Hit Probability Table
C6.....Small Arms vs. Vehicles and H Weapons Table
S......................................Spotting Ranges Table
D3..........................................Suppression Table
TS.........................................Target Size HPT DRM
TC.................................................Terrain Chart
T...................................Tow/Carry Personnel Table
U.................................................Underbelly Hits
V.........................................Victory Point Table
APPENDIX B. ACRONYMS
A............................................................After
AA.....................................................Anti-Aircraft
AAMG........................Anti-Aircraft Machine Gun
AFV.................................Armored Fighting Vehicle
AP..................................................Armor Piercing
APC.............................Armored Personnel Carrier
APCR ..................Armor Piercing Composite Rigid
APDS..................Armor Piercing Discarding Sabot
ATR...............................................Anti-Tank Rifle
B...................................................Blocking; Before
BAR..............................Browning Automatic Rifle
BMG..........................................Bow Machine Gun
BOT..............................................Burst On Target
C..................................................Casualties; Clear
CA.......................................................Covered Arc
CFF......................................................Call For Fire
CH..................................................Critical Hit
CMG.....................................Coaxial Machine Gun
CoT..................................................Cost of Terrain
DRM...........................................Die Roll Modifier
e.................................................ENTIRE hex terrain
F-KILL..........................................Firepower KILL
FFE..................................................Fire For Effect
FO...............................................Forward Observer
FOW.....................................................Fog Of War
FRAG................................Fragmentation Factors
F........................................................Full Cover
FT..................................................Flame Thrower
G...........................................................Good Cover
GF..................................................Gunfire Factors
H-D.....................................................Hull Defilade
H|AT.................................Heavy Anti-Tank Gun
HE...................................................High Explosive
HEAT............................High Explosive Anti-Tank
HOW .......................................................Howitzer
HPN...................................Hit Probability Number
HPT.......................................Hit Probability Table
I......................................................................Improved
K-KILL.....................................Catastrophic KILL
LD...............................................Linear Depression
LH.........................................................Lower Hull
LOS....................................................Line Of Sight
L|AT................................Light Anti-Tank Weapon
L|ATR...................................Light Anti-Tank Rifle
L|FT......................................Light Flame Thrower
E
K D
I
G F
H
a) Unit ‘A’ in hex Q6 applies the +1/1L Obscur-
ing Crops terrain in R5 when tracing an LOS to
‘C’ in S5.
Explanation: The LOS drops in even incre-
ments of +10 PER HEX. ‘A” is in Level +30
terrain; the next hex along the LOS, R5, drops
to +20, and the target hex, S5, is Level +10
terrain. The same effect applies between ‘A”
and ‘I’, as well as ‘A” and ‘D’.
b) Unit ‘A” has an LOS to ‘G’ in hex N7.
Explanation: Because of the effects of Con-
tinuous Slope, this LOS is treated as a SAME
LEVEL LOS. Thus, the Orchard terrain in O7
is treated as OBSCURING terrain.
c) Movement by ‘F’ to hex S7 represents Pre-
cipitous Terrain (8.13.6).
Explanation: Combine the Hillock hexside with
the Hill in S7 for a level change of +15.
54
L|MG........................................Light Machine Gun
L|MTR...............................................Light Mortar
M..............................................................Masonry
M|AT................................Medium Anti-Tank Gun
M|ATR................................Medium Anti-Tank Rifle
M-KILL..........................................Mobility KILL
MA..............................................Main Armament
MG....................................................Machine Gun
M|MG...................................Medium Machine Gun
M|MTR..........................................Medium Mortar
NCO............................Non-Commissioned Officer
O.........................................................Obscuring
OOB.................................................Order of Battle
OT.....................................................Open Topped
PaK......................................Panzer Abwehr Kanone
(superscript)
R ..................................................Rear CA
ROF......................................................Rate Of Fire
(superscript)
S ........................................Sponson
S...................................................Stationary Cover
SCW..................................Shaped Charged Weapon
SPG............................................Self Propelled Gun
SSR......................................Scenario Special Rules
TCA.........................................Turret Covered Arc
TD.................................................Tank Destroyer
TR................................................................Tracks
TUR....................................................................Turret
UH.........................................................Upper Hull
VCA.......................................Vehicle Covered Arc
...............Amphibious vehicle/Watercraft icon
...........................Fully-tracked vehicle icon
...........................Half-tracked vehicle icon
.................................Wheeled vehicle icon
B
C
A
d) Unit ‘A’ has an LOS to ‘E’ and ‘B’.
Explanation: No Blind Hex is created by the
same Hill the firing unit is on, creating an LOS
to ‘E’. The effects of Continuous Slope makes
the Orchard in S5 Obscuring terrain.
e) Unit ‘A’ has no LOS to ‘K’ in hex N4.
Explanation: Continuous Slopes create SAME
LEVEL LOS; the Hedge on hexside O5/P5
blocks same level LOS beyond O5.
f) Unit ‘C’ has no LOS to ‘E’; unit ‘D’ does.
Explanation: The ‘pancake effect’ of Hills re-
quires a contour hexside in order to see to
another level. The Hillock hexside in R4 acts
as a contour hexside for this purpose.
g) ‘A’ has no LOS to ‘H’ or ‘F’.
Explanation: Blocking terrain (Woods in N7)
always creates Blind Hexes. The Woods in R6
rise to Level +30, the same height as ‘A’.

APPENDIX C. OPTIONAL RULES
The rules below are presented for use upon the
mutual agreement of both players.
D1.0 No Hand Grenades—Before making a Gre-
nade Attack (including grenade variants, e.g.,
Gammon Bombs), a unit must FIRST roll for
Grenade availability. A die roll less than or equal
to its PRINTED morale must be made to have
grenades available. A unit that fails a Grenade
Attack availability roll is NOT considered to have
made an attack (i.e., it may Infiltrate).
D2.0 Hidden Movement—Any unit that is hid-
den may move from a hex/location to an adja-
cent/same hex location using Crawling Move-
ment and remain hidden if no enemy unit (or
‘C’ marker) is in the newly entered hex/loca-
tion. Make a side note of this form of movement.
D3.0 Bayonet Charge—When using Personnel
Platoon Movement, a leader may declare a Bayo-
net Charge at any point when it and at least
one other non-leader personnel unit is other -
wise still able to move. A special Bayonet Charge
Morale Check is made by the leader, with a +4
DRM (making it harder to pass). If the leader
passes the check, it and all other units cur -
rently moving as part of the Platoon are eligible
to make a ‘Bayonet Charge’.
D3.1 T reat all personnel as if temporarily
marked with a Courage marker (i.e., ignore
morale checks) and treat ALL units as if Run-
ning, even if previously marked as Winded. Per -
sonnel executing a Bayonet Charge may IMME-
DIATELY enter enemy PERSONNEL hexes.
Once all units taking part in the Bayonet Charge
cease moving, Melee may be conducted nor -
mally with the following exceptions: The Bayo-
net Charging units do NOT take melee morale
checks. At the end of the Movement Segment
remove all temporary Courage markers from
Bayonet Charging units. They are treated nor-
mally thereafter, including marking all units
that took part in a Bayonet Charge with a
Winded marker.
D3.2 Target Panic—A friendly personnel unit(s)
adjacent to an enemy personnel conducting a
Bayonet Charge may ‘panic’ at the approach of
the enemy IF the total enemy units making the
charge in the LOS of the friendly unit(s) exceeds
their Stacking Point value by DOUBLE or more.
Play is immediately halted in the same manner
as Opportunity Fire and an immediate Panic
morale check is made by so-affected friendly
unit(s). Any unit(s) that fails is immediately
marked as Broken and may IMMEDIATELY
move as a Broken unit normally BEFORE the
enemy Bayonet Charge can continue.
D4.0 Night Vulnerability—Any personnel unit
with a PRINTED morale level of 7 or less must
pass a morale check in order to move at night
(Exception: Unless stacked with a NON Broken
leader or entering from off map). Units that fail
this morale check are marked as moved but oth-
erwise suffer no additional consequences.
D5.0 Blowing Bridges—A Satchel Charge may
be used to blow a bridge hex (exception: NOT the
Arnhem Bridge). The attack must be announced
against the bridge ONLY and is otherwise
handled normally. On a C6 or greater result place
a Rubble marker in the hex. The rubble is con-
sidered to be down in whatever terrain the bridge
formerly crossed, at the level of the terrain (usu-
ally -10), and no longer affects LOS at the previ-
ous level.
D6.0 Crashing a Roadblock—Any non-small
(or very small) AFV/APC may attempt to crash
through (eliminate) a roadblock. The vehicle
must be using Assault Movement and must roll
immediately upon entering a hex that shares a
Roadblock hexside, applying die roll results as
follows:
ROADBLOCK CRASHING TABLE
DR Result
Roadblock removed; vehicle enters
1-2 adjacent hex
Roadblock removed; vehicle enters
3-4 adjacent hex marked with M-KILL
Roadblock NOT removed; vehicle marked
5-6 with M-KILL in current hex
Roadblock NOT removed; vehicle replaced
7-8
with non-Burning wreck in current hex
Roadblock NOT removed; vehicle replaced
9-0 with Burning wreck in current hex
D7.0 Path Through Crops—Any tracked (in-
cluding half-tracks) vehicle that enters a Crops
hex places a LANE marker in the hex. Any Crops
hex marked with a Lane marker is treated as
Open Ground for LOS (only) purposes.
D8.0 Bocage Spider Hole—Any Hedgehog or
Foxhole that begins play adjacent to a Bocage
hexside also serves as a passage to the other side
of any connected Bocage hexside for personnel
units moving from UNDER the Emplacement. The
cost to enter the adjacent hex is treated nor-
mally IGNORING the Bocage hexside (i.e., pay
ONLY for the other terrain in the adjacent hex).
D9.0 High Timber—A Forest hex may be de-
fined to be Level +30 or higher.
D10.0 Gun Jamming—Any time a weapon of
any kind (including H weapons and vehicle MGs
but excluding personnel printed Gunfire Factors
and Grenades) fires, roll an extra die to represent
the possibility of ‘jamming’. Original DOUBLES
results in a weapon ‘jam’. Place an F-KILL marker
on a jammed weapon, including on infantry
weapons.
D10.1 Clearing Jammed/F-KILLed Weapons—
The breech of any ‘jammed’ (including weapons
F-KILLed normally) weapon may attempt to be
‘cleared’. Only weapons currently manned/car -
ried by non-Broken/Surrendered units and those
of NON Suppressed vehicles may roll. A die roll of
‘1’ during the End of Turn Segment clears the
weapon (i.e., removes the F-KILL marker).
D10.2 Jammed Turret—Any turreted vehicle
hit by an HE/AP round in the turret may result
in a ‘jam’. A subsequent die roll is made and on
a roll of ‘1’ the turret is considered jammed. It
may no longer change turret covered arc.Once
jammed, a turret may not be ‘freed up’ during
play. When this rule is used during an ATS cam-
paign, all jammed turrets are automatically freed
up at the end of a scenario.
D11.0 AFV Crew Survival—Any AFV crew that
Bails Out is placed on the board in the AFVs hex
in the form of a Reduced-side crew of that na-
tionality. When first placed in play, treat it as if
using Running Movement (including the place-
ment of a Winded marker). It is treated normally
as a crew for all other purposes.
D12.0 Closed Transport—The personnel car -
ried in any half-track or truck may be removed
from the map and a side note made of the units
being carried.
D13.0 Re-grouping—Players may ‘re-group’
Reduced Squads/crews/Tank Hunter
Teams of the SAME value to create full-
strength squads and remove Casualties
markers. As long as ALL Casualties are ac-
counted for the owning player may freely
flip/remove units from play.
D14.0 On Board Artillery—An FO may direct
the Indirect Fire of any on-board mortar or Heavy
crew-served weapon instead of off-board artil-
lery.
D15.0 Alley Fire—Any unit moving BETWEEN
two terrain types that have other terrain that is
55
in the LOS of the firing unit (e.g., two buildings
that are not connected, i.e., have open ground
between them) may be fired on using the Casu-
alty Table and uses the OTHER terrain instead
IF the entire hexside between the terrain is in
the LOS of the firing unit. This fire is HALVED
on the Casualty Table and HPT attacks may NOT
use Alley Fire.
D 1 6 . 0 I n e x p e r i e n c e d G u n a n d Ve h i c l e
Crews—Any crew designated as ‘inexperienced’
adds a +2 HPN DRM to all HPT hit attempts.
D17.0 Supplemental Armor Plating—Crews in
the field occasionally added to their AFV’s armor
with bogie wheels, logs, and concrete. Any AFV
with Supplemental Armor adds +1 to its Front
UH and LH Armor Factors.
D18.0 No Quarter—‘No Quarter’ may be declared
to be in effect at any time (by voluntary player
declaration, just call out, “no quarter!”) Once in
effect, Surrendered units of both sides may be
fired on.
D19.0 Ramming—Vehicles may ram one an-
other in an attempt to M-KILL the opposing ve-
hicle ONLY if the targeted vehicle is NOT already
moving or marked as Moved. A ramming attempt
may be announced from an adjacent hex by a
vehicle of the same size or one that is a larger
(i.e., a small vehicle may not ram a normal sized
or large vehicle) target size. The ramming vehicle
must be using Assault Movement. An immediate
die roll is made upon entry. On a roll of ‘1’, the
target vehicle ONLY is M-KILLed. One a ‘9-0’ ONLY
the ramming vehicle is M-KILLed. On a ‘2’, BOTH
vehicles are M-KILLed. Any M-KILLed vehicle re-
mains in its current facing.
D20.0 Command Detonated Explosives—Hid-
den mines may be set up in any hex and may be
automatically detonated by a pre-designated
(make a side note) non-Broken/Surrendered Per-
sonnel unit that passes a morale check when it
wishes to immediately detonate the minefield
(usually when an enemy unit enters). Treat this
usage as Opportunity Fire/Fire impulse for the
‘triggering’ unit as if it used a L weapon.
D21.0 Enemy Turned the Road Signs—Any
time a vehicle comes to a road hex with a ‘fork’ in
it a die roll is immediately made. On a roll of ‘1’
the vehicle is considered ‘lost’ and the opposing
player may choose the road hex (Exception: Can-
not enter a just-exited hex) it next enters. The
vehicle, and any others in a platoon or convoy it
is moving as part of, must continue down this
road until coming to another fork (at which time
the same routine is repeated) or its Movement
Points for that turn are expended. Any friendly
vehicle entering the SAME fork during that Move-
ment Segment applies a ‘-2’ DRM (making it easier
to get lost) after at least one vehicle has become
lost that turn.
D22.0 Command Control—Unless ADJACENT
to a non-Broken/Surrendered friendly leader at
the time it wishes to move, no Personnel unit
may use Running or Assault Movement (it may
Crawl) during the Movement Segment unless it
passes a morale check.
D23.0 Snipers—Any leader provided in a sce-
nario may instead be designated as a ‘sniper’,
using its morale as its RANGE and Gunfire MUL-
TIPLIER also (e.g., a 1|1|8 may fire 8 Gunfire
Factors to a Range of ‘8’, or 4 Gunfire Factors out
to 16 hexes. A Sniper may ONLY fire on leader
counters, and may set up hidden. Otherwise,
treat sniper fire against leaders normally (i.e.,
use the Casualty Table; apply terrain column
shifts).
D24.0 Looting—Any personnel unit that newly
enters a building location rolls one die. On a die
roll of ‘0’, it is ‘looting’ the interior and immedi-
ately ceases its movement impulse.
D25.0 Fanatic Resistance Nest —Any one
building may be declared a ‘Fanatic Resistance
Nest’ by a player that sets up on board if Victory
Conditions call for one side or the other to con-
trol one or more buildings or building hexes to
win. Treat all non-Broken/Surrendered person-
nel in any ONE secretly recorded building (in-
cluding all hexes and locations of a multi-hex
building) as if they are marked with Courage
markers until at least ONE enemy unit (includ-
ing vehicles) enters any building location of that
building.
D26.0 Random ROF—A weapon with a ROF of
greater than one may only fire again if its attack
resulted in a die roll equal to DOUBLE its ROF or
less (e.g., a ‘2’ ROF M|MG may only use its sec-
ond ROF if its first attack resulted in a die roll of
‘4’ or less).
D27.0 Camouflage Smocks—During scenarios
set in 1944-45 all German squads with a
PRINTED morale level of 8+ receive a one column
shift LEFT or +1 HPN DRM when fired on in Woods
or Brush hexes.
D28.0 Mulligan Roll—The player that receives
the first ROLLED FOR Initiative also receives a
‘mulligan’, i.e., the opportunity to re-roll any ONE
die roll. Once a mulligan is used, it is ‘passed’ to
the opponent for him to use once, and so on.
D29.0 Hasty Mines—Add a +1 DRM (making it
easier to roll greater than, i.e., pass through)
mines that are Hasty Mines.
D30.0 Ditches—All non-Paved road (not Paths)
hexes (i.e., not gray) are considered to have
‘ditches’ on either side. Treat these hexes as if a
Foxhole counter is within ONLY when a person-
nel unit wishes to ENTER the ‘Ditch’ by placing it
under a Foxhole marker (which is removed from
play when no unit is in the ditch).
D31.0 Wide Boulevards—Any paved road hex
(i.e., gray) that is adjacent to at least FOUR other
paved road hexes is considered a ‘wide boule-
vard’. An ADDITIONAL one RIGHT column shift
(but NOT an additional -1 HPN DRM) is applied
to any personnel in such hexes when fired on
using the Casualty Table, INCLUDING resolving
HE (including artillery and aircraft bombs)
against the personnel.
D32.0 Concrete Trenches—Treat Anti-Tank
Ditch and Hedgehogs with a +3 FULL Cover ben-
efit.
D33.0 Pre-Game Massive Bombardment—This
is along the lines of the bombing of St. Lo, not to
be over -used. The attacking player places a CFF
in any hex on the map. Roll for accuracy nor -
mally. Every hex within FIFTEEN hexes of the
resulting FFE is attacked by 200+ HE (otherwise
treated normally as OBA).
D34.0 Civilians on the Battlefield—Any battle-
field still containing its civilian population is
treated as follows. Buildings may only be entered
in their ground level. No vehicle may enter a build-
ing location (it may use the street outside). If one
side is entering all of its personnel from off-board,
no building may be entered unless an enemy per-
sonnel unit was in the building hex and in the
LOS of a friendly unit first.
D35.0 Flooded Terrain—Treat ALL of the low-
est non-Ravine/River/Stream terrain level on the
map as ‘mud’ or ‘flooded’ terrain. Roads still cross
such terrain, but are considered Embankments
in those hexes. In the case of Mud, treat all such
hexes as Swamp. Otherwise, treat them as ford-
able pond hexes. Players may instead (or addi-
tionally) treat all Woods or Crops hexes as mud
or flooded. When either of these exists, ALL Ra-
vines are treated as Creek terrain instead.
D36.0 FO Hides—All FOs set up on map may
automatically set up hidden in any eligible ter -
rain.
D37.0 GR-6 Sound Locator Device— New
sound locator devices were used on Okinawa.
Sound Locator teams were rushed from Fort
Benning at the last minute to join the invasion.
If the American player is provided the GR-6 Loca-
tor device by SSR, locating enemy batteries takes
place on a die roll of 1-4 and the American player
need not assign a friendly battery to neutralize a
Japanese battery. All other Counter Batter rules
apply normally. Once located, the American
player may neutralize ONE Japanese battery us-
ing the GR-6 Locater, treating the American bat-
tery as a 149+ GUN on the OFF-BOARD
COUNTER BATTERY MATRIX.
D38.0 U.S.M.C. M1A1 75mm PACK ARTIL-
LERY—The American M1A1 H|HOW game piece
may be moved in the same manner as a ME-
DIUM weapon using the following rules.
D38.1 Dismantling/Moving/Firing—If other -
wise eligible to use Direct Fire, the gun may be
readied for movement (i.e., NOT fired during the
same turn). The crew is considered to be ‘dis-
mantling’ and ‘packing’ the weapon for move-
ment. Mark the weapon with both F-KILL and
No Fire markers instead of an ‘F’ marker. Once in
this state the H weapon may be moved as if it is
an M weapon. It may ALSO fire, but is treated as
if it has a ROF of ONE and may NOT double its
ROF following the placement of a BOT marker.
When so-marked, the gun is treated as an H
weapon for ALL other purposes and may be re-
verted to its normal state in the same manner
(i.e., use of a Direct Fire opportunity; may fire
normally the NEXT turn) as used for ‘disman-
tling’ the gun. ONLY American and British Per -
sonnel may dismantle an M1A1 H|HOW.
D39 Sherman Wooden Supplemental Armor—
Marine tank regiments utilized wooden supple-
mental armor to help reduce the effectiveness of
Japanese close combat techniques. These wood
casings proved marginally effective. In any sce-
nario providing one or more M4A1/M4A2/POA
tanks, the American player may mark ONE THIRD
of his tanks as equipped with wood supplemen-
tal armor. Tanks with supplemental armor must
be revealed as soon as an enemy unit estab-
lishes a LOS. When tanks with supplemental
armor are attacked in Close Assault (regardless
of facing), deduct ONE from the Melee Value of
the attacking unit(s). Wooden supplemental ar -
mor has no other effect on play.
a) The 1|1|9 leader leading the MG 42 + 8|5|9 in
hex O4 may provide its 2R shifts to ALL three
Casualty Table ROF ‘shots’ by the MG 42, us-
ing three separate impulses OR unlike an H
weapon, all in one impulse. After the first ROF
is used, the M|MG must set its covered arc
due to being in a building location (see 12.6.33).
b) If the MG 42 fires on the Russian 1|1|8, it
may ONLY fire on the 8|2|8 and/or 6|4|8 during
the same turn. The 8|5|9 COULD fire on the
enemy 4|3|6 using its PRINTED GF, but the ‘8’
will be reduced to a ‘6’ due to the carried M
weapon (see 12.5.51). The leader MAY ALSO
apply its 2R leadership to the squad’s attack
(see 12.5.441).
56
INDEX
A
360 mounts..........................3.5.8, 12.5.142, 15.3.1
AA, Anti-Aircraft Fire............................12.16.6, 12.4
AAMG, Anti-Aircraft MG.................15.2.23, 12.5.173
AC, Armored Cars.........................15.1.2, 3.5.51
Acronyms...........................................................2.2
Adding Height (to the level of a hex).....................6.2.4
Aerial Accuracy Chart....................12.16.41, 12.16.3
Aerosols..............................................................6.5
AF......................12.5.132, 3.5.5, 3.6, 7.6.1, 12.5.23
AFV Bail Out Table (E)...........................12.5.16, 7.1
AFV Cards.................................3.6, 3.5.51, 12.5.23
AFV K-Kill Table (C1)....................................12.5.13
AFV Platoon Movement......................11.4.7, 11.3.24
AFV Smoke Candles.........................................6.4.9
AFV, Armored Fighting Vehicles......15.1, 3.5.51, 3.5
AFV/APC Assault Fire.....................................12.8.2
AirB, Airbursts....................................7.1, 12.5.654
Aircraft and spotting..........................6.3.31, 12.16.2
Aircraft attacks................................................12.16
Aircraft Bombing Attacks.............................12.16.81
Aircraft Cannon........................................12.16.822
Aircraft Counter Battery Fire..........................12.16.9
Aircraft Interceptors......................................12.16.5
Aircraft MG...............................................12.16.821
Alternate AP ammunition..................................14.10
Alternate crews...............................................14.2.6
Ammunition limitations......................................3.5.9
Amphibious vehicles.......................................15.9.7
Anti-Aircraft Fire (AA)..........................12.16.6, 12.4
Anti-Aircraft MG (AAMG)...............15.2.23, 12.5.173
Anti-tank rifles, ATR...........................................14.5
Anti-tank trench..................................................9.2
Anti-vehicle MG fire........................................14.3.3
AP/HE DIFF................................................12.5.131
APC as targets...................15.7.2, 12.5.1322, 3.5.52
APC, Armored Personnel Carriers...........15.7, 3.5.52
APCR..........................................................14.10
APDS..........................................................14.10
Armor Command................................................15.5
Armor Factor.......12.5.132, 3.5.5, 3.6, 7.6.1, 12.5.23
Armored Cars (AC)..............................15.1.2, 3.5.51
Armored Fighting Vehicles (AFV).....15.1, 3.5.51, 3.5
Armored Personnel Carriers (APC)..........15.7, 3.5.52
Artillery................................................3.5.10, 12.12
Artillery Accuracy.........................................12.12.2
Artillery Accuracy Diagram............................12.12.2
Artillery Ammunition Supply.......................12.12.31
Artillery Procedure.......................................12.12.2
Assault Fire, Restrictions...............................11.3.32
Assault Fire, ROF............................12.8.21, 12.8.13
Assault Fire, Personnel.....................12.8.1, 12.5.53
Assault Fire, Vehicles......................................12.8.2
Assault Movement, Personnel.........11.3.12, 12.5.632
Assault Movement, Vehicles.............................11.4.1
AT minefields.................................................9.7.41
ATR, Anti Tank Rifles..........................................14.5
Attack Routines......................12.5, 12.12.2, 12.11.1
Automatic morale results.................................10.3.2
Automatic unload............................................11.5.9
B
B-SM-I ............................... 6.4.1, 6.3.41, 8.3.152
Bail Out .................................. …12.5.16, 9.7.91
Bamboo .................................................. 8.32.23
Bangalore Torpedoes ............................ 14.13.13
Banzai Charge .......................................... 1 3 . 2 . 6
BAR Gunner ............................................. 3 . 5 . 3 6
Barrage ............................................ … 1 2 . 1 2 . 6 2
Barrage limit ....................................... . 1 2 . 1 2 . 6 3
Battery contact .................................... . . . 1 2 . 1 2 . 3
Battery limits ...................................... . . . 1 2 . 1 3 . 1
Bazooka .......................................... .14.4, 14.4.5
Black dot AF ......................................... 12.5.132
Blind hexes .................................... ………6.2.61
Blockhouse .................................................. 9 . 3
Blocking Terrain ......................... 7.1, 6.2.3, 6.2.61
BMG, Bow MG ...................................... 1 5 . 2 . 2 2
Bocage ............................................. .8.1, 6.8.11
Bomb dust .............................................. 6 . 5 . 2 6
Bomb load .......................... .12.16.81, 12.16.53

Bombing attacks ................................. 12.16.811
BOT and Gun Duels ................................ 1 2 . 9 . 1
BOT, Burst On Target ............. 12.5.1122, 15.4.42
Bow MG (BMG) ..................................... 1 5 . 2 . 2 2
Bren Carriers ............................... 15.7.6, 15.2.2
Bridges .................................................. 8 . 3 1 . 5
Broken units .................................. .10.5, 11.5.4
Brush ......................................................... . 8 . 2
Buildings as targets ........................ .8.3.8, 6.3.41
Building colors ....................................... . 8 . 3 . 1 1
Building Cover ............................... 8.3.11, 8.3.4
Building destruction ................................. 8 . 3 . 9
Building LOS ............................................ 8 . 3 . 2
Buildings ................................................... 8 . 3
Buildings with roads ............................... 8 . 2 0 . 6
Bulldozers .......................... ...14.13.11, 14.13.1
Bunker ................................... ...... .............. 9 . 4
Burst On Target (BOT) ............ 12.5.1122, 15.4.42
C
C2 (table) ............................................. . 1 2 . 1 0 . 3
CA, Covered Arc...11.4.2, 12.6.3, 12.16.63
Call for Fire, CFF ........................ 3.5.101, 12.12.2
Canister ammunition ................................. 1 4 . 1 2
Cannon (aircraft) ................................. 12.16.821
Capturing weapons, vehicles ......... 10.9, 12.15.43
Carried weapons ................. ……11.3.3, 12.5.51
Carriers, Bren .............................. .15.7.6, 15.2.2
Casualties .......................... ……12.5.9, 12.5.74
Casualties, crew ....................................... 1 4 . 2 . 4
Casualties, indirect fire ......................... … 1 2 . 4 . 3
Casualty Effects ...................................... 12.5.92
Casualty Morale check .................. .12.5.95, 10.3
Casualty Table (F2) ................................... 1 2 . 5 . 7
Cease Fire.......... ............ . … … … … . 1 2 . 1 6 . 8 3
Cellars ................................................... 8.3.12b
CFF, Call For Fire ................... ..3.5.101, 12.12.2
CH, Critical Hit AP ................................ 12.5.114
CH, Critical Hit HE ................................ 12.5.115
Checking morale ....................................... ...10.3
Clear terrain ............................................... . . . 7 . 1
Cliffs ........................................................ 8 . 1 3 . 5
Close Assault ...................... ..12.15, 12.1, 12.4.5
Close Assault attackers ....................... . 1 2 . 1 5 . 3 3
Close Assault segment ................................ 4 . 4 . 3
Close Assault, vehicles ............... 12.15.4, 10.4.2
CMG Coaxial MG ................................. … 1 5 . 2 . 2 1
Coaxial MG (CMG) ............................... … 1 5 . 2 . 2 1
Collateral Fire ....................................... . 1 2 . 5 . 1 0
Collateral Fire (marker) ....................... . 1 2 . 5 . 1 0 1
Combat ....................................................... . 1 2 . 0
Combat engineers.….13.1.2, 12.15.221, 12.15.451
Combat Tables ............................................ 12.10
Command tank ......................................... .15.5.2
Commissars…………3.5.34, 5.3.1, 10.3.3, 12.5.653
Concentration ............................. .6.4.4, 12.12.61
Conscripts .......................................... .........13.4
Contact ............................................... . . . 1 2 . 1 2 . 3
Continued Movement............11.4.5, 4.4.41, 11.4.63, 12.14.71
Continuing overruns ......................... … 1 2 . 1 4 . 7 1
Continuous Slope ....................................... 7 . 2 4
Control ..................................................... 3 . 4 . 5 3
Convoy movement ..................................... 1 1 . 4 . 6
Counter battery fire ................................... . 1 2 . 1 3
Counters .................................................. . . . 3 . 5
Courage ...................................................... 1 0 . 4
Cover state ..................... 2.5.6, 7.1, 6.3.4, 11.5.1
Cover state, different ............................. . 1 2 . 5 . 9 4
Cover state, same .................................. . 1 2 . 5 . 9 3
Cover & movement ...................... 11.3.1, 12.5.63
Covered Arc, CA ............. 11.4.2, 12.6.3, 12.16.63
Crawling ................................. 11.3.11, 12.5.631
Creek ................................................. . . . 8 . 3 1 . 1 4
Crews ............................................. .14.2, 3.5.32
Critical Hit AP ....................................... 12.5.114
Critical Hit HE ...................................... 12.5.115
Crops ......................................................... . . . 8 . 4
Cross Country .......................................... 1 1 . 4 . 1
Crossfire ................................................ 10.10.1
Cushion ....................................... .12.5.655, 7.1
INDEX continued
D Full Cover, exiting ................................. 12.5.667
Full Cover, firing mortars from........14.6.6, 14.6.71, 12.5.662
Deirs ............................................................ 8 . 6
Full Cover, Terrain ........................................ 7 . 1
Demolitions ........................................ 14.13.1-13
Full Hillock (desert only) ........................... 8 . 1 2 . 4
Destroying emplacements .... 9.2.4, 9.8.4, 12.5.72
Dice ............................................................. 3 . 7 G
Die Roll Modifiers, DRM .............................. 3 . 7 . 3
Game end ................................................... 4 . 1 . 4
Direct Fire .......................................... 12.1, 12.5
Game scale ................................................... 2 . 0
Direct Fire range and LOS ....................... 1 2 . 5 . 3
Game Turn Record Track .......................... ...3.4.6
Direct Fire Targets ...................... 12.5.22, 12.5.23
Gammon Bombs .................. 12.15.23, 12.15.21
Dozers .................................... 12.5.72, 14.13.11
GF Reduction ...................................... . . . 1 2 . 5 . 5 1
DRM, Die Roll Modifiers .............................. 3 . 7 . 3
Gliders ....................................................... 12.17
Dropping To Full Cover ....10.5.21, 11.5.4, 12.5.664
Good Cover ......................................... . 1 2 . 5 . 6 4 1
Dug-in heavy weapons ................................ 1 4 . 1
Grant/Lee ............................... ..15.2.13, 14.10.4
Dummies .......................................... 3.4.1, 6.7.5
Graveyard ..................................................... 8 . 9
Dummy minefields .................................... 9 . 7 . 1 0
Grenades, attacks ....................... .12.15.2, 12.3.4
Dust ................................................. 6.2.8, 6.5.2
Gun Duels .............................. .12.9, 12.6.21, 4.6
Dust height and LOS ................................... 6 . 2 . 8
Guns ............................................ .12.2.2, 3.5.43
E Guns vs. H Weapons ........................... . . . 1 2 . 5 . 2 4
Guns vs. Personnel ............................. . . . 1 2 . 5 . 2 2
Elephant Grass ......................................... ..8 .4 .6
Guns vs. Vehicles ............................... . . . 1 2 . 5 . 2 3
Eligibility.........…..4.3, 11.2, 12.5.41, 12.7.1, 12.9.1
Guns, pushing .................................... . . . 1 1 . 3 . 3 4
Eligible to move ................................ 11.2, 4.4.21
Gurkhas ................................................... .13.1.3
Eligible attackers .............................. 12.3, 4.4.21
Eligible targets ............................................ 1 2 . 4 H
Elimination of Surrendered units ....... 1 0 . 8 . 4 2
Half FRAG factors .................... .12.5.71, 12.5.661
Elite tank commanders .... .15.6, 11.3.24, 12.5.171
Half-Tracks, HT .......................... ...15.7.5, 3.5.52
Elite troops ............................................... 1 3 . 1 . 1
H-D, Hull-Defilade ................................ .15.4, 7.7
Embankment ................................................ 8 . 7
H-D, APC vehicles ...................................... 7 . 7 1
Emergency SCW use ............................... 14.4.41
H-D terrain...7.7, 7.1, 15.4.1, 15.4.2
Emplacement counters .............................. 3 . 5 . 1 2
H-D, Truck Type vehicles ........................... 7 . 7 1
Emplacements .............................................. 9 . 0
HEAT .......................................................... 14.10
Empty hexes ............................................. ..6 .8 .3
Heat shimmer ............................................. 6 . 5 . 4
End of Turn Segment .................................. 4 . 4 . 4
Heavy Payload .................................... . 1 2 . 5 . 7 3 2
Engineers, Combat......13.1.2, 12.15.221, 12.15.451
Heavy Weapons ......................................... .3.5.43
Entering enemy hexes ..... ..11.1.3, 10.5.23, 10.7.3
Heavy Weapons as targets ......................... .12.5.8
Entire Hex Terrain ...................................... 7 . 2 3
Heavy Weapons on Rafts ............................ .15.9.3
Entry cost ..................................................... 7 . 1
Heavy Weapons, Set Up ..................... 8.3.61, 14.1
Exact LOS ................................................... 6 . 2 . 3
Heavy Weapons, stacking ............................ .5.2.1
Examining opponent’s stacks .......... …6.6.2, 6.6.3
HE Critical Hit ...................................... 12.5.115
Exhausted Infantry .............................. . 1 1 . 3 . 1 3 2
Hedge ....................................................... … 8 . 1 0
Exit victory points ................................... ..3.4.52
Hedgehog ..................................................... 9 . 6
F Height................................3.1.11, 6.2.4, 6.2.63, 7.1
Height advantage ........................................ 6 . 3 . 5
F-Kill Table (D1) ............................... ……12.5.15
Hex ID .......................................................... 3 . 1
Facing..........................11.4.2, 12.5.132, 12.5.1321
Hex locations ............................................ 3 . 1 . 1 3
Factory ..................................................... 8 . 3 . 1 4
Hexside roads ........................................... 8 . 2 0 . 6
Fast Turret ..................... …15.3.11, 3.5.8, 12.6.5
Hexside terrain ........................................... . . . 7 . 2
FFE dust .................................................. 6 . 5 . 2 6
Hidden minefield ........................ ...9.7.11, 9.7.71
FFE, Fire For Effect ............. ……3.5.102, 12.12.2
Hidden set up ............................................... 6 . 8
Final defensive fire ............................... ..12.14.5
Hide ............................................................. 7 . 1
Fire & Movement Segment ..................... … . . 4 . 4 . 2
High ammunition supply ..................... . 1 2 . 1 2 . 3 1
Fire For Effect, FFE ............. ……3.5.102, 12.12.2
High wall .................................................... . 8 . 1 1
Firegroups .......................... ..12.5.4, 6.94, 13.2.5
Hillocks ...................................................... . 8 . 1 2
Firegroups, APC ....................................... 1 5 . 7 . 4
Hills ........................................................... . 8 . 1 3
Flam notation ................................................ 7 . 1
Hill, same hill LOS ................................ . 8 . 1 3 . 2 1
Flame marker ................. 8.8, 6.4.5, 6.4.83, 8.3.10
Hit Location Table (B) .......................... . . . 1 2 . 5 . 1 2
Flamethrowers............14.7, 12.2.1, 12.5.72, 12.10.4, 12.5.173
Hit Probability Table (A1 aka HPT)......12.5.11, 3.5.7
FT AFV, Suppression Effects ................. 12.5.173
Hit Probability Table, using ................... . 1 2 . 5 . 2 1
Flank.................................11.4.2, 12.5.132, 15.4.3
House ................................................... 8 . 3 . 1 2 . 1
Flares ......................................................... 6 . 9 . 5
HPN determination ............................ … 1 2 . 5 . 1 1 1
Flat-roofed buildings .................................. 8 . 3 . 7
HT, Half-Tracks .......................... ...15.7.5, 3.5.52
Flimsy Huts ........................................ 8 . 3 . 1 2 . 1 1
Hull mounted MA .................................. . 1 5 . 2 . 1 2
Floorpan armor hits ...................................... 7 . 6
Hull-Defilade (HD) ................................ .15.4, 7.7
FO spotting ........................................... 12.11.33
Hurl back, Satchel Charge ................ … 1 2 . 1 5 . 2 4
FO, Forward Observer.... ............. 12.11.3, 3.5.35
Fog of War, FOW ......................... 6.7, 3.4.1, 6.3.4 I
Forcing a minefield ..................................... 9 . 7 . 7
Impulse........... ………4.1, 12.5.43, 12.6.1, 12.16.51
Fords ....................................................... 8 . 3 1 . 4
Immobilization .......................................... … . 7 . 1
Forest ..................................................... 8.32.21
Improved Cover .................................. . 1 2 . 5 . 6 4 2
Forts ...................................................... ..8.3.15
Indirect Fire ............................................. . 1 2 . 1 1
Forward Observer (FO) ................ 12.11.3, 3.5.35
Indirect Fire Accuracy Diagram ......... ……12.12.2
FOW, Fog of War ......................... 6.7, 3.4.1, 6.3.4
Indirect Fire attackers ............................... 1 2 . 3 . 2
Foxhole ........................................................ 9 . 5
Indirect Fire casualties ........................... 12.11.2
FRAG Factors .......................................... 12.5.71
Indirect Fire, cover denied ............ 7.22, 12.11.23
Friendly map edge ...................................... 3 . 4 . 7
Indirect Fire segment .................................. 4 . 4 . 1
Front…...............................11.4.2, 3.5.31, 12.5.132
Indirect Fire targets .................................. 1 2 . 4 . 3
Frozen in melee ................................ … 1 2 . 1 5 . 3 2
Indirect Fire vs. Buildings ........................ 8 . 3 . 4 1
Full Cover................... .... ...12.5.66, 12.5.644, 7.1
Infiltration..........12.15.1, 4.4.3, 7.3.1, 11.1.3, 11.5.5
Full Cover, Dropping.......... 12.5.664, 10.5.2, 11.5.4
Inherent crew ........................................... 1 5 . 7 . 1
Full Cover, Indirect Fire .................... ...12.5.661
57
 INDEX continued

Initiative ....................................................... 4 . 2
Interceptor aircraft .................. 12.16.11, 12.16.5
Interior walls .......................................... 8 . 3. 1 1 b
Intimidation .............................................. 1 0 . 2 . 3
J
Japanese leaders .......................... 13.2.5, 10.3.3
Japanese Personnel .................................... 1 3 . 2
Japanese OBA .......................................... 1 3 . 2 . 3
Jungle .................................................... 8 . 3 2 . 2 2
Junkyard .................................................... 8 . 1 4
K Revealing hidden units ............................... 6 . 8 . 3
Khamsins ................................................... 6 . 5 . 5
K-Kill Table (C1) ................................. . . . 1 2 . 5 . 1 3
Mortars ........................... ...14.6, 12.3.2, 12.5.662
Movement overview ..................................... 1 1 . 1
Movement class ........................................ . 3 . 5 . 6
Multiple firing units .................................. 4 . 4 . 2 4
Multiple targets ..................................... 12.5.741
Multiple terrain effects ...................... … … … . . 7 . 4
Multiple vehicle weapons .................. 15.2, 12.9.3
N
Napalm ........................... …12.16.114, 12.16.112
Neutralize enemy batteries ...... 12.13.22, 3.5.104
Neutralized markers ................................ 3.5.104
Night rules ................................................... 6 . 9
Notes Row ............................................. . 1 2 . 5 . 7 2
O Riders .................................................. … … 1 1 . 5
Rally, order of ......................................... 1 0 . 8 . 3
Rate of Fire, ROF ............. …12.6.2, 4.4.24, 12.3.1
Ravine ........................................................ 8 . 1 9
Razor-Back Ridge ..................................... 8 . 1 3 . 7
Re-Manning Bailed Out AFV .................. 12.5.161
Rear ....................................... ..11.4.2, 12.5.132
Rear -facing weapons ..................... 15.2.3, 11.4.2
Reciprocity (LOS) ........................................ 6 . 2 . 2
Reduced crew penalty ............................... 1 4 . 2 . 5
Registration ............................................ 12.12.1
Removing suppression .......................... 12.5.176
Revealing hidden emplacements ................ …6.8.4
Reverse Movement .................................... 1 1 . 4 . 3
Rice Paddies ............................................... 8 . 4 . 5

L River ...................................................... 8.31.13

L|AT, Light Anti Tank Weapons ............... … . 1 4 . 4
L|M Weapon Firepower Reduction ....... ….12.5.51
L|M weapons .................................. 3.5.4, 11.3.3
Lanes ......................................................... 9 . 7 . 8
Large building ...................................... 8 . 3 . 1 2 . 3
Large target ................................... .3.5.7, 15.4.41
Leaders ...................................... ...13.1.4, 3.5.33
Leader Bonus ............................. 11.3.25, 13.1.4
Leaders and Firegroups .......................... 12 . 5 . 4 4
Leaders as FOs ..................................... 12.11.35
Level markers ............................................. 8 . 3 . 3
Levels ............................................. 3.1.11, 6.2.4
Level +5 terrain ................................. ……6.2.621
Light Anti Tank Weapons (L|AT) .................. 1 4 . 4
Light infantry weapons .................. 3.5.41, 11.3.3
Limited intelligence ................................... … 6 . 6
Line barrage ......................................... 12.12.63
Line of Sight, LOS ................................. .6.2, 3.1
Linear depression ....................................... . 7 . 3
Loading ................................................ . 1 1 . 5 . 3 1
Locating enemy batteries ....................... 12.13.21
Locations .................................................. 3 . 1 . 1 3
Long range fire ...................................... . 1 2 . 5 . 5 2
Long range MG fire .................................. 1 4 . 3 . 2
LOS, Line of Sight ................................. .6.2, 3.1
LOS, obstructed ...................... 6.2.64, 12.11.332
Low ammunition supply ........................ 12.12.31
LVT4 amphib ........................................ 1 5 . 9 . 7
 M Self-Rally ............................................ . 1 0 . 8 . 1 2
M 11/39 ................................................. 15 . 2 . 1 3
M-Kill Table (D2) .............................. ……12.5.14
MA, main armament ...................... 15.2.1, 12.2.2
Machine Guns, vehicle .............................. 1 5 . 2 . 2
Machine-guns, MG ...................................... 1 4 . 3
Main armament (MA) ..................... 15.2.1, 12.2.2
Map entry and exit ...................................... 3 . 4 . 4
Maps ............................................................ 3 . 1
Marines, US ................................................ . 1 3 . 3
Marker counters ........................... 3.5.11, 5.3.21
Masonry Cover ...................................... 12.5.643
Medium weapons .......................... 3.5.42, 11.3.3
Melee12.15, 10.3, 10.4.2, 10.5.24
Melee and passengers/riders .............. . 1 2 . 1 5 . 4 6
Melee vs. Vehciel Morale Check.....12.15.44, 13.2.63
Melee stacking .............................................. 5 . 1
Melee vs. personnel ............................ ….12.15.3
Melee vs. vehicles ................................... 12 . 1 5 . 4
Melee value .................................... … 1 2 . 1 5 . 4 5 1
MG, terrain based CA restrictions ........ ….12.6.33
MG Hit Probability Table (A2) ............ ……12.10.1
MG, Machine-guns ...................................... . 1 4 . 3
MG strafing, aircraft ............................ . 1 2 . 1 6 . 8 2
MG, vehicle .............................................. 1 5 . 2 . 2
Minefield ...................................................... 9 . 7
Minefield clearance ................................... 9 . 7 . 1 3
Minefield lanes ........................................... 9 . 7 . 8
Mines on roads ......................................... 8 . 2 0 . 5
Mines, searching for ................................. 9 . 7 . 1 2
Morale overview .......................................... 1 0 . 1
Morale check .................................. .10.3, 10.2.4
Morale modifiers ....................................... 1 0 . 2 . 1
Mortar spotter ................. 14.6.7, 14.6.6, 12.5.662
OBA, Off-Board Artillery .............................. 12.12
Roadblock .................................................. . . 9 . 8
OBA procedure ..................................... . 1 2 . 1 2 . 2
Roads ......................................................... 8 . 2 0
Obscuring Terrain ...................... .6.2.12, 7.1, 7.4
Rock-strewn terrain .................................... 8 . 2 1
Observation Limits ...................................... 6 . 3 . 3
Rockets, strike and strafe .................. . 1 2 . 1 6 . 1 1 3
Observation Post (OP) Tanks ............. … . 1 2 . 1 1 . 4
Rolling Barrage ..................................... 12.12.64
Obstructed LOS ...................... .6.2.64, 12.11.332
Roofless factory ....................................... 8.3.144
Off-Map Artillery Types ....................... . . . 1 2 . 1 2 . 6
Rooftop ....................................................... 8 . 3 . 7
Off-map Forward Observer .................. 12.11.321
Rounding dice rolls ..................................... 3 . 7 . 1
OOB, Order of Battle ................................... 3 . 4 . 1
Rubble ....................................................... . 8 . 2 2
Open ground .............................................. . 8 . 1 5
Rubble creation ............................ 8.3.9, 8.22.5
Open-Topped Vehicles (OT) ........... 15.1.4, 3.5.54
Running ............................. 1 1 . 3 . 1 3 , 12.5.633
Opportunity Fire ............................... .12.7.2, 4.5
Optional turn rules ....................................... 4 . 7 S
Orchards .................................................... . 8 . 1 6
Orchard Roads ................................ 8 . 1 6 . 2 1 S-Boat .................................................... 1 5 . 9 . 6
Overlays ................................................. .3.2, 7.5 Same hex vehicle facing .................. . 1 2 . 5 . 1 3 2 1
Overrun .......................... 12.14, 11.4.72, 12.3.3 Same hex fire (range 0)...........12.5.1321, 12.16.81, 12.5.3
Sand dunes .............................................. . 8 . 2 3
Overrun attackers ................................. . . . 1 2 . 3 . 3
Overrun personnel .............................. . 1 2 . 1 4 . 6 1 Sangar ...................................................... . . 9 . 9
Overrun resolution .............................. . . . 1 2 . 1 4 . 6 Satchel Charges .................. …12.15.22, 12.5.72
Overrun targets ..................................... . . . 1 2 . 4 . 4 Satchel Charges against vehicles ..... . 1 2 . 1 5 . 4 5 1
Overrun weapons ................................ . 1 2 . 1 4 . 6 2 Satchel Charges, Hurl Back .......... … . 1 2 . 1 5 . 2 4
Overrunning Track Damage ............. …12.14.621 Scenario Cards ......................................... . . 3 . 4
Scenario Special Rules (SSR) ................... . 3 . 4 . 8
Overstacking penalties .................................. 5 . 4
Scrub ..................................................... 8 . 2 4
P SCW Hit Probability Table (A3) .......... … 1 2 . 1 0 . 2
SCW, Shaped Charge Weapons ............... … 1 4 . 4
Palm Groves ............................................... 8 . 1 7
Searching for mines ................................ 9 . 7 . 1 2
Panzerfaust, Pf .................................. 14.4, 14.4.5
Segments .......................................... . 4 . 4 , 4 . 1 . 1
Partial Hillock ........................................... 8 . 1 2 . 3
Self-propelled guns (SPGs) ................... . 1 5 . 1 . 3
Partial Terrain ............................................ 7 . 2 3
Pass ........................................................... .4.1.2
Semi-automatic guns ................................. 1 4 . 8
Passenger fire restrictions ........... 11.5.6, 15.7.52
Sequence of play overview ................... 4 . 1 , 4.4
Passengers as targets ................................ 1 1 . 5 . 7
Set Up area ............................................... 3 . 4 . 3
Passengers fate ........................... 12.5.82, 11.5.8
Set Up order ............................................. 3 . 4 . 2
Passengers in/on APC/AFV.11.5.71, 11.5.73, 15.7.3
Set Up, Heavy Weapons ... .3.5.43, 3.4.11, 5.2.1
Passengers in melee ............................. 12.15.46
Shallow water ....................................... 8 . 3 1 . 4 1
Paths ...................................................... 8.20.41
Shaped charge weapons, SCW ................ … 1 4 . 4
Penetration number ................ 12.5.131, 12.5.23
Shellholes ................................................ 8 . 2 5
Personnel ................................................... 3 . 5 . 3
Slow turret/traverse ........ 15.3.12, 3.5.8, 12.6.5
Personnel assault fire ................. .12.8.1, 12.5.53
Small arms ............................................. 1 2 . 2 . 1
Personnel movement ................................... 1 1 . 3
Small target .............................................. 3 . 5 . 7
Personnel units and steps ....................... 12.5.91
Smoke ...................................................... . . 6 . 4
Personnel stacking ..................................... 5 . 3 . 1
Smoke and LOS ............................ 6.4.5, 6.2.71
Personnel vs. vehicles/H weapons ........ … 1 2 . 5 . 8
Smoke Candles ......................................... 6 . 4 . 9
Pf, Panzerfaust .................................. 14.4, 14.4.5
Smoke duration ........................................ 6 . 4 . 6
PIAT ........................................................... 1 4 . 4
Smoke effects ........................................... 6 . 4 . 5
Pick up and carry ................................... 11.3.33
Smoke grenades ........................... 6.4.7, 4.4.25
Pinned down units ...................................... 1 0 . 6
Smoke removal ....................................... 6 . 4 . 6 2
Pivoting ........................................ 11.4.4, 12.6.4
Smoke, OBA ............................................. 6 . 4 . 4
Platoon movement ................................... . 1 1 . 3 . 2
Smoke, on-map weapons ........................... 6 . 4 . 3
Platoon movement, AFV/APC ................. … 1 1 . 4 . 7
Soft sand .................................................. 8 . 2 6
Platoon, Personnel and vehicles .......... … 1 1 . 3 . 2 4
Solitaire play suggestions .......................... 6 . 8 . 5
Pond .................................................... . 8 . 3 1 . 1 2
Special troop types overview ................... . . 1 3 . 1
Poorly Armored Vehicle Facings .......... ….12.5.132
Special vehicle rules ................................. 1 5 . 0
Portees ....................................................... 1 5 . 8
Special weapon and crew rules ............... … 1 4 . 0
Pre 1943 Russian MA ......................... .........15.5
Speed of play .......................................... . 4 . 1 . 5
Precipitous Terrain (Hill) ......................... . 8 . 1 3 . 6
SPGs, Self-propelled guns .................... . 1 5 . 1 . 3
Pushing guns ....................................... . 1 1 . 3 . 3 4
Spiking weapons ...................................... 1 4 . 9
Sponsons ............................................. 1 5 . 2 . 1 3
R
Sponsons in Gun Duels .......................... 1 2 . 9 . 3
Rafts ............................................. 15.9.6, 15.9.3 Spotter aircraft ................................ . . . 1 2 . 1 6 . 1 0
Railcars ...................................................... 8 . 1 8 Spotting .................................................... . . 6 . 3
Railroad .............................................. .8.20, 8.27 Spotting Ranges Table ............................. . 6 . 3 . 4
Rallying .......................................... …10.8, 4.4.4 Squads ................................... .3.5.31, 12.5.911

58
 GAME PIECE SAMPLES

EMPLACEMENTS TANKS (TURRETED AFV) TRANSPORT

Weapon Pit Bunker AT Trench AFV AFV AFV Light Truck Carrier Staff Car

SELF PROPELLED GUNS (NON TURRETED AFV)

Sangar Hedgehog Cave Dugout Sidecar Wheeled Half Track

Motorcycles APC APC
SPG AFV SPG AFV Open
Topped SPG ARMED NON TRANSPORT TRUCK TYPE VEHICLES
GUNS

Roadblock Blockhouse

360-degree 360-degree Armed Truck

Gun w/slow AA Gun w/ Heavy Portee Portee
traverse ‘8’ AA value Howitzer
OTHER ARMED VEHICLES
Minefield Mines AT Mine Wire
Lane

MARKERS

Heavy AA w/ AT Gun Medium Gun-armed Armored Flamethrowing

no AA value Howitzer Half Track Car w/AA SPG
AIRCRAFT
Collateral Courage Turret Suppressed PERSONNEL
Fire Marker Medal Marker Marker

FO BAR Commissar Stuka DFS 230 Sturmovik

Burning Wreck Flame Full Cover Gunner Glider
Wreck Marker Marker
LIGHT AND MEDIUM WEAPONS

German German Wounded

Smoke ‘1’ Melee Moved Fired Officer NCO NCO
Side Up Marker Marker Marker
Light Medium Light
Mortar Mortar ATR

Reduced Gurkha Squad

Squad NCO
Satchel
Charge Level +10 Pontoon
marker Bridge Satchel Light MG Medium MG
Charge

Japanese USMC Crew

Officer NCO

Flamethrower Bazooka Panzerfaust

Fire For FOW Tank FOW Gun
Effect

59
 INDEX continued
A BRAND NEW ATS MAGAZINE AWAITS YOU!
SSR, Scenario Special Rules .................... . 3 . 4 . 8
Stacking overview ..................................... . . 5 . 1 Advanced Tobruk has evolved into an acclaimed and extensive new tactical-
Stairwell, Stairwell building ............ . . . 8 . 3 . 1 2 . 4
level game system known as ‘ATS’. What’s more, the system has attracted a
Stationary ........................................... 1 2 . 5 . 6 3 1
Steeple ................................................. . 8 . 3 . 1 3
following in the form of involved enthusiasts that continue to leave their mark on
Step losses ........................................... 1 2 . 5 . 9 1 the system via their feedback at the CH Message Board, a FREE online commu-
Sun glare ................................................ . 6 . 5 . 3 nity created especially for their use. And YOURS!
Sunken roads/lanes/railroads ................ … 8 . 2 7
SUP | FOW on Spotting Table ............... . . . 6 . 3 . 4
We’ve also created a print magazine for ATS hobbyists—each issue crammed
Suppression ....................................... . 1 2 . 5 . 1 7 with relevant game-related articles, variants and scenarios. And that means NEW
Suppression effects ............................ 1 2 . 5 . 1 7 3 DIE CUT COUNTERS in every issue! The second issue of ATS Briefing includes
Surrender ................................................. 1 0 . 7
Swamp ..................................................... 8 . 2 8
an awesome Arab-Israeli Wars1948-1956
variant, complete with new die cut counters
T
depicting various Israeli, Arab Army of Salva-
Tanks ..................................................... 1 5 . 1 . 1 tion, Moslem Brotherhood and Egyptian per-
Target size ................................................ 3 . 5 . 7
sonnel and their weapons and AFVs. What’s
TCA, Turret Covered Arc ............. 1 5 . 3 . 2 , 1 1 . 4 . 2
Terms, acronyms ........................................ 2 . 2
more, a collection of compelling scenarios de-
Terrain based CA restrictions .......... … . 1 2 . 6 . 3 3 picting battles from the 1948 War of Indepen-
Terrain Chart ................................................ 7 . 1 dence, early 1950’s action in the Arava, and
Terrain rules ................................................ 7 . 0
armored thrusts from the Sinai War of 1956
Terrain types ................................................ 8 . 0
Time-fuzed HE ammunition ..................... …14.11
come in this jam-packed new issue.
Topography .......................................... 6.1, 3.1.1 The best place to keep up with the latest ATS
Tower ................................................... .8.3.12.2
Towing ....................................................... . 1 1 . 5
action is at our website, www.Criticalhit.com.
Tracked vehicle .......................................... 3 . 5 . 6 Be sure to sign up for the CH Message Board
Tracks ........................................................ . 8 . 2 0 at www.Criticalhit.com/Invision. The message
Transporting ............................................... . 1 1 . 5
board has already attracted twenty thousand
Trucks as targets...12.5.8, 3.5.53, 12.5.1322
Tunnel Infiltration ..................................... 9 . 6 . 6 3
posts and 1000+ members...and counting.
Turns ..................................................... 4.1, 4.4
Turret Covered Arc, TCA ............... 15.3.2, 11.4.2
Turret marker ........................................... 1 5 . 3 . 3 DESIGN CREDITS
Turret mounted armament ....................... 15.2.11 Game and System Design: Raymond J. Tapio.
Turrets ............................................... 15.3, 3.5.8 Development: Drew Dorman, Lieutenant Colonel Mark Johnson, George Anderson,

U Jack Westman, Marc Adda, Kurt Martin, Hans Korting, Jim Jensen, Al Berke, Donald
Under, emplacements....... ........9.1.2, 5.3.22, 6.6.2
Under, bridge ......................................... 8.31.52
Unloading ............................................... 11.5.32
USMC Personnel ......................................... . 1 3 . 3
V
Variable turn rules ...................................... . . . 4 . 7
Vehicle Covered Arc, VCA .......................... 1 1 . 4 . 2
Vehicle dust .............................................. 6 . 5 . 2 1
Vehicle movement ....................................... 1 1 . 4
Vehicle stacking .......................................... . . . 5 . 2
Vehicle weapons ......................................... 1 5 . 2
Vehicles ...................................................... 3 . 5 . 5
Vehicles and wrecks, LOS effects ............... …6.2.7
Very small target ......................................... 3 . 5 . 7
Victory conditions ....................................... 3 . 4 . 5
Victory points ............................... 3.4.51, 10.9.7
Volkssturm........ ................................. .........13.4
W
Wadi ........................................................... 8 . 2 9
Wading ................................................... 8.31.41
Walls .......................................................... 8 . 3 0
Water obstacles ........................................... 8 . 3 1
Watercraft. .................................................. 1 5 . 9
Weapons ................................................... . 3 . 5 . 4
Weapons pit (and provision) .... 9.10, 3.4.11, 14.1
Weather ........................................................ 6 . 5
Wheeled vehicle ......................................... 3 . 5 . 6
White Phosphorus ...................................... 6 . 4 . 8
Winded Personnel ................................ 11.3.131
Wire ........................................................... 9 . 1 1
Woods ........................................................ 8 . 3 2
Wrecks and LOS……………………………….6.2.7, 6.45
Carlucci, Mark Porterfield, Mike Nagel, P. J. Norton, Brian Laethem, Pedro Ramis,
Charlie Willmer, Dave Lamb, Jim Thompson, Bob Davis, Michael Stephan, Robert Z.
Gunn, Jr., Terry M. Simo, Danny Secary, John D. DiPonio, David Clark, Christophe
Annen, Rob Fabbro, Kevin Grimsley, Florian Altendorfner, Randolph Boyd, Charles
Myers, Joseph Kelly, Lyonel Reinhardt, Karl Bodenheimer, Dave Cooke, Kim Meints,
James Shelton, John Hovey, Ellis Simpson, David Love, C. Donald Sebolt, John
Carroll, Dave Cheever, Dan Garrett, Dean Halley, Guy Handley, Oliver McClintock ,
Tony Nash, Paul Smith, Roger Symonds, and Tim Weber.
This game is dedicated to the life work of Harold E. ‘Hal’ Hock and the innovations
he brought to tactical-level gaming.
Special Mention: Lorrin Bird, author of World War II Ballistics: Armor and Gunnery;
George Bradford, Publisher of AFV News and creator of the AFV views used in the
game.
©1976, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Critical Hit, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENT PAR TS COST: For a replacement parts price list, send a self-ad-
dressed stamped envelope to: Parts Department, Critical Hit, Inc., PO Box 279,
Croton Falls, NY 10519 or drop us a line by E-mail to Maureen@Criticalhit.com.
Our design department will be happy to take the time to answer queries through
the contact page at our website www.Criticalhit.com.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Much time and effort went into the research effort upon which the Advanced Tobruk
System was based. Without kindly assistance from personnel from the following
organizations, however, nowhere near the required amount of data could have been
assembled. For this reason, the publisher is highly in debt to:
The U.S. ALMC Library, Ft. Lee, Virginia
The Ballistic Research Laboratories, Aberdeen, MD.
The U.S. Airforce Academy Library
The West Point Library
The Morris Swett Technical Library, Ft. Sill, Oklahoma
Donovan Research Library, Ft. Benning, Georgia
The Armor School Library, Ft. Knox, KY
The Library of Congress
The National Archives and
Center of Military History, United States Army
Bird Library at Syracuse University

without whose assistance ADVANCED TOBRUK could never have been designed

60